Upload
others
View
1
Download
0
Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 1
Getting Started
In this chapter, you will receive instruction about the following: X
Understanding the General Workflow 2
Using this Guide 3
Understanding Project SiteManager and LIMS 4
Accessing Support Resources 4
Starting SiteManager 5
Logging On and Changing Your Password 6
Understanding the Main Functions of SiteManager 10
Navigating with the SiteManager Panel 11
Understanding the SiteManager Toolbar 13
Reading the SiteManager Status Bar 13
Understanding SiteManager Menus 14
Opening Multiple SiteManager Windows 15
Controlling the Display of Multiple Windows 15
Closing Versus Exiting 17
Summary 18
2 Getting Started
Understanding the General Workflow
The following diagram shows the general contract workflow in SiteManager.
Create sample records.
Modifystockpiles.
Record test results.
MaterialsManagement
ConstructionManagement
Test samples.
Sample materials.
1. Resolve all discrepancies, disputes, and claims.2. Create final quantity change order.3. Generate final estimate.
Associate materialsto samples and tests.
Archive the contract.
Activate the contract.
Load the contract.
Finalize the contract.
1. Create DWRs.2. Approve diaries.3. Generate progress estimates.4. Resolve discrepancies.5. Approve progress estimates.
Maintain the contract.
Establish sampling andtesting requirements.
Create changeorders.
Lab InformationManagement ( LIMS )
Review and acceptsamples.
Figure 1. General Workflow
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 3
Using this Guide
This guide is divided into chapters. Each chapter may contain sections for objectives, topics, instructor-led exercises, a summary, and a challenge.
Objectives
Each chapter begins with the objectives both you and the instructor should try to achieve.
Topics
Each chapter contains topics corresponding to these objectives. Each topic contains a short description and figure of the Project SiteManager® function being addressed. To further understand the functions, refer to the table of field definitions after each figure.
Instructor-Led Exercises
Identify instructor-led exercises by the bulldozer icon and sequential numbering. Each instructor-led exercise is very explicit and details the specific steps to follow and data to use.
Exercise 2
Figure 2. The Bulldozer Icon and Sequential Numbering Used to Identify Instructor-Led Exercises
Summary
Each section ends with a summary of the main points learned and all of the SiteManager functionality covered in the chapter. Each summary is an excellent reference for the challenge exercise that follows. Remember to use the summary when you return to your office and begin using SiteManager on your own.
Review Exercise
Review exercises provide a means to practice the skills you acquired in the chapters. Read them carefully; the review exercises are more general than instructor-led exercises, but they still provide steps to follow and data to use. As you perform the review exercise, refer to the Summary for tips on SiteManager navigation.
NOTE
FOLLOW THE EXERCISES
CAREFULLY. STAY ON
SCRIPT. THE EXERCISE
DATA HAS BEEN CHOSEN
TO ‘LOOK LIKE’ REAL
WORLD DATA.
4 Getting Started
Understanding Project SiteManager and LIMS
SiteManager is a comprehensive construction management software product that covers the complete construction, materials, and laboratory management process from contract award through contract finalization.
SiteManager software’s Lab Information Management System component, referred to as LIMS, streamlines the current sampling and testing workflow. SiteManager integrates field-based data collection, administration of the contract records and contractor payments with material management in one enterprise-wide software package.
Accessing Support Resources
The following SiteManager documentation and support resources are available to NYSDOT staff.
NYSDOT Help Desk
Direct: (518) 485-8111 Toll Free: (888) 664-9343 Call the NYSDOT Help Desk to have your call logged and referred to the appropriate personnel.
Hours: 6:00 A.M. to 6:00 P.M. (ET), Monday through Friday.
Email: Type Helpdesk, ITS in the State DOT email system.
NYSDOT Web Site
View and download Quick Reference Guides and other references from the NYSDOT web site at the following URL: https://www.dot.ny.gov/portal/page/portal/main/business-center/trns-port/modules/site-manager
Usage: The IntraDOT also contains a link to this web site.
Generic References
Access the Online Help reference from SiteManager.
Note: Remember that the Online Help is not agency-specific.
QRG
WORKFLOW OF LOGGING
IN, NAVIGATING, AND
WORKING WITH SUPPORT
TICKETS FOR THE
SITEMANAGER SUPPORT
SERVICE CENTER GROUP.
NOTE
USE THE GLOSSARY AS A
REFERENCE THROUGHOUT
THE CLASS.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 5
Starting SiteManager
You may start SiteManager the same way you would any program on your computer, but for the purpose of this exercise you will learn the most common.
Figure 3. Desktop Icon
Exercise 1
In this exercise, learn how to start SiteManager.
1. After using the switcher Double-click the SiteManager desktop icon. The SiteManager Logon window appears.
You’ve started SiteManager.
6 Getting Started
Logging On and Changing Your Password
In addition to a user ID, SiteManager also has password protection.
Figure 4. SiteManager Logon Window
Understanding User IDs
Usage: When your System Administrator first assigns a user ID to you, it will consist of the first letter of your first name followed by the first seven letters of your last name in all lowercase characters.
In most cases, the SiteManager user ID will match your State DOT email system user ID (15 characters) truncated to eight (8) characters. SiteManager user IDs can consist of up to eight (8) case-sensitive characters, so be sure that you have not pressed the Caps Lock key. Remember that each user ID is unique and represents a user’s digital signature.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 7
If using this eight-character rule results in two or more employees having identical user IDs, your System Administrator will replace one letter to make each ID unique.
Understanding Passwords
When you log on to SiteManager for the first time, the default password will be PASSWORD (all uppercase characters).
SiteManager passwords are case-sensitive; they can be all capitals, all lowercase, or a combination, but you must type them the same way each time you log on to SiteManager. Passwords are eight characters long and may contain any combination of letters and numbers, no special characters.
Usage: The SiteManager password is independent from all other NYSDOT passwords.
Changing Passwords
To change your password, on the SiteManager Logon window, click the Change Password button and complete the requested fields.
Figure 5. Change Password Window
Usage: SiteManager is configured to request that your new password be changed based on a 90-day cycle. Three characters must change every time.
Remember these important tips regarding your SiteManager password:
If you have attempted to log on twice and have failed, close the SiteManager Logon window and start again. This will allow you to try to log on again without disabling your password.
If you attempt to log on three times and fail, SiteManager will disable your password.
8 Getting Started
Usage: If you disable your password, to activate your account again, please contact the Help Desk at (518) 485-8111.
Understanding Security Groups
Your system administrator grants access to SiteManager functionality by assigning users to security groups. Your SiteManager user ID, when assigned to a security group, determines the functions and data to which you have access and whether you have update or inquiry privileges to that data. Most users will belong to only one security group, but on occasion, a user may need to have access to more than one group.
If your user ID belongs to only one group, SiteManager displays the SiteManager Panel with the functions available to that security group. If you log on with a user ID assigned to multiple security groups, SiteManager will prompt you to select a security group from the Available Groups window before displaying the SiteManager Panel.
Figure 6. Available Groups Window
Field Name Description
Grp Id Group ID. Agency-defined ID for security group.
Group Name Agency-defined name for security group.
OK Click to enter SiteManager using the selected security group.
Table 1. Available Groups Window – Fields
NOTE
PM = EIC
ASSTPM = OE AND RE
INSP = INSPECTOR
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 9
Exercise 2
In this exercise, learn how to change a default password and log on to SiteManager for the first time.
User ID: regxx01 Password: PASSWORD Connection: Server Group Name: Project Manager (PM) Keys: NA
1. In the SiteManager Logon dialog box, click in the User ID field and type regxx01.
2. In the Password field, type PASSWORD.
3. Click the Change Password button. SiteManager displays the Change Password dialog box.
4. In the Old Password field, type PASSWORD.
5. In the New Password field, type pass1234.
6. In the Confirm Password field, type pass1234.
7. Click the OK button.
8. Select PM Role click on OK or double click on PM Role
You’ve now changed the default password and logged on to SiteManager.
Protecting Passwords
Do not let anybody know your password. SiteManager maintains a record of everything you do in SiteManager. These records are the same as your signature (electronic signature).
NOTE
TRAINER USE YOUR
REGION #: EXAMPLE
reg0301 Thru reg0315
USE SAME USER ID
THROUGHOUT MANUAL
NOTE
KEYS – DATES,
IF TODAY’S DATE IS
USED THEN USE
PREVIOUS DATE
10 Getting Started
Understanding the Main Functions of SiteManager
After starting SiteManager, the SiteManager Panel displays the Main Panel with the main functions of the system as icons. The central functionality of SiteManager is divided into the following areas:
Contract Administration
Daily Work Reports
Pipeline
Contractor Payments
Change Orders
Materials Management
Accessories
Manuals
Reports
Figure 7. SiteManager Panel Window - Main Panel TEST Mode
NOTE
INSTRUCTOR SHOULD
GIVE A HIGH-LEVEL
OVERVIEW OF EACH
ICON ON THE MAIN
PANEL BEFORE
STUDENTS WALK
THROUGH THE NEXT
EXERCISE.
QRG
LIST OF CUSTOM
REPORTS AND WHEN
TO USE
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 11
Navigating with the SiteManager Panel
Use the SiteManager Panel window to navigate to the different areas of SiteManager. Start with the Main Panel that contains the highest level of the different functional groups of SiteManager. Each icon represents a functional group. Double-click an icon to open another panel containing the sub-groups or the actual windows for that function.
Figure 8. Navigating in SiteManager
Note: The plus sign (+) next to an icon means that double-clicking the icon will open another panel, not a window.
NOTE
IF STUDENTS GET LOST
WHILE NAVIGATING, SUGGEST STARTING
FROM MAIN PANEL.
12 Getting Started
Exercise 3
In this exercise, learn how to browse through SiteManager’s panels and open a window.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server Group Name: Project Manager (PM) Keys: NA
1. On the Main Panel panel, double-click the Contract Administration icon.
2. Double-click the Contractor Management icon. View the icons available from the Contractor Management panel.
3. To go up two levels to locate the Daily Work Reports icon, click the Main Panel tab.
4. Double-click the Daily Work Reports icon. View the icons available from the Daily Work Reports panel.
5. To go up a level to locate the Contractor Payments icon, click the Main Panel tab.
6. Double-click the Contractor Payments icon. View the icons available from the Contractor Payments panel.
7. To go down a level to view the icons available from the Estimates panel, double-click the Estimate icon.
Now, let’s open a window from the Contract Records panel.
8. To go up two levels to locate the Contract Administration icon, click the Main Panel tab.
9. Double-click the Contract Administration icon. View the icons available from the Contract Administration panel.
10. Double-click the Contract Records icon. View the icons available from the Contract Records panel.
11. Double-click the Contracts icon. SiteManager displays the Select Contract window.
12. In the Select Contract window, double-click D263073 or D261177. SiteManager displays the Contracts window.
You’ve navigated SiteManager’s panels and opened a window.
NOTE
IF PANELS PERTAIN TO
THE CLASS, OPEN THOSE
NOT COVERED IN THIS
EXERCISE.
NOTE
EXPLAIN UP AND DOWN
CONCEPT, POSSIBLY AS
TIERS.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 13
Understanding the SiteManager Toolbar
Many of the functions available from the menus are also conveniently available from the SiteManager toolbar.
Figure 9. The SiteManager Toolbar (Available while the Contracts window is open)
Exercise 4
In this exercise, identify the buttons on the toolbar.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server Group Name: Project Manager (PM) Keys: D263073 or D261177
1. Place your cursor over a button on the toolbar. SiteManager displays the name of the button.
2. Move your cursor to another button.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 until you have reviewed all of the buttons on the toolbar.
You’ve identified the toolbar buttons.
Tip! If you right-click on the SiteManager toolbar, SiteManager displays a menu with options to adjust how SiteManager displays the toolbar and its buttons. Use the Show Text option to display both larger toolbar buttons and their names.
Reading the SiteManager Status Bar
The SiteManager Status Bar at the bottom of the SiteManager window indicates your status, connection, database region, logon group and user ID.
Figure 10. SiteManager Status Bar
NOTE
THE TOOLBAR BUTTONS
ALSO HAVE
CORRESPONDING MENU
OPTIONS.
DIFFERENT BUTTONS ARE
AVAILABLE IN DIFFERENT
WINDOWS.
ICONS ARE ‘GREYED OUT’ WHEN THEY ARE NOT
AVAILABLE TO SELECT.
NOTE
NOTICE HOW THE
STATUS BAR WILL LOOK
IN PRODUCTION
COMPARED TO THE
TRAINING ENVIRONMENT.
14 Getting Started
Understanding SiteManager Menus
Access SiteManager menus with the mouse or the keyboard. You can also access many SiteManager menu choices using keystroke shortcuts.
The following guidelines apply to SiteManager menus:
Menu choices followed by an arrow () lead to cascading submenus.
Most of the lowest-level menu choices include keystroke shortcuts and display windows when selected.
All menu names and most menu choices include keystroke accelerators denoted by underlined letters. To display the underlined letters, press the ALT key. To open a menu or a menu choice when you see a keystroke accelerator, type the corresponding letter.
Exercise 5
In this exercise, explore the Services menu.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server Group Name: Project Manager (PM) Keys: D263073 or D261177
1. Click the Services menu.
2. Note the choices available from the Services menu.
3. To close the menu, click the Services menu again.
You’ve viewed the choices available on the Services menu.
Tip! Think of the Services menu as a catch-all menu for miscellaneous functions relevant to the active window.
NOTE
USE ‘KITCHEN DRAWER’ ANALOGY FOR THE
SERVICES MENU.
NOTE
HELP IS FOR GENERIC
SOFTWARE. REFER TO THIS
MANUAL FOR FIELD
DEFINITIONS.
NOTE
SERVICES: ATTACHMENTS IS AN
EXAMPLE OF A
CASCADING SUBMENU.
CLICK FILE MENU TO
SHOW A FEW
SHORTCUTS.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 15
Opening Multiple SiteManager Windows
In many instances, you will be working in a SiteManager window and may need to open another window without closing the current one. Use the SiteManager Panel to browse to and open another window. Having opened more than one window of SiteManager, you can then control how the windows display.
Controlling the Display of Multiple Windows
Having opened more than one SiteManager window, you may now use a variety of methods to control the display of the SiteManager windows and your movement between them.
Note: For more specific instruction, refer to the Review section at the end of this chapter.
Using Tile
To divide the screen into the number of SiteManager windows that you have active, use the Window menu’s Tile feature. Typically, you will use Tile to display two SiteManager windows side-by-side vertically to compare the entries in each.
Note: Do not use Tile when more than two SiteManager windows are active since you will not be able to see enough of each SiteManager window to make it worthwhile. With three windows active, tiling will give each window only one third of the screen.
16 Getting Started
Exercise 6
In this exercise, learn to open a second window and use tile.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server Group Name: Project Manager (PM) Keys: D263073 or D261177
1. On the toolbar, click the SiteManager Panel button. SiteManager displays the SiteManager Panel.
2. On the Contract Records panel, double-click the Contract Authority icon. SiteManager displays the Contract Authority window.
3. On the Window menu, select the Tile choice. SiteManager displays both open windows side-by-side.
You’ve tiled open windows.
Using Cascade
To make each of your active SiteManager windows an equal size and arrange the windows in an overlapping offset manner, use the Window menu’s Cascade feature. Typically, you will use Cascade to display more than two open SiteManager windows. When you need to navigate between more than two windows, click the accessible portion of the appropriate window to bring it forward and make it active.
Using Layer
To display the active SiteManager window in a full screen display, use the Window menu’s Layer feature. Typically, you will use Layer to give each active window a full display or to return a single active window to full display after closing other windows.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 17
Closing Versus Exiting
SiteManager follows the same principles of closing a window versus exiting the application as other applications on a Microsoft Windows operating system. When you are in a SiteManager window and you wish to end your work in it, but still continue to work in SiteManager, you should close the window. As with other applications, you only exit when you complete your work and want to log off of the application.
Closing
Close a window in the following three ways:
Click the Close button on the toolbar.
Select the Close choice on the File menu.
Click the Close button on the right side of the window’s title bar.
Exiting
Exit an application in the following three ways:
In SiteManager, click the Exit SiteManager button on the toolbar.
Select the Exit choice on the File menu.
Click the Exit button on the right side of the application’s title bar.
Exercise 7
In this exercise, learn to close a window and exit SiteManager.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server Group Name: Project Manager (PM) Keys: D263073 or D261177
1. On the toolbar, click the Close button. SiteManager closes the active window.
2. On the File menu, select the Exit choice.
You’ve closed a window and exited the application.
18 Getting Started
Summary
To start SiteManager:
1. On your desktop, double-click the SiteManager desktop icon.
To log on to SiteManager:
1. Start SiteManager.
2. On the SiteManager Logon window, in the User ID field, type your user ID.
3. Press the Tab key.
4. In the Password field, type your password.
5. Click OK.
To change your password:
1. Start SiteManager.
2. On the SiteManager Logon window, type your user ID and your current password.
3. Click Change Password.
4. In the Old Password field, type your current password.
5. Press the Tab key.
6. In the New Password field, type your new password.
7. Press the Tab key.
8. In the Confirm Password field, type your new password, again.
9. Click OK.
To open a window:
1. On the SiteManager Panel, double-click the desired window’s icon.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 19
To navigate up or down a level in the SiteManager Panel:
1. Click the desired level’s tab.
To open the SiteManager Panel:
1. On the toolbar, click the SiteManager Panel button.
or
1. Click the File menu.
2. Click the Main Panel choice.
To open more than one window:
1. Open a window of SiteManager.
2. Open the SiteManager Panel.
3. Open another window of SiteManager.
To tile windows:
1. Open the number of windows that you want to tile.
2. Click the Window menu.
3. Click the Tile choice.
To cascade windows:
1. Open the number of windows that you want to cascade.
2. Click the Window menu.
3. Click the Cascade choice.
To navigate between cascaded windows:
1. Click the visible portion of the window you want to view.
To layer windows:
1. Open the number of windows that you want to layer.
2. Click the Window menu.
3. Click the Layer choice.
20 Getting Started
To navigate between layered windows:
1. Click the Window menu.
2. From the list, click the name of the window you want to view.
To close a window:
1. On the toolbar, click the Close button.
or
1. Click the File menu.
2. Click the Close choice.
or
1. On the window’s title bar, click the Close button.
To exit SiteManager:
1. On the toolbar, click the Exit SiteManager button.
or
1. Click the File menu.
2. Click the Exit choice.
or
1. On the application’s title bar, click the Exit button.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 1
Common Functionality
In this chapter, you will receive instruction about the following:
▪ Understanding Security Groups 2
▪ Understanding New and Existing Records 7
▪ Creating Correspondence Logs 10
▪ Understanding Attachments 13
▪ Adding and Running Attachments 15
▪ Searching, Filtering, and Sorting 17
▪ Accessing Additional References 20
▪ Summary 21
▪ Review Exercise 25
2 Common Functionality
Understanding Security Groups
Your system administrator grants access to SiteManager functionality by
assigning users to security groups. Your SiteManager user ID, when
assigned to a security group, determines the functions and data to which
you have access and whether you have update or inquiry privileges to that
data. Most users will belong to only one security group, but on occasion, a
user may need to have access to more than one group.
If your user ID belongs to only one group, SiteManager displays the
SiteManager Panel with the functions available to that security group. If
you log on with a user ID assigned to multiple security groups,
SiteManager will prompt you to select a security group from the Available
Groups window before displaying the SiteManager Panel.
Figure 1. Available Groups Window
Field Name Description
Grp Id Group ID. Agency-defined ID for security group.
Group Name Agency-defined name for security group.
OK Click to enter SiteManager using the selected security group.
Table 1. Available Groups Window - Fields
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 3
Understanding Inquiry Privileges
The user, Ron Guidry, belongs to both the Inspector, Assistant PM and
PM security groups. Security groups determine how SiteManager displays
window functions. The Inspector security group provides inquiry access to
the Correspondence Log window.
Inquiry privileges give users the ability to view data in a window, but not
enter or modify data.
Exercise 1
In this exercise, learn how to choose a security group from the
Available Groups list box and how security groups affect rights and
available icons.
1. User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Inspector (INSP)
Keys: D261177
2. Start and log on to SiteManager as user regxx01.
3. In the Available Groups window, in the Group Name column,
double-click Inspector. SiteManager opens with the
SiteManager Panel window’s Main Panel displaying the
SiteManager functions available to that security group.
Now, let’s see how a security group affects available icons.
4. Double-click the Daily Work Reports icon. SiteManager
displays the Daily Work Reports panel.
5. Take note of the icons available to an Inspector.
6. Click the Main Panel tab.
Now, let’s see how security groups affect rights.
7. Double-click the Contract Administration icon. SiteManager
displays the Contract Administration panel.
8. Double-click the Contract Records icon. SiteManager
displays the Contract Records panel.
9. Double-click the Correspondence Log icon. SiteManager
displays the Select Correspondence window.
4 Common Functionality
Now, let’s open a correspondence log.
10. In the Contract ID column, double-click D261177
11. In the Correspondence Log area, in the Major Topics
column, double-click Certificate of Insurance.
12. Does this user have update or inquiry privileges? ___________
13. To prepare for the next exercise, on the toolbar, click the Exit
SiteManager button.
You’ve viewed a panel with limited icons and a window with
inquiry privileges.
ANSWERS
11. INQUIRY
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 5
Understanding Update Privileges
The Assistant PM security group provides update privileges to the same
window that the Inspector security group had inquiry privileges.
Update privileges to a window give the user the ability to enter and
modify data.
Exercise 2
In this exercise, learn how logging on using a different security
group affects available icons and privileges.
1. User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Assistant PM (ASSTPM)
Keys: D261177
2. Start and log on to SiteManager as user regxx01.
3. In the Available Groups window, in the Group Name column,
double-click Assistant PM. SiteManager opens with the
SiteManager Panel window’s Main Panel displaying the
SiteManager functions available to that security group.
Now, let’s see how a different security group affects available
icons.
4. Double-click the Daily Work Reports icon. SiteManager
displays the Daily Work Reports panel.
5. Please note the additional icons available to an Assistant PM.
6. Click the Main Panel tab.
NOTE
DIARY AND DIARY
ADJUSTMENTS ARE NOW
AVAILABLE.
NOTE
ASSTPM = OE/RE
6 Common Functionality
Now, let’s see how a different security group affects rights.
7. Double-click the Contract Administration icon. SiteManager
displays the Contract Administration panel.
8. Double-click the Contract Records icon. SiteManager
displays the Contract Records panel.
9. Double-click the Correspondence Log icon. SiteManager
displays the Correspondence Log window open to a new
record.
10. On the toolbar, click the Open button. SiteManager displays
the Select Correspondence window.
Now, let’s open a correspondence log.
11. In the Contract ID column, double-click D261177.
12. In the Correspondence Log area, in the Major Topics
column, double-click Transmit Amendment No.1.
13. Does this user have update or inquiry privileges? ___________
You’ve viewed a panel with wider access to icons and a window
with update privileges.
ANSWERS
12. UPDATE
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 7
Understanding New and Existing Records
When you first enter a SiteManager window and have the proper authority
and update rights, you can do the following:
▪ Open an existing record
▪ Create a new record using the current keys
▪ Create a new record by choosing keys
Understanding Keys
Keys are the ‘key’ pieces of information needed to accurately identify a
particular record, whether new or existing. Keys may include information
such as contract ID (D number), project number (PIN), and so on.
Opening Existing Records
Existing records are records that you or another user already created and
saved.
Exercise 3
In this exercise, learn how to open an existing record.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Assistant PM (ASSTPM)
Keys: D261177; 2 (correspondence serial number)
1. With the Correspondence Log window open, on the toolbar,
click the Open button. SiteManager displays the Select
Correspondence window.
2. In the Correspondence Log area, in the Major Topics
column, double-click Certificate of Insurance.
SiteManager displays the Correspondence Log window.
You’ve opened an existing correspondence log.
8 Common Functionality
Creating New Records with Current Keys
New records must be correctly associated with a contract.
Exercise 4
In this exercise, learn how to create a new record with the current
keys (that is, for the same contract ID as the existing
correspondence log).
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Assistant PM (ASSTPM)
Keys: D261177
1. With the Correspondence Log window open, on the toolbar,
click the New button. SiteManager displays the Correspondence
Log window with blank fields for a new record on the current
contract.
Note: SiteManager automatically associated the blank record to
the contract you chose in a previous exercise.
You’ve created a new correspondence log with the current keys.
USAGE
ASSTPM AND ABOVE
GROUPS CAN CREATE
CORRESPONDENCE
LOGS. ALL OTHER
GROUPS HAVE READ-ONLY ACCESS. THE
OTHER CONCEPTS
DEMONSTRATED IN THE
EXERCISE APPLY TO
OTHER WINDOWS
THROUGHOUT
SITEMANAGER.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 9
Creating New Records by Choosing Keys
To identify initial values for new or existing records, choose keys. In some
instances, SiteManager restricts access to windows until you choose keys.
For example, to create a new correspondence log, SiteManager requires
you to choose keys before you can save. Choose a contract for which to
create a new record.
Exercise 5
In this exercise, learn how to choose keys to specify initial values or
to create a new record for a different contract than the current
contract.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Assistant PM (ASSTPM)
Keys: D261177
1. With the Correspondence Log window open to a new
record, from the Services menu, select the Choose Keys
choice. SiteManager displays the Select Correspondence
window.
2. In the Contract ID area, double-click D263073.
SiteManager displays the Correspondence Log window with
blank fields for a new record on the newly chosen contract.
You’ve chosen new keys to create a new correspondence log.
NOTE
THE CHOOSE KEYS
CHOICE IS NOT
AVAILABLE UNLESS ON A
NEW RECORD.
NOTE
KEY FOR THIS EXERCISE
IS THE CONTRACT.
OPEN EXISTING
RECORDS
NEW NEW RECORD
ON SAME CONTRACT
(KEY)
CHOOSE KEYS NEW
RECORD ON A
DIFFERENT CONTRACT
(KEY)
10 Common Functionality
Creating Correspondence Logs
To add and modify records of correspondence related to a specific
contract, use the Correspondence Log window.
Use the Correspondence Log window to do the following:
▪ Describe a document that a user sent or received.
▪ Identify related records and disputes.
▪ Attach reference documents.
▪ Forward a correspondence record to another user.
▪ Open reference documents received with correspondence
records from other users.
Figure 2. Correspondence Log Window
USAGE
ALL EMAIL
NOTIFICATIONS OCCUR
VIA STATE DOT EMAIL
SYSTEM.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 11
Field Name Description
Contract ID Agency-defined ID of the contract associated with the correspondence. Read-only field.
Contract Correspondence Serial Number
System-generated serial number for the correspondence record. Read-only field.
Correspondence Type Dropdown list with agency-defined types of correspondence.
Received/Sent (no label)
Dropdown list with choices of ‘Received’ and ‘Sent’ to identify the correspondence.
On Date on which the correspondence was received or sent. Cannot be in the future. Defaults to the system date.
Correspondence ID User-defined alphanumeric ID to identify the correspondence.
Sent From Name of the person or agency sending the document.
Sent To Name of the person or agency receiving the document.
Document Category Dropdown list with agency-defined category of correspondence. Usage: From where the document came.
Document Location Physical location of the correspondence.
Major Topics Major topics associated with the correspondence.
Related Correspondence
Serial number of a related correspondence record.
Related Correspondence (2nd field)
Type of a related correspondence record
Required Response Text
Description of the response from the Document Submission window.
Dispute Dispute ID associated with this correspondence.
Table 2. Correspondence Log Window - Fields
12 Common Functionality
Exercise 6
In this exercise, learn how to create a correspondence log record.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Assistant PM (ASSTPM)
Keys: D261177
In the Correspondence Log window, in the Correspondence Type
dropdown list, select the Civil Rights/EEO choice.
1. In the next dropdown list, select the Received choice.
2. In the On field, type today’s date. Ex 11/15/16
3. In the Sent From field, type A. Summersville.
4. In the Sent To field, type EIC, I. Smith.
5. In the Document Category dropdown list, select the
Labor choice.
6. In the Document Location field, type WageRateFile. The
field accepts only ‘WageRateFi.’
7. In the Major Topics field, type Wage Rate Interview –
today’s date.
8. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
You’ve created a correspondence log.
NOTE
SOME FIELDS HAVE
LIMITED SPACE FOR
TEXT. MAY NEED TO
ABBREVIATE.
DEMO
DOUBLE-CLICK IN FIELD
OR TAB INTO FIELD TO
DEMONSTRATE HOW TO
SELECT ALL BEFORE
TYPING.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 13
Understanding Attachments
To attach PDF documents to SiteManager records, use the OLE
attachment function. OLE, short for Object Linking and Embedding, is a
Microsoft® Windows® feature that provides a means to share a file
between application programs.
Usage: Do not use the Plug-in or URL attachment types.
Figure 3. OLE Attachment Window
NOTE
WITH OLE, LINK
DOCUMENTS AND
SPREADSHEETS (PDF), LIKE WAGE RATE
INTERVIEW REPORTS
AND PRECON MEETING
ATTENDEES AND
MINUTES REPORTS, TO
CORRESPONDENCE
LOGS.
USAGE
USE PDFS AND
“LOCKDOWN FILLABLES
ONLY” FOR ALL
CONSTRUCTION-RELATED ATTACHMENTS.
USAGE
NEVER SELECT THE RUN
AUTOMATICALLY CHECK
BOX.
14 Common Functionality
Field Description
Attachment Description Information
Name Identifies the attachment.
OLE Contents Type of file attachment.
Description Detail about the contents or purpose of the attachment.
Attachment Security - Available Security Groups
Group ID Group ID. Agency-defined ID for security group.
Description Agency-defined name for security group.
Attachment Security - Buttons
Add -> Click to provide attachment access to selected security group.
Add All ->> Click to provide attachment access to all available security groups.
<- Remove Click to remove attachment access from selected security group.
<<- Rem All Click to remove attachment access from all assigned security groups.
Attachment Security - Selected Security Groups
Description Agency-defined name for security group.
Access Type of access granted.
General
Run Automatically
Usage: Do not use.
OK Click to add the attachment to the record.
Cancel Click to cancel the creation of the attachment.
Table 3. OLE Attachment Window - Fields
USAGE
EXPLAIN HOW RUN
AUTOMATICALLY WORKS
AND WHY NYSDOT IS NOT
USING.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 15
Adding and Running Attachments
To attach an existing document to a correspondence record, click the
Attachments button on the toolbar. On the extended toolbar, click the New
OLE button.
Exercise 7
In this exercise, learn how to attach a file to a correspondence
record, provide access to the attachment, and run it.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Assistant PM (ASSTPM)
Keys: D261177
With the Correspondence Log window open, on the toolbar, click
the Attachments button. SiteManager displays the Attachments
window and extends the toolbar.
1. On the extended toolbar, click the New OLE button.
SiteManager displays the Insert Object window.
2. Click the Create From File tab.
Now, let’s locate the file to attach.
3. Click the Browse button. SiteManager displays a Browse
window.
4. To locate the file you wish to attach, browse to
P:\\Office of Operations/Construction/SiteManager/
Training/Attachments
5. If necessary in the Files of type dropdown list, select the All
Files (*.*) choice (may be the default).
6. Select the DB_D_Contract.pdf file.
7. On the Browse window, click the Open button.
8. On the Insert Object window, click the OK button.
SiteManager closes the Insert Object window and displays
the OLE Attachment window.
NOTE
NOTE THE APPEARANCE
OF THE ATTACHMENTS
BUTTON.
16 Common Functionality
Now, let’s add a name and description, assign security groups, and
save the attachment.
9. In the Name field, type DB Chart.
10. In the Description field, type DB Chart D Contract
11. In the Attachment Security area, click the Add All button.
SiteManager makes the attachment available to all security
groups.
12. Click the Add button. SiteManager displays the new
attachment in the Attachments window.
13. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
Now, let’s run the attachment.
14. In the Attachments window, in the Name column, double-
click DB Chart. SiteManager opens an application window
to display the file.
15. To close the attachment’s application window, on the
window’s title bar, click the Close button.
16. To close the Attachment window, on the toolbar, click the
Attachments button again.
Now, let’s prepare for the next exercise.
17. To close the Correspondence Log window, click the Close
button. SiteManager displays a message prompting you to
save changes.
18. In the message, click the Yes button. SiteManager displays
the Contract Records panel.
You’ve attached a file to a correspondence log,
assigned access to it, and ran the attachment.
NOTE
NOTE THE CHANGE IN
THE APPEARANCE OF
THE ATTACHMENTS
BUTTON.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 17
Searching, Filtering, and Sorting
SiteManager provides many means to locate data. The Search, Filter,
Filter Search, and Sort functions available from the right-click menu and
the Quick Find and Quick Sort functions available from Select windows
throughout SiteManager are the most useful.
Understanding Search and Filter Search
Some fields require you to select from a list of valid choices. This type of
field displays a search lens (or ‘magnifying glass’) when you move your
mouse pointer over the field. If you’d like a subset of possible choices,
type in the field, then right-click on the field and select the Filter Search
choice. If you’d like to see all possible choices, select the Search choice.
Understanding Sort and Filter
When on a list window, right-click on a row and select the Sort or Filter
choice to refine your results. Each time you open a window, SiteManager
automatically applies the default sort or filter. The current filter will stay
in effect until you clear it or exit SiteManager. To remove the filter, click
the Clear button.
18 Common Functionality
Using the Quick Sort
To locate a record quickly, sort the column in ascending order.
Figure 4. Select Window (with Quick Sort)
Exercise 8
In this exercise, learn how to apply a quick sort to locate a contract
item.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Assistant PM (ASSTPM)
Keys: D261177; 806212 (project)
1. On the Contract Records panel, double-click the Items
icon. SiteManager displays the Items window.
2. On the toolbar, click the Open button. SiteManager displays
the Select Contract Item window.
3. In the Contract area, double-click D261177.
4. In the Project area, double-click 806212.
5. In the Contract Item area, to sort by item code, click the
Item Code column heading.
6. In the Item Code column, double-click 201.06 for category
number 0001. SiteManager displays the Items window.
You’ve sorted the list of contract items to more easily locate a
specific item.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 19
Using the Quick Find
To jump to a record quickly, sort the column in ascending order and type
the desired value in the Find field. SiteManager selects the first match.
Figure 5. Select Window (with Quick Find)
Exercise 9
In this exercise, learn how to apply a quick find to locate contract items.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Assistant PM (ASSTPM)
Keys: D261177; 806212 (project)
1. On the toolbar, click the Open button. SiteManager displays
the Select Contract Item window.
2. To sort the column and activate the Find feature, click the
Item Code column heading.
3. In the Find field, type 209.13. SiteManager selects the first
item with that value.
4. Select the item with category number 0001 and line number 0014.
5. Click the OK button. SiteManager displays the Items window.
6. To close the Items window, on the toolbar, click the Close button.
You’ve used the quick find feature to quickly locate a specific
contract item.
NOTE
CATEGORY NBR = FISCAL SHARE
LINE NBR = SEQUENCE NUMBER
20 Common Functionality
Accessing Additional References
To access additional reference materials from within SiteManager, use the
Manuals panel.
Usage: To view web pages containing many links to additional reference
materials, double-click the Manuals panel’s User Manual icon (for
construction-related documentation) and the Sampling and Testing
Procedures icon (for materials-related documentation).
Exercise 10
In this exercise, learn how to access construction-related
documentation.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Assistant PM (ASSTPM)
Keys: NA
1. On the SiteManager Panel window, click the Main Panel
tab.
2. Double-click the “Quick Reference Guides” icon.
SiteManager displays the Quick Reference Guides panel.
3. Double-click the “Construction QRGs” icon. SiteManager
displays the New York State Department of Transportation
Construction QRG web page.
4. To close the window, on the browser’s title bar, click the
Close button.
5. On the SiteManager Panel window, click the Main Panel
tab.
You’ve opened the New York State Department of Transportation
Construction SM QRG web page.
USAGE
DOUBLE-CLICK THE
SAMPLING AND TESTING
PROCEDURES ICON TO
VIEW THE TECHNICAL
SERVICES WEB PAGE
WITH SIMILAR LINKS FOR
MATERIALS.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 21
Summary
To change security groups:
1. Using a user ID that belongs to multiple security groups, log
on to SiteManager.
2. In the Available Groups list box, select a security group.
3. Click the OK button.
To create a new record with existing keys:
1. With an existing record open, on the toolbar, click the New
button.
To create a new record with new keys:
1. With an existing record open, on the toolbar, click the New
button.
2. On the Services menu, select the Choose Keys choice.
To perform a quick sort:
1. Click the column heading.
To perform a quick find:
1. On the column you wish to use to find a value, perform a
quick sort.
2. In the Find field, begin typing the value you wish to find.
To search:
1. Right-click in a field.
2. From the right-click menu, click the Search choice.
3. Select your choice from the list.
22 Common Functionality
To filter search:
1. Type a desired value in a field.
2. Right-click in the field.
3. From the right-click menu, click the Filter Search choice.
4. Select your choice from the list.
To filter:
1. Right-click on a row.
2. From the right-click menu, click the Filter choice.
3. In the Filter Criteria window, click the Add button.
4. Select your criterion from the Field, Condition, and Value
fields.
5. Click the OK button.
6. In the message, click the OK button.
To clear filters:
1. Right-click on a row.
2. From the right-click menu, click the Filter choice.
3. Click the Clear button.
4. Click the OK button.
5. In the message, click the OK button.
To open an attachment:
1. On the toolbar, click the Attachments button.
2. In the Attachments window, double-click the attachment.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 23
To attach a document to a record:
1. Open the window and the record to which you wish to
attach a file.
2. On the toolbar, click the Attachments button.
3. On the extended toolbar, click the New OLE button.
4. Click the Create From File tab.
5. On the Insert Object window, click the Browse button.
6. Locate the file you wish to attach in the directory.
7. In the Files of type dropdown list, select the All Files (*.*)
choice.
8. Select the file.
9. On the Browse window, click the Open button.
10. On the Insert Object window, click the OK button.
11. In the OLE Attachment window, in the Name field, type the
desired name of the attachment.
12. In the Description field, type the desired description of the
attachment.
13. In the Attachment Security area, click the Add All button.
14. Click the Add button.
15. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
To access the New York State Department of Transportation
Construction web page:
1. On the Main Panel panel, double-click the Manuals icon.
2. On the Manuals panel, double-click the User Manual icon.
24 Common Functionality
To access the Correspondence Log window:
1. On the Main Panel panel, double-click the Contract
Administration icon.
2. On the Contract Administration panel, double-click the
Contract Records icon.
3. On the Contract Records panel, double-click the
Correspondence Log icon.
To create a correspondence log:
1. In the Correspondence Log window, in the
Correspondence Type dropdown list, select the desired
choice.
2. In the next dropdown list, select either the Received or Sent
choice.
3. In the On field, type the desired date in (MMDDYY
format).
4. In the Sent From field, type the sender’s name.
5. In the Sent To field, type the recipient’s name.
6. In the Document Category dropdown list, select the desired
choice.
7. In the Document Location field, type the desired document
location.
8. In the Major Topics field, type the desired value.
9. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 25
Review Exercise
In this exercise, demonstrate how to view an existing
correspondence log’s attachment and create a new correspondence
log.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Assistant PM (ASSTPM)
Keys: D261177
Navigate to the Correspondence Log window.
(Contract Administration | Contract Records | Correspondence Log)
1. Open the log for Certificate of Insurance on contract
D261177.
2. View the attachment. What is the Signature date noted on
the CONR 250? _______________________
3. Create a new correspondence log.
4. Associate it to D263073 by choosing keys for today. Bob
Mackie sent the Pre-Construction Attendees list to Bev
Thomas today. The major topic is PreCon Attendees;
correspondence type is Regional Construction; document
category is Meetings.
5. Exit SiteManager.
ANSWER
3. 3/1/2017
26 Common Functionality
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 1
Creating and Modifying Daily Work Reports
In this chapter, you will receive instruction about the following:
▪ Understanding Daily Work Reports 2
▪ Creating DWRs 4
▪ Recording Basic DWR Information 7
▪ Tracking Contractors, Superintendents and Personnel 8
▪ Tracking Contractor Equipment 13
▪ Selecting and Recording Work Items 16
▪ Previewing DWRS 28
▪ Understanding Read-Only Format 28
▪ Copying DWRs 29
▪ Modifying Copied DWRs 30
▪ Summary 40
▪ Review Exercise 46
2 Creating and Modifying Daily Work Reports
Understanding Daily Work Reports
Use Daily Work Reports (DWRs) to record daily work and construction
activity performed on the contract. Inspectors may create DWRs both in
the field and in the office.
Typically, for each contract, each inspector submits one DWR per day.
Only the inspector who creates the DWR may modify it. In other words:
One DWR per person, per contract, per day.
Figure 1. Daily Work Reports Window
Panel Name Description
DWR Info Create a new DWR and record information about the day.
Contractors Enter daily data about the prime and subcontractor(s), superintendent(s), and variable labor (by personnel type).
Contractor Equip
Document the daily presence and use of equipment on the job site for a selected contractor.
Daily Staff Usage: Do not use this panel.
Work Items Select available contract items and record usage data for installed work items.
Table 1. Daily Work Reports Window – Panels
QRG
DAILY WORK REPORTS
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 3
Exercise 1
In this exercise, learn how to open the Daily Work Reports window.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Inspector (INSP)
Keys: NA
1. Start and log onto SiteManager as user regxx01.
2. On the Main Panel panel, double-click the Daily Work
Reports icon.
3. On the Daily Work Reports panel, double-click the Daily
Work Reports icon. SiteManager displays the Daily Work
Reports window.
You’ve opened the Daily Work Reports window.
4 Creating and Modifying Daily Work Reports
Creating DWRs
To create a new DWR and record basic information about that day, use the
DWR Info panel.
Figure 2. Daily Work Reports Window – DWR Info Panel
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 5
Field Name Description
Key Information
Contract ID ID for the contract. Required for a minimal DWR.
Inspector DWR author’s name. Required for a minimal DWR.
DWR Date Date covered by this report. Required for a minimal DWR.
DWR State Information
Locked Indicates state of the DWR. If Yes, cannot modify DWR; DWR transferred via pipeline to the other mode and the editable version is available only in the other mode.
Authorized Indicates state of the DWR. If Yes, cannot modify DWR; DWR approved for payment.
Authorized Date Date the DWR was authorized on a diary.
Weather Information
Temperature: High and Low
High and low temperature recorded for the work day.
Weather Conditions: A.M. and P.M.
Significant weather conditions for the morning and evening for the work day.
Installed and On-Site Indicators
Work Items Are Installed
Usage: Indicates data entered on Work Items panel. Customized generic software’s ‘No Work Items Installed’ label and removed check boxes.
Contractors Are On Site
Usage: Indicates data entered on Contractors panel. Customized generic software’s ‘No Contractors On Site’ label and removed check boxes.
Work Suspended Information
Work Suspended
Use when suspending work for any reason during a single day. To make available the Suspended Time and Resumed Time fields, select this check box.
Suspended Time
If work stops during the day, record the time.
Resumed Time If work starts again after a suspension, record the time.
Remarks
Remark Types (no label)
SiteManager displays a check mark next to the remark type to indicate that a remark exists.
Remarks Remarks for the day. User entered; no size limit.
Spell Check Click to check spelling of the selected remark type’s remark text.
Table 2. Daily Work Reports Window – DWR Info Panel – Fields
6 Creating and Modifying Daily Work Reports
Understanding DWR Dates
You may create a DWR for the current day or a previous date; you cannot
create a DWR for a future date. SiteManager restricts you from creating a
duplicate DWR for a date on which you already created a DWR.
Handling Mistakes
If you create a DWR with an incorrect date, do not record any work on the
DWR and do not authorize the DWR. Once you create a DWR, you
cannot delete it and cannot change the date.
Choosing Keys to Create New DWRs
To create a new record, you must first choose keys.
Exercise 2
In this exercise, learn how to choose keys to create a new DWR.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Inspector (INSP)
Keys: NA
1. While on the Daily Work Reports window’s DWR Info
panel in new mode, on the Services menu, select the
Choose Keys choice.
2. In the Contract ID area, double-click D263073.
SiteManager displays a new DWR for that contract with
today’s date.
Now, let’s change the date.
3. In the DWR Date field, type today’s date.
4. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
You’ve chosen keys to create a new DWR with minimal information.
NOTE
DOUBLE-CLICK TO OPEN
CALENDAR FOR DATE
FIELD. NOT USEFUL IN
TRAINING, BUT IS
USEFUL IN PRODUCTION.
NOTE
ONE DWR PER PERSON PER CONTRACT PER DAY
NOTE
DOUBLE-CHECK YOUR
DATE BEFORE YOU SAVE.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 7
Recording Basic DWR Information
To record temperatures, weather conditions, and remarks, use the Basic
DWR Info panel.
Exercise 3
In this exercise, learn how to record basic DWR information.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Inspector (INSP)
Keys: D263073; today’s date (DWR)
1. On the Daily Work Reports window, on the DWR Info panel,
in the High Temperature field, type 73.
2. In the Low Temperature field, type 65.
Now, let’s enter the weather conditions.
3. In the A.M. dropdown list, select the Clear choice.
4. In the P.M. dropdown list, select the Cloudy choice.
Now, let’s enter a remark.
5. In the list of remark types, select the 02 WZTC choice.
6. In the Remarks field, type Shoulder closure on right side of
road at Rt 73 northbound – Sta 6+250 right side, placed ‘no
shoulder’ signage and cones placed at 12m.
Now, let’s enter another remark.
7. In the list of remark types, select the 04 Contrctr Work Hrs
choice.
8. In the Remarks field, type 0630 – 1700.
9. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
You’ve recorded temperatures, weather conditions, and remarks.
TIP
USE CTRL+C AND
CTRL+V TO COPY AND
PASTE TO AND FROM
THE REMARKS FIELD AND
OTHER DOCUMENTS.
NOTE
SPELL CHECK IS
AVAILABLE.
8 Creating and Modifying Daily Work Reports
Tracking Contractors, Superintendents and Personnel
To report contractors, superintendents, and personnel that appear on site
and record daily information about them, use the Contractors panel.
Important! To record work items installed by contractors, be sure to
report all contractors that appeared on site that day. Only the prime and
subcontractors associated with a contract and approved for specific work
items are accessible from the Work Item panel’s Contractor dropdown list.
This is a multi-focus window. After selecting a contractor, select
superintendent and personnel types associated with the selected contractor.
Note: If a subcontractor, superintendent, or personnel type does not
appear on the appropriate dropdown list, notify the Regional Contract
Administrator.
Figure 3. Daily Work Reports Window - Contractors Panel
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 9
Field Name Description
Key Information
Contract ID ID for the contract. Populated from DWR Info panel’s Contract ID field.
Inspector DWR author’s name. Populated from DWR Info panel’s Inspector field.
Date Date covered by this report. Populated from DWR Info panel’s DWR Date field.
Contractor Area
Contractor Name of the vendor.
Nbr of Supervisors Number of supervisors recorded. Auto-calculated.
Nbr of Workers Number of workers recorded. Auto-calculated.
Contractor Hrs Worked
Hours worked by a contractor. Auto-calculated.
Superintendent Area
Superintendent Type of supervisor/foreman.
Hours Worked Usage: Optional.
Personnel Type Area
Personnel Type Title of workers reported.
Nbr of Persons Number of workers present.
Hours Worked Usage: Optional.
Total Hours Usage: Optional.
Table 3. Daily Work Reports Window – Contractors Panel – Fields
10 Creating and Modifying Daily Work Reports
Tracking Prime Contractor and Subcontractors
To track information for the prime contractor and all of the associated
subcontractors, use the Contractor area.
The Contractor dropdown list contains the prime contractor and any
qualified subcontractors.
Exercise 4
In this exercise, learn how to track a contractor.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Inspector (INSP)
Keys: D263073; today’s date (DWR)
1. On the Daily Work Reports window, click the Contractors
tab.
2. On the Contractors panel, click in the Contractor area.
3. On the toolbar, click the New button. SiteManager adds a
row to the Contractor area.
4. In the Contractor dropdown list, select the ECONOMY
PAVING CO INC ** PRIME ** choice.
5. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
You’ve recorded the contractor on site for the day.
NOTE
IF YOU ACCIDENTALY
ADD A ROW, SELECT THE
ROW AND CLICK THE
DELETE BUTTON.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 11
Tracking Contractor Superintendents
To track superintendents (by personnel type), use the Superintendent area.
Exercise 5
In this exercise, learn how to add a superintendent for a contractor.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Inspector (INSP)
Keys: D263073; today’s date (DWR)
1. Click in the Superintendent area.
2. On the toolbar, click the New button. SiteManager adds a new
row to the Superintendent area.
3. In the Superintendent dropdown list, select the
Superintendent choice.
Now, let’s record the name of the superintendent.
4. On the toolbar, click the Remarks button. SiteManager
displays the Remarks window.
5. In the Remarks (Supervisor Remark) field, type John
Brown.
6. To close the Remarks window, on the toolbar, click the
Remarks button.
7. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
You’ve added the name and personnel type for the superintendent
on site that day for the contractor.
USAGE
USE REMARKS TO ENTER
NAMES AND OTHER
DETAILS ABOUT
SUPERINTENDENTS AND
NON-WORKING
FOREMEN.
12 Creating and Modifying Daily Work Reports
Tracking Contractor Personnel
To track working supervisors, foremen and other contractor personnel (by
personnel type and number), use the Personnel Type area.
Exercise 6
In this exercise, learn how to add a working foreman and personnel
types for a contractor.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Inspector (INSP)
Keys: D263073; today’s date (DWR)
1. On the Contractors panel, click in the Personnel Type area.
2. On the toolbar, click the New button. SiteManager adds a new row.
3. In the Personnel Type dropdown list, select the
Laborer - Foreman choice.
4. In the Nbr of Persons field, type 1.
Now, let’s record the name of the working foreman.
5. On the toolbar, click the Remarks button. SiteManager
displays the Remarks window.
6. In the Remarks (Personnel Remark) field,
type Kellyn Reese, on-site 4 hr shift.
7. To close the Remarks window, on the toolbar, click the
Remarks button again.
8. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
USAGE
USE REMARKS TO ENTER
NAMES, HOURS OF
WORK, AND OTHER
DETAILS ABOUT
PERSONNEL TYPES
IMPORTANT FOR POSSIBLE FORCE ACCOUNT.
NOTE
BE SURE TO SELECT A
ROW BEFORE CLICKING
THE REMARKS BUTTON.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 13
Now, let’s record the additional contractor personnel.
9. On the toolbar, click the New button. SiteManager adds a new row.
10. In the Personnel Type dropdown list, select the Laborer
choice.
11. In the Nbr of Persons field, type 3, then, add a Remark.
12. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
You’ve added a working foreman’s personnel type and name and
the number of laborers on site that day for a contractor.
Tracking Contractor Equipment
To record the pieces of equipment present on site and used for a
contractor, use the Contractor Equip panel. Select a contractor and then
from the Equipment ID dropdown list, select a category of equipment.
Note: If a type of equipment does not appear on the appropriate
dropdown list, request to have it added.
Figure 4. Daily Work Reports Window – Contractor Equip Panel
NOTE
EQUIPMENT CATEGORIES
CORRESPOND TO THE
BLUE BOOK, FIRST
CATEGORY LEVEL.
14 Creating and Modifying Daily Work Reports
Field Name Description
Key Information
Contract ID ID for the contract. Populated from DWR Info panel’s Contract ID field.
Inspector DWR author’s name. Populated from DWR Info panel’s Inspector field.
Date Date covered by this report. Populated from DWR Info panel’s DWR Date field.
Contractor Information
Contractor Short name for the vendor who worked on the contract on this date. Populated from Contractors panel.
Nbr of Supervisors
Number of Supervisors. Total of all the supervisors recorded. Auto-calculated from entries in Contractors panel.
Nbr of Workers Number of Workers. Total of all the workers recorded. Auto-calculated from entries in Contractors panel.
Contractor Hrs Worked
Contractor Hours Worked. Hours worked by the contractor on this date. Auto-calculated from entries in Contractors panel.
Equipment Information
Equipment ID – Description
Description of the piece or type of equipment.
Nbr of Pieces Number of Pieces. Usage: Record number of pieces on site for each equipment type.
Nbr Used Number Used. Usage: Record number of pieces used for each equipment type.
Hours Used Usage: Do not use this field.
Table 4. Daily Work Reports Window – Contractor Equip Panel – Fields
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 15
Exercise 7
In this exercise, learn how to record equipment on a DWR.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Inspector (INSP)
Keys: D263073; today’s date (DWR)
1. On the Daily Work Reports window,
click the Contractor Equip tab.
2. Click in the Equipment ID-Description area.
3. On the toolbar, click the New button. SiteManager adds a new row.
4. In the Equipment ID dropdown list,
select the Trucks – On Highway choice.
5. In the Nbr of Pieces field, type 5.
6. In the Nbr Used field, type 3.
Now, let’s record details about the equipment.
7. On the toolbar, click the Remarks button. SiteManager
displays the Remarks window.
8. In the Remarks (General Remarks) field, type
2 – Ford F150s
1 – Ford 350 Utility Truck
9. To close the Remarks window, on the toolbar, click the
Remarks button again.
10. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
You’ve recorded information about the equipment used that day.
NOTE
IN REMARKS, PRESS THE
RETURN KEY TO START A
NEW LINE.
USAGE
LOG IN IDLE EQUIPMENT. THIS EXERCISE
DEMONSTRATES TWO
IDLE TRUCKS.
16 Creating and Modifying Daily Work Reports
Selecting and Recording Work Items
To select from available contract items and view and record usage data for
installed work items, use the Work Items panel.
Important! Before entering work item data, on the Contractors panel,
enter the contractor responsible for the work item.
Understanding the Two Views of the Work Items Panel
The Select Work Items view of the Work Items panel displays a list of
available items for that contract. To enter information about the quantity
of an item a contractor installed, select the work item and click the Record
Work Item button. SiteManager then displays an area to record
information about the quantity and location used that day in the Record
Work Items view.
To toggle between the two views, on the toolbar, click the Record Work
Item button to view and record usage data and the Selects Work Item
button to view available contract items.
Figure 5. Daily Work Reports Window – Work Items Panel (Select Work Item View)
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 17
Field Name Description
Key Information
Contract ID ID for the contract. Populated from DWR Info panel’s Contract ID field.
Inspector DWR author’s name. Populated from DWR Info panel’s Inspector field.
Date Date covered by this report. Populated from DWR Info panel’s DWR Date field.
Select Work Item View Information
Instld Installed. When selected, indicates an installed item.
Project Number Number corresponding to the project that includes the item.
Line Item Number
Contract line item number of the work item.
Category Number
Category number that includes the work item.
Category Description
Description of the category. Usage: Corresponds to the fiscal share.
Item Code Agency-defined code to identify an item.
Description Short description of the work item.
Supplemental Description 1
Additional description for the item.
Supplemental Description 2
Additional description for the item.
Table 5. Daily Work Reports Window – Work Items Panel (Select Work Item View) – Fields
18 Creating and Modifying Daily Work Reports
Figure 6. Daily Work Reports Window – Work Items Panel (Record Work Item View)
Field Name Description
Key Information
Contract ID ID for the contract. Populated from DWR Info panel’s Contract ID field.
Inspector DWR author’s name. Populated from DWR Info panel’s Inspector field.
Date Date covered by this report. Populated from DWR Info panel’s DWR Date field.
Project Nbr Project Number. Number of project on which the item is included.
Line Itm Nbr Line Item Number. Contract line item number of the item.
Item Code ID for the item.
Category Nbr Category Number. Category of the item.
Item Information
Item Desc Item Description. Short description of the work item.
Unit Price Price per unit of item.
Supp Desc 1 Supplemental Description 1.
Supp Desc 2 Supplemental Description 2.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 19
Field Name Description
Record Work Item View
Qty Reported to Date
Quantity Reported to Date. Total of all reported quantities on DWRs, whether authorized or unauthorized and regardless of inclusion on an estimate.
Qty Authorized to Date
Quantity Authorized to Date. Total of all reported quantities on authorized DWRs.
Units Type Unit of measure for the item.
Qty Installed to Date
Quantity Installed to Date. Total of all authorized reported quantities on DWRS included in an estimate of any status. Will always equal the Qty Paid to Date value, unless adjusted on the Estimate Item Detail window.
Bid Qty Bid Quantity. Pertains to the selected line item.
Pay to Plan Qty
Pay to Plan Quantity. Indicates if line item is paid to plan quantity. No overruns allowed.
Status Indicates current status of item.
Qty Paid to Date
Quantity Paid to Date. Total quantity reported on DWRs that were authorized in diaries and included in an estimate of any status.
Current Contract Qty
Current Contract Quantity. Pertains to the contract line item including any change orders. Calculated by the sum of bid quantity and the net change order quantity.
Location Sequence Information
Loc Seq Nbr Location Sequence Number. Pertains to the installation record for the item.
Location Installed
Displays information from the Record Work Item area.
Placed Qty Displays value from Record Work Item area.
Engr Share Displays value from Record Work Item area.
Templt Used Indicates if a DWR template was used.
20 Creating and Modifying Daily Work Reports
Field Name Description
Record Work Item Information
Placed Qty Quantity of the work item installed on this date. May be calculated or manually entered depending on the use of a template.
Engr Share Usage: Breakdown of estimate depending on need for tracking (for example, emergency site work).
Contractor Name of contractor responsible for the work item. Required.
As Built Qty As Built Quantity. Usage: Do not use.
Loc Seq Nbr Sequence number for the installation record for the item.
Location Location where the work item was installed. Items may be installed at multiple locations. Description does not have to be unique for each entry. Required.
Measured Indicator
Indicates the installation of this work item was measured.
From: Station Station ID that identifies where the installation of the work item starts.
From: Offset Offset from the station ID that identifies where the installation of the work item starts.
From: Distance
Distance of the offset from the station ID that identifies where the installation of the work item starts.
To: Station Station ID that identifies where the installation of the work item ends.
To: Offset Offset from the station ID that identifies where the installation of the work item ends.
To: Distance Distance of the offset from the station ID that identifies where the installation of the work item ends.
Material Inspection Detail Information
Material Component
Short material description.
Cont Est Matrl Qty
Contract Estimated Material Quantity. Current quantity of contract items multiplied by the conversion factor.
Approved Qty Approved Satisfied Represented Material Quantity. Total material quantity reported on the Contract panel of the Maintain Sample Information window.
Reprt Matrl Qty
Reported Material Quantity. Total material installed is calculated based on installed quantity of contract item multiplied by the conversion factor.
Matrl Unit Material Unit. Item material unit.
Table 6. Daily Work Reports Window – Work Items Panel (Record Work Item View) – Fields
QRG
FINAL MEASURED
QUANTITY PROCESS.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 21
Recording Items on a DWR
To record a quantity installed for an item, enter the value in the Placed Qty
field, even a zero Qty, the contract that performed the work, and a
description for each location.
Exercise 8
In this exercise, learn how to select and record a work item.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Inspector (INSP)
Keys: D263073; today’s date (DWR)
1. On the Daily Work Reports window, click the Work Items
tab. SiteManager displays the Select Work Item view, which
lists the available contract items.
2. To sort the list by item code, click the Item Code column heading.
3. In the Item Code column, scroll to and click 619.01 for
category number 0001.
4. On the toolbar, click the Record Work Item button.
SiteManager displays the Record Work Item view, which
presents the usage data for that work item.
5. On the toolbar, click the New button. SiteManager inserts a
new row and an area to record work against that item.
Now, let’s enter the placed quantity, contractor, and location.
6. In the Placed Qty field, type 0.20.
7. In the Contractor dropdown list,
select the ECONOMY PAVING CO INC ** PRIME **
choice.
8. In the Location field, type Rt 73 - outlet of DR7-14A.
9. In the Measured Indicator area, click the Final button.
NOTE
IN THE NEXT CHAPTER, WE’LL SEE HOW TO
ACCESS CONTRACT S&T
REQUIREMENTS AND
HOW TO CREATE
SAMPLES FROM THE
WORK ITEMS PANEL.
22 Creating and Modifying Daily Work Reports
Now, let’s add a remark.
10. On the toolbar, click the Remarks button. SiteManager
displays the Remarks window.
11. In the Remarks field,
type Payment for WZTC for this Estimate Period as per
WZTC report..
12. To close the Remarks window, on the toolbar, click the
Remarks button.
13. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
Now, let’s return to the Select Work Item view.
14. On the toolbar, click the Selects Work Item button.
SiteManager displays the list of available contract items.
You’ve recorded a placed quantity for a contractor at a location for an item.
Understanding DWR Templates
Use a DWR template to collect data not stored elsewhere in SiteManager.
Often the template uses the data to calculate a value returned (or inserted)
into the Placed Qty field on SiteManager’s Daily Work Reports window’s
Work Items panel.
If an item for a contract has an associated DWR template that returns a
value, then SiteManager may restrict users from manually entering a value
in the Placed Qty field. If you cannot edit the Placed Qty field,
SiteManager requires a DWR template to calculate the placed quantity.
Some templates will calculate a placed quantity, but will still allow the
user to edit the resulting value. In this case the calculated values will be in
the Placed Qty field; however, the field will still be editable. If you edit a
calculated value from a template in the Placed Quantity field, a
Mismatched label will appear on the window.
DWR templates serve one or more of the following purposes:
▪ Store contract activity that standard SiteManager windows
do not store.
▪ Calculate placed quantity.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 23
Usage: If the DWR Template button is available on the toolbar, may use
template—even for a placed quantity of zero. May attach worksheet.
Figure 7. Daily Work Reports Window – Work Items Panel – DWR Template Button (detail)
Figure 8. DWR Template Window
Figure 9. DWR Template - AREASHAP1M – Example
24 Creating and Modifying Daily Work Reports
Recording Items with DWR Templates
For items with associated DWR templates, use the template to calculate
the placed quantity.
Exercise 9
In this exercise, learn how to select and record another work item,
with an associated DWR template.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Inspector (INSP)
Keys: D263073; today’s date (DWR)
In the Item Code column, scroll to and click 207.20 for
category number 0001.
1. On the toolbar, click the Record Work Item button.
SiteManager displays the Record Work Item view for that
work item.
2. On the toolbar, click the New button. SiteManager inserts a
new row and an area to record work against that item.
Now, let’s enter the engineering share, contractor and location.
3. In the Engr Share field, type 03.
4. In the Contractor dropdown list, select the ECONOMY
PAVING CO INC choice.
5. In the Location field, type Rt 73 - outlet of DR7-14A.
6. In the Measured Indicator area, click the Final button.
Now, let’s enter the stationing information for the work.
7. In the first From Station field, type 7.
8. In the second From Station field, type 320.
9. In the From Station Offset field, type RT.
10. In the From Station Distance field, type 12.
11. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 25
Now, let’s use the DWR template.
12. On the toolbar, click the DWR Template button.
SiteManager displays the DWR Template window.
13. In the Description column, double-click
NYSDOT Area Calc Using Shapes (English). SiteManager
displays the template.
14. In Row 1 of 1, in the Shape dropdown list, select the
Trapezoid choice.
15. In the A field, type 6.
16. In the B field, type 4.
17. In the C field, type 6.
18. On the keyboard, press the Tab key. The template calculates
the area.
Now, let’s add another row to the template and save the
calculations.
19. On the toolbar, click the New button. The template adds a new
row and renumbers the row count.
20. In Row 2 of 2, in the Shape dropdown list, select the
Rectangle choice.
21. In the A field, type 10.5.
22. In the B field, type 6.
23. On the keyboard, press the Tab key. The template calculates
the area and adds the value to the area from the first row to
calculate the Total Pay Quantity (SM) field.
24. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
25. Write the calculated value from the Total Pay Quantity (SM)
field in the space provided. ______________
26. To close the template, on the toolbar, click the Close button.
SiteManager displays the Work Items panel.
27. In the Placed Qty field, type 93.
28. On the toolbar, click the Save button. Note that SiteManager
automatically recalculates the Qty Reported Date field.
TIP!
SELECT ITEM, THEN: - CHECK ITEM CODE - CHECK CATEGORY - CHECK FOR AN
ASSOCIATED TEMPLATE.
USAGE
WRITE DOWN QUANTITY
FROM TEMPLATE. MUST TYPE THE EXACT
CALCULATED VALUE
INTO THE PLACED QTY
FIELD.
TEMPLT USED BOX MAY
NOT DISPLAY CHECK
MARK UNTIL YOU CLOSE
DWR SCREEN AND
REOPEN.
26 Creating and Modifying Daily Work Reports
Now, let’s add an attachment.
29. On the toolbar, click the Attachments button. SiteManager
displays the Attachments window and extends the toolbar.
30. On the extended toolbar, click the New OLE button.
SiteManager displays the Insert Object window.
31. Click the Create From File tab.
Now, let’s locate the file to attach.
32. Click the Browse button. SiteManager displays a Browse
window.
33. To locate the file you wish to attach, browse to
P:\Office of Operations\ Construction\ SiteManager\ Training\
Attachments.
34. In the Files of type dropdown list, select the All Files (*.*)
choice (may be the default).
35. Select the DWR_09_03_2007_Sketch.pdf file.
36. On the Browse window, click the Open button.
37. On the Insert Object window, click the OK button.
SiteManager closes the Insert Object window and displays the
OLE Attachment window.
Now, let’s add a name and description, assign security groups, and
save the attachment.
38. In the Name field, type Sketch.
39. In the Description field, type Sketch – Geotextile Bedding.
40. In the Attachment Security area, click the Add All button.
SiteManager makes the attachment available to all security
groups.
41. Click the Add button. SiteManager displays the new
attachment in the Attachments window.
42. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
Now, let’s run the attachment.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 27
43. In the Attachments window, in the Name column, double-click
Sketch. SiteManager opens an application window to display
the file.
44. To close the attachment’s application window, on the
window’s title bar, click the Close button.
45. To close the Attachment window, on the toolbar, click the
Attachments button.
Now, let’s enter remarks.
46. On the toolbar, click the Remarks button. SiteManager
displays the Remarks window.
47. In the Remarks field, type Fabric installed per details in
plans, overlapping 2 ft at joints and wrapped up excavation
and secured in place. See attached sketch.
48. To close the Remarks window, on the toolbar, click the
Remarks button again.
49. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
50. On the toolbar, click the Selects Work Item button.
SiteManager displays list of available contract items with
entered Item at the top.
You’ve used a DWR template to calculate a placed quantity for a
contractor at a location.
Modifying Values Previously Entered on a DWR Template
If you need to modify a value previously entered on a DWR template, on
the Work Items panel, open the item with the associated template
containing the value you want to change. To display the DWR Template
window, on the toolbar, click the DWR Template button. Double-click the
desired template and make your changes.
Understanding the Impact of Recorded Work Items
If an item has installed quantities for the selected DWR, SiteManager
selects the Instld check box on the Select Work Item view’s list of
available contract items.
SiteManager uses the installed work items from the authorized DWRs as
the basis for paying the contractor in an estimate.
USAGE
WHEN YOU ATTACH
DOCUMENTS, REFERENCE THE
ATTACHMENTS IN THE
REMARKS.
28 Creating and Modifying Daily Work Reports
Previewing DWRS
Exercise 10
In this exercise, learn how to preview a DWR.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Inspector (INSP)
Keys: D263073; today’s date (DWR)
1. On the Daily Work Reports window, click the DWR Info tab.
SiteManager displays the DWR Info panel.
2. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
Now, let’s preview the DWR.
3. On the toolbar, click the Preview DWR button. SiteManager
displays the Print Preview window.
4. Review the DWR.
5. To close the Print Preview window, click the Close button.
You’ve previewed a DWR.
Understanding Read-Only Format
SiteManager displays a DWR in a read-only format, which users cannot
modify, if the DWR meets any of the following conditions:
▪ Authorized
▪ Created by another user
Note: Users may view read-only copies of all DWRs, but can modify
only the editable versions of the DWRs they created. Once DWRs have
been authorized, they are read-only.
KNOWN ISSUE
DWR DATE IS NOT
SHOWN ON SUBSEQUENT
PAGES OF THE DWR
PREVIEW.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 29
Copying DWRs
When creating DWRs for a project, since much of the information remains
the same from day to day, copy the contractor information from a previous
DWR you created on the contract to create a new DWR.
To copy a DWR you created, open the DWR to copy, in the DWR Date
field type the desired date for the new DWR and, when prompted, choose
to copy contractor information.
When making a copy of your DWR, SiteManager does not copy the
following:
▪ Basic DWR information (temperature, weather, general
remarks, and attachments)
▪ Installed work items
SiteManager does copy the following:
▪ Contractors (including all personnel and remarks)
▪ Equipment (including all remarks)
Exercise 11
In this exercise, learn how to copy a DWR you previously created
to make a new DWR.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Inspector (INSP)
Keys: D263073; today’s date (DWR)
1. In the DWR Date field, type yesterday’s date.
2. On the keyboard, press the Tab key. SiteManager displays a
message to confirm your decision to copy contractor
information.
3. In the message, click the Yes button. SiteManager displays the
DWR for the new date with the copied contractor information.
4. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
You’ve copied a DWR you created previously to reuse some of the
information.
NOTE
YOU MUST BE IN THE
DWR THAT YOU WANT TO
COPY; CHANGE DATE; TAB OUT; SAVE.
DO NOT CLICK NEW TO
COPY.
TIP!
TO MAKE USE OF
GENERAL REMARKS
FROM THE BASIC DWR
INFO PANEL, COPY AND
PASTE FROM PREVIOUS
DWRS.
30 Creating and Modifying Daily Work Reports
Modifying Copied DWRs
Since SiteManager does not copy all of the information contained on a
DWR, you must complete the basic DWR information, record any work
items, and make any necessary changes to the copied information.
Recording Basic DWR Information
When making a copy of a DWR, SiteManager does not copy basic DWR
information, general remarks or attachments.
Exercise 12
In this exercise, learn how to modify a DWR you copied.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Inspector (INSP)
Keys: D263073; yesterday’s date (DWR)
First, let’s enter temperatures and weather conditions for the day.
1. On the Daily Work Reports window, on the DWR Info panel,
in the High Temperature field, type 59.
2. In the Low Temperature field, type 42.
3. In the A.M. dropdown list, select the Clear choice.
4. In the P.M. dropdown list, select the Cloudy choice.
Now, let’s record work zone traffic control information.
5. In the list of remark types, select the 02 WZTC choice.
6. In the Remarks field, type Closed parking lot located at
Lake View Terrace Lane under bridge by utilizing cones
across roadway and detour signing, as per plan sheet 25.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 31
Now, let’s enter a general remark.
7. In the list of remark types, select the 03 General choice.
8. In the Remarks field, type Wage rate interview performed
on laborer George Wallace. See Corr Log.
Now, let’s record contractor work hours.
9. In the list of remark types, select the 04 Contrctr Work Hrs choice.
10. In the Remarks field, type 0700 - 1530.
11. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
You’ve provided basic DWR information for a new DWR copied
from a previous DWR.
32 Creating and Modifying Daily Work Reports
Tracking Contractors, Supervisors and Personnel Types
When making a copy of a DWR, SiteManager does copy contractor
information and the associated remarks.
Exercise 13
In this exercise, learn how to verify copied contractor information
and add a subcontractor.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Inspector (INSP)
Keys: D263073; yesterday’s date (DWR)
1. On the Daily Work Reports window, click the Contractors tab.
2. Verify that the copied contractors and associated personnel are
still correct for today.
3. Since additional laborers were on site that day for
ECONOMY PAVING CO INC, in the Personnel Type area,
for the Laborer type, change the number to 5 add a Remark.
4. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
Now, let’s add a subcontractor.
5. Click in the Contractor area.
6. On the toolbar, click the New button. SiteManager inserts a
new row.
7. In the Contractor dropdown list, select
DONNELLY CONSTRUCTION INC.
Now, let’s record the laborers on site for the subcontractor.
8. Click in the Personnel Type area.
9. On the toolbar, click the New button. SiteManager inserts a
new row.
10. In the Personnel Type dropdown list, select the Laborer
choice.
11. In the Nbr of Persons field, type 2.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 33
12. On the toolbar, click the Remarks button. SiteManager
displays the Remarks window.
13. In the Remarks (Personnel Remark) field, type
2 – Laborers worked for prime as flagpeople.
14. To close the Remarks window, on the toolbar, click the
Remarks button again.
15. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
Now, let’s record the laborer-foreman on site for the subcontractor.
16. On the toolbar, click the New button. SiteManager inserts a
new row.
17. In the Personnel Type dropdown list, select the
Laborer – Foreman choice.
18. In the Nbr of Persons field, type 1, add Remark.
19. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
Now, let’s record the operating engineer on site for the
subcontractor.
20. On the toolbar, click the New button. SiteManager inserts a
new row.
21. In the Personnel Type dropdown list, select the
Operating Engineer choice.
22. In the Nbr of Persons field, type 2, add Remark.
23. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
You’ve verified copied contractor information and added a
subcontractor and personnel on site for the day.
34 Creating and Modifying Daily Work Reports
Tracking Contractor Equipment
When making a copy of a DWR, SiteManager does copy equipment
information and the associated remarks.
Exercise 14
In this exercise, learn how to verify copied equipment information
and record the subcontractor’s equipment.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Inspector (INSP)
Keys: D263073; yesterday’s date (DWR)
1. Click the Contractor Equip tab. SiteManager displays a
message prompting you to save.
2. In the message box, click the Yes button.
3. On the Contractor Equip panel, in the Contractor area, select
ECONOMY PAVING CO INC. SiteManager displays the
equipment information in the Equipment ID – Description
area for the selected contractor.
4. Verify the contractor equipment used that day. No changes are
necessary.
Now, let’s record several pieces of equipment for the subcontractor.
5. In the Contractor area, select DONNELLY
CONSTRUCTION INC. SiteManager displays the blank
Equipment ID – Description area for the selected contractor.
6. Click in the Equipment ID – Description area.
NOTE
DEMONSTRATE HOW TO
SELECT BY CLICKING ON
THE THREE RIGHT
COLUMNS; HOW TO USE
CTRL + N FOR NEW; HOW
TO TAB TO MOVE FROM
FIELD TO FIELD.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 35
Now, let’s record the first piece of equipment.
7. On the toolbar, click the New button. SiteManager inserts a
new row.
8. In the Equipment ID – Description dropdown list, select the
Trucks - On Highway choice.
9. In the Nbr of Pieces field, type 1.
10. In the Nbr Used field, type 1.
11. On the toolbar, click the Remarks button. SiteManager
displays the Remarks window.
12. In the Remarks field, type 1 – 10 wheel dump truck with
operator.
13. To close the Remarks window, on the toolbar, click the
Remarks button again.
14. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
Now, let’s record the second piece.
15. On the toolbar, click the New button. SiteManager inserts a
new row.
16. In the Equipment ID – Description dropdown list, select the
Compactors choice.
17. In the Nbr of Pieces field, type 2.
18. In the Nbr Used field, type 2.
19. On the toolbar, click the Remarks button. SiteManager
displays the Remarks window.
20. In the Remarks field, type
1 – Ingersoll Rand DD40
1 – Walk Behind Dual drum (Bomag)
21. To close the Remarks window, on the toolbar, click the
Remarks button again.
22. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
You’ve verified copied equipment information and recorded the
newly added subcontractor’s equipment.
36 Creating and Modifying Daily Work Reports
Selecting and Recording Work Items
When making a copy of a DWR, SiteManager does not copy work item
information.
Exercise 15
In this exercise, learn how to select and record a work item installed
at multiple locations.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Inspector (INSP)
Keys: D263073; yesterday’s date (DWR)
1. Click the Work Items tab.
2. To sort the list by item code, click the Item Code column
heading.
3. In the Item Code column, scroll to and select 304.15 for
category number 0001.
4. On the toolbar, click the Record Work Item button.
SiteManager displays the Record Work Item view for that
work item.
5. On the toolbar, click the New button. SiteManager inserts a
new row and an area to record work against that item.
Now, let’s enter the placed quantity, contractor, and the first
location.
6. In the Placed Qty field, type 25.60.
7. In the Contractor dropdown list, select the DONNELLY
CONSTRUCTION INC choice.
8. In the Location field, type Lake View Terrace Lane under
bridge.
9. In the Measured Indicator area, click the Interim button.
10. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 37
Now, let’s enter remarks for the first location.
11. On the toolbar, click the Remarks button. SiteManager
displays the Remarks window.
12. In the Remarks (General Remarks) field, type Contractor
placed subbase in 6 inch lifts and compacted in accordance
with specifications; stringlines were pulled to check
elevations in preparations for asphalt placement.
13. To prepare for the next location of this item, copy the remark
to use later.
14. To close the Remarks window, on the toolbar, click the
Remarks button.
15. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
Now, let’s add a second location for this work item.
16. On the toolbar, click the New button. SiteManager inserts a
new row for the second location and an area to record work
against that item.
17. In the Placed Qty field, type 36.85.
18. In the Contractor dropdown list, select the DONNELLY
CONSTRUCTION INC choice.
19. In the Location field, type Lake View Terrace Lane east of
bridge.
20. In the Measured Indicator area, click the Final button.
21. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
Now, let’s enter remarks for the second location.
22. On the toolbar, click the Remarks button. SiteManager
displays the Remarks window.
23. In the Remarks field, paste the remarks from the first location.
24. Modify the remarks by adding ‘in accordance with
specifications’ to the end of the pasted text.
25. To close the Remarks window, on the toolbar, click the
Remarks button.
26. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
38 Creating and Modifying Daily Work Reports
Now, let’s add another item to show work in progress.
27. On the toolbar, click the Selects Work Item button.
28. To sort the list by item code, click the Item Code column
heading.
29. In the Item Code column, scroll to and select 203.02 for
category number 0001.
30. On the toolbar, click the Record Work Item button.
SiteManager displays the Record Work Item view for that
work item.
31. On the toolbar, click the New button. SiteManager inserts a
new row and an area to record work against that item.
32. In the Placed Qty field, type 0.0.
33. In the Contractor dropdown list, select the ECONOMY
PAVING CO INC choice.
34. In the Location field, type Lake View Terrace Lane east of
bridge.
35. In the Measured Indicator area, click the Interim button.
36. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
Now, let’s enter remarks.
37. On the toolbar, click the Remarks button. SiteManager
displays the Remarks window.
38. In the Remarks field, type Contractor began excavation;
work in progress to be paid at future date.
39. To close the Remarks window, on the toolbar, click the
Remarks button.
40. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
Now, let’s mark the DWR as complete.
Usage: Upon completion of a DWR, type ‘Complete’ in the 01 DWR
Complete remark. Once entered, do not modify the DWR again. If you
find an error in the DWR, notify the appropriate member of the Assistant
PM group or the Project Manager group and wait for permission to make
changes to the DWR
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 39
41. Click the DWR Info tab. SiteManager displays the DWR Info
panel.
42. In the list of remark types, select the 01 DWR Complete
choice.
43. In the Remarks field, type Complete.
44. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
You’ve recorded a work item installed at multiple locations.
ADDITIONAL 01 REMARKS
OPTIONAL
PAYMENT FOR:
ATTACHMENT FOR:
TEMPLATE FOR:
CERT FOR:
40 Creating and Modifying Daily Work Reports
Summary
To open the Daily Work Reports window:
1. On the Main Panel panel, double-click the Daily Work
Reports icon.
2. On the Daily Work Reports panel, double-click the Daily
Work Reports icon.
To create a new DWR using existing keys:
1. With the Daily Work Reports window open, on the toolbar,
click the New button.
2. In the DWR Date field, type the desired date.
3. Click the Save button.
To create a new DWR with different keys:
1. With the Daily Work Reports window open to a new record,
on the Services menu, select the Choose Keys choice.
2. Choose the desired contract.
3. In the DWR Date field, type the desired date.
4. Click the Save button.
To record basic DWR information:
1. On the Daily Work Reports window, click the DWR Info
tab.
2. In the High Temperature field, type the desired value.
3. In the Low Temperature field, type the desired value.
4. In the A.M. dropdown list, select the desired choice.
5. In the P.M. dropdown list, select the desired choice.
6. In the list of remark types, select the desired choice.
7. In the Remarks field, type the desired text.
8. Click the Save button.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 41
To record contractor information:
1. On the Daily Work Reports window, click the Contractors
tab.
2. Click in the Contractor area.
3. On the toolbar, click the New button.
4. In the Contractor dropdown list, select the desired choice.
5. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
To track superintendents:
1. On the Daily Work Reports window, click the Contractors
tab.
2. On the Contractors panel, in the Contractor area, select
the desired choice.
3. Click in the Superintendent area.
4. On the toolbar, click the New button.
5. In the Superintendent dropdown list, select the desired
choice.
6. On the toolbar, click the Remarks button.
7. In the Remarks (Supervisor Remark) field, type the
desired name.
8. To close the Remarks window, on the toolbar, click the
Remarks button.
9. Click the Save button.
42 Creating and Modifying Daily Work Reports
To track working supervisors, foremen, and additional contractor
personnel:
1. On the Daily Work Reports window, click the Contractors
tab.
2. On the Contractors panel, in the Contractor area, select
the desired choice.
3. Click in the Personnel Type area.
4. Click the New button.
5. In the Personnel Type dropdown list, select the desired
choice.
6. In the Nbr of Persons field, type the desired value.
7. If the personnel type is a foreman or supervisor, on the
toolbar, click the Remarks button
8. In the Remarks (Personnel Remark) field, type the desired
name.
9. To close the Remarks window, on the toolbar, click the
Remarks button.
10. Click the Save button.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 43
To record equipment information:
1. On the Daily Work Reports window, click the Contractor
Equip tab.
2. In the Contractor area, select the desired choice.
3. Click in the Equipment ID-Description area.
4. On the toolbar, click the New button.
5. In the Equipment ID dropdown list, select the desired
choice.
6. In the Nbr of Pieces field, type the desired value.
7. In the Nbr Used field, type the desired value.
8. On the toolbar, click the Remarks button.
9. In the Remarks field, type the desired text.
10. To close the Remarks window, on the toolbar, click the
Remarks button.
11. Click the Save button.
To record items on a DWR:
1. On the Daily Work Reports window, click the Work Items
tab.
2. To sort the list by item code, click the Item Code column
heading.
3. In the Item Code column, scroll to and click the desired
choice. Verify that it is for the correct category.
4. On the toolbar, click the Record Work Item button.
5. Click the New button.
6. In the Placed Qty field, type the desired value.
7. In the Contractor dropdown list, select the desired choice.
8. In the Location field, type the desired text.
9. In the Measured Indicator area, click the Interim or Final button.
10. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
44 Creating and Modifying Daily Work Reports
To record items with DWR templates:
1. On the Daily Work Reports window, click the Work Items
tab.
2. To sort the list by item code, click the Item Code column
heading.
3. In the Item Code column, scroll to and click the desired
choice. Verify that it is for the correct category.
4. On the toolbar, click the Record Work Item button.
5. On the toolbar, click the New button.
6. In the Contractor dropdown list, select the desired choice.
7. In the Location field, type the desired text.
8. In the first From Station field, type the desired text.
9. In the second From Station field, type the desired text.
10. In the From Station Offset field, type the desired text.
11. In the From Station Distance field, type the desired text.
12. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
13. Complete the template.
14. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
To switch between the two views on the Work Items panel:
1. While on the Work Item panel’s Select Work Item view
viewing the list of available work items, select the desired
work item.
2. On the toolbar, click the Record Work Item button.
3. While on the Work Item panel’s Record Work Item view
viewing item usage data, on the toolbar, click the Selects
Work Item button.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 45
To modify values previously entered on a DWR template:
1. While on the Work Items panel’s Record Work Item view
viewing item usage data, on the toolbar, click the DWR
Template button.
2. On the DWR Template window, select the desired template.
3. On the toolbar, click the Record Template Data button.
4. Make the desired changes.
To complete a DWR:
1. On the Daily Work Reports window, click the DWR Info
tab.
2. In the list of remark types, select the 01 DWR Complete
choice.
3. In the Remarks field, type Complete.
4. Click the Save button.
To copy a DWR:
1. Open the desired DWR to copy.
2. In the DWR Date field, type the desired date.
3. On the keyboard, press the Tab key
- or -
on the toolbar, click the Save button.
4. In the message prompting you to copy contractor
information, click the Yes button.
5. Click the Save button.
46 Creating and Modifying Daily Work Reports
Review Exercise
In this exercise, demonstrate how to create a new DWR using the
current keys.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Inspector (INSP)
Keys: D261177
Create a new DWR for today’s date for D261177.
1. Record the basic DWR information for that day:
High of 77 degrees; low of 68 degrees.
Foggy in the morning; clear in the afternoon.
02 WZTC remarks should include the following:
Moving single lane closure was used in accordance with
specs. All signs and arrowboard as per contract plan
sheet 24.
04 Contrctr Work Hrs remarks should include the
following: 0700 - 1630.
2. Record the contractor, superintendents and personnel on site
that day:
STRAIGHT LINE INDUSTRIES INC is a subcontractor.
Tom Collins was the non-working foreman.
Two laborers worked as flaggers, add Remark;
one laborer-foreman was on site, add Remark;
one teamster was on site, add Remark.
3. Record the equipment used that day:
One on-highway truck and one air compressor were used
that day.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 47
4. Record the work items installed that day:
Straight Line did 4-inch (100 mm) single line striping
using short term pavement markings (item code 619.100101
for category number 0001) for Rt 73 parking lot and road.
Select the appropriate measured indicator.
5. Use the Work Items panel to record the overall stationing:
5+792 to 6+650
6. Use the template to record specific info for the following
stations and lengths:
Station Length Location
6+620 to 6+650 30 M (measured) Entrance
5+792 to 6+150 385 M (measured) Parking lot
6+420 to 6+640 220 M (measured) Left exit
7. Save the template data and close the template.
8. Preview the DWR.
9. Oops! Fix a typo you just found while previewing the
DWR. The overall placed quantity did not match what you
understood was installed. Change the length for the second
station to 358 M instead.
10. Mark the DWR as complete and ready for the Assistant PM
group to review.
11. Copy the DWR to a new date of yesterday’s date. Clear in
the morning; cloudy in the afternoon. High of 52; low of 45.
Add ECONOMY PAVING as another contractor on site
that day. One non-working foreman for ECONOMY
PAVING CO INC, Larry Luck, was on the job site.
Three operating engineers were on-site, four laborers and
one laborer-foreman with 2 wheel loaders. Installed
34.21 CM of topsoil (item code 610.1402 for category
number 0001) on Rt 73 North Side at 6+240 RT. Select the
appropriate measured indicator. They installed the topsoil
at the location per the plans.
12. Mark the DWR as complete and ready for the Assistant PM
to review.
13. Exit SiteManager.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 1
Creating Material Field Records and Entering Test Results
In this chapter, you will receive instruction about the following:
▪ Determining Process for Accepting Materials 2
▪ Using DWR Templates to Record Information 10
▪ Creating Sample Records from Work Items on DWRs 14
▪ Printing Sample Labels 30
▪ Understanding the Enter Test Results Window 32
▪ Entering Certifications 40
▪ Summary 43
2 Creating Material Field Records and Entering Test Results
Determining Process for Accepting Materials
To determine the process for accepting materials, use the Material
Inspection Detail window to view an item’s component materials and the
sampling and testing type for an associated test method.
Exercise 1
In this exercise, learn to access contract items on a DWR.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Inspector (INSP)
Keys: NA
1. Start and log onto SiteManager as user regxx01 while
connected to the server.
2. On the Main Panel panel, double-click the Daily Work
Reports icon.
3. On the Daily Work Reports panel, double-click the Daily
Work Reports icon. SiteManager displays the Daily Work
Reports window.
Now, let’s open an existing DWR.
4. On the toolbar, click the Open button. SiteManager displays
the Contract ID window.
5. In the lower pane, in the Contract ID column, double-click
D263073.
6. In the lower pane, in the User ID column, double-click
regxx01.
7. In the lower pane, in the DWR Date column, double-click
today’s date. SiteManager displays the Daily Work Reports
window.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 3
Now, let’s open the work item.
8. Click the Work Items tab. SiteManager displays the Select
Work Item view, which lists the available contract items.
9. To sort the list by item code, click the Item Code column
heading.
10. In the Item Code column, scroll to and double-click 207.20
for category number 0001. SiteManager displays the Work
Items panel’s Record Work Item view, which presents the
usage data for that work item.
You’ve accessed a contract item on a DWR.
Viewing Material Inspection Details
On the Material Inspection Detail (MID) window, view test methods and
requirements, including samples linked to a DWR item.
Figure 1. Material Inspection Detail Window
4 Creating Material Field Records and Entering Test Results
Field Name Description
Key Information
Contract ID ID for the contract. Agency-defined. Unique.
Inspector Creator of the DWR.
DWR Date Date the DWR was created.
Recorded Work Information
Project Nbr Project Number. Agency-defined. Unique. Number of project.
Line Itm Nbr Line Item Number. Contract line item number of the item.
Item Code ID for the item.
Category Nbr Category Number. Category of the item.
Item Desc Item Description. Short description of the work item.
Unit Price Cost per unit of measure.
Supp Desc 1 Supplemental Description 1.
Supp Desc 2 Supplemental Description 2.
Qty Reported to Date
Quantity Reported to Date. Total of all reported quantities on DWRs, whether authorized or unauthorized and regardless of inclusion on an estimate.
Qty Authorized to Date
Quantity Authorized to Date. Total of all reported quantities on authorized DWRs.
Units Type Unit of measure for the item.
Qty Installed to Date
Quantity Installed to Date. Total of all authorized reported quantities on DWRS included in an estimate of any status. Will always equal the Qty Paid to Date value, unless adjusted on the Estimate Item Detail window.
Bid Qty Bid Quantity. Original amount bid for an item.
Pay to Plan Qty Pay to Plan Quantity. Indicates if line item is paid to plan quantity. No overruns allowed.
Status Item status (active, closed)
Qty Paid to Date Quantity Paid to Date. Total quantity reported on DWRs that were authorized in diaries and included in an estimate of any status.
Current Contract Qty
Current Contract Quantity. Current contract quantity of the contract line item including any change orders. Calculated by the sum of bid quantity and the net change order quantity.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 5
Field Name Description
aterial Inspection Detail Information
Material Code Uniquely identifies the material. Agency-defined.
Material Component
Short material description.
Cont Est Matrl Qty
Contract Estimated Material Quantity. Current quantity of contract items multiplied by the conversion factor.
Approved Qty Satisfied Represented Material Quantity. Total material quantity reported on the Contract panel of the Maintain Sample Information window.
Reprt Matrl Qty Reported Material Quantity. Total material installed is calculated based on installed quantity of contract item multiplied by the conversion factor.
Matrl Unit Material Unit. Item material unit.
Conversion Factor
Used by the required samples calculation to convert current quantity to required quantity.
Contract S&T Contract Sampling and Testing. Indicates item has contract sampling and testing requirements defined.
DWR Sample Indicates sample was created from DWR.
Show All / S&T Show All / Sampling and Testing Requirements toggle button. By default only the active sampling and testing requirements display while others are hidden from view. Click the Show All button to display all sampling and testing requirements regardless of active status. Click the S&T button to show only the active sampling and testing requirements.
Contract Sampling and Testing Requirements Information
Test Method Unique ID to identify the method used for testing the material.
S & T Type Identifies the type of the test being performed.
Rate Rate at which a sample must be collected.
Frequency Frequency at which a sample must be collected.
Acceptance Method
Identifies how the material will be accepted on the contract.
Cert Qty Cert type quantity approved
Test Qty Sample type quantity approved
Acc Meth Acceptance Method
Sample Type Identifies the type of the sample being performed.
P/S Code Producer/Supplier Code. Unique ID for the producer/supplier.
P/S Name Producer/Supplier Name. Name of the producer/supplier.
Table 1. Material Inspection Detail Window - Fields
6 Creating Material Field Records and Entering Test Results
Exercise 2
In this exercise, view the details of the component materials and the
associated tests.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Inspector (INSP)
Keys: D263073; today’s date (DWR); 207.20 (Item Code); 0001(cat)
1. On the toolbar, click the Open Material Inspection Detail
button. SiteManager displays the Material Inspection Detail
window.
2. In the middle pane, in the Material Code column, select
737-0106.
3. In the lower pane, in the Test Method column, view the
row for the Approved List.
4. What is the associated S&T Type? ___________
You’ve viewed a contract item’s component materials and associated tests.
ANSWERS
4. SMPL-QTY
QRG
IF SMPL-QTY: THEN CONTINUE WITH
QRG 7.
IF SMPL-QTY W/ APL/VIS THEN CONTINUE WITH
QRG 10.
IF SMPL-TEST: THEN CONTINUE WITH
QRG 9.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 7
Viewing Material Details
From the Material Inspection Detail window, click the View Material
button to view inquiry-only information about the selected material in the
Material Detail window.
Usage: From this window, click the Remarks button to view Materials
Mall information and click the Attachments button to access a link to the
Approved List web site for approved suppliers.
Figure 2. Material Detail Window (with Toolbar detail) - Description Panel
USAGE
FIND THE MATERIAL
CODE FOR THE
MATERIAL ACCEPTANCE, RECORD ON THE
‘MATERIAL DETAIL’ AND
‘MATERIAL INSPECTION
DETAIL’ WINDOWS.
IF A NETWORK
CONNECTION IS
AVAILABLE—AND THERE
IS A URL ATTACHMENT
ON THIS RECORD—VIEW
THE APPROVED LIST WEB
SITE TO FIND THE NAME
OF THE APPROVED
SUPPLIER FOR THE
MATERIAL ACCEPTANCE
RECORD.
8 Creating Material Field Records and Entering Test Results
Field Name Description
Material Code Unique ID for the material. Required.
Short Name Abbreviated description of the material. Required.
Full Name Full description of the material. Required.
Category Classification type of the material. Required.
Recycled Indicates if the material is recycled.
English Unit Unit of measure for the material. Default.
Metric Unit Unit of measure for the material. Optional.
Type Code Identifies the type of material.
Size Code Identifies the size.
Brand Name Required
Indicates if a brand name must be supplied when sampling the material.
Control Number Required
Indicates if a control number must be supplied when sampling the material.
Specification Reference
Material test specification number.
Status Ind Status Indicator. Indicates if the material is active or inactive. Inactive indicates the material is no longer in use. Default is Active.
Status Date Date when the status was last changed. Default is current date for new records.
Table 2. Material Detail Window - Description Panel - Fields
Figure 3. Remarks (General Remarks) Window - Materials Mall Information
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 9
Exercise 3
In this exercise, learn to access the Material Detail window,
Materials Mall information and Approved List web site.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Inspector (INSP)
Keys: D263073; today’s date (DWR); 207.20 (Item Code); 0001(cat)
737-0106 (material code)
1. In the middle pane, in the Material Component column,
select Gotextile C-W.
2. On the toolbar, click the View Material button.
SiteManager displays the Material Detail window’s
Description panel.
Now, let’s view the Materials Mall information.
3. On the toolbar, click the Remarks button. SiteManager
displays the Remarks window.
4. Scroll to view all of the Materials Mall information.
5. On the toolbar, click the Remarks button again.
SiteManager closes the Remarks window.
Now, let’s view the Approved List web site.
6. On the toolbar, click the Attachments button. SiteManager
displays the Attachments window.
7. Double-click the URL attachment. A browser displays the
Approved List web site.
8. Review the page and close the browser.
9. To close the Attachments window, on the toolbar, click the
Attachments button again.
10. To close the Material Detail window, on the toolbar, click
the Close button. SiteManager displays the Material
Inspection Detail window.
USAGE
IF AN APPROVED LIST
ITEM IS REQUIRED, FIND
THE P/S’S NAME AND
MANUFACTURER’S NAME
ON THE APPROVED LIST
WEB SITE AND
REMEMBER TO SELECT
THEM FROM THE
DROPDOWN.
10 Creating Material Field Records and Entering Test Results
11. To close the Material Inspection Detail window, on the
toolbar, click the Close button. SiteManager displays the
Daily Work Reports window’s Work Items panel’s Record
Work Item view.
You’ve accessed the Material Detail window for the selected
material, viewed Materials Mall information, and viewed the
Approved List web site.
Using DWR Templates to Record Information
Some DWR work items have associated DWR templates used to record
additional information.
Figure 4. DWR Template (Example)
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 11
Exercise 4
In this exercise, learn to record truck and mix information using a
DWR template.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Inspector (INSP)
Keys: D263073; today’s date (DWR); 207.20 (Item Code); 0001(cat)
737-0106 (material code)
1. On the toolbar, click the Selects Work Item button.
SiteManager displays the list of available contract items.
2. To sort the list by item code, click the Item Code column
heading until the items are in ascending order.
3. In the Item Code column, scroll to and double-click
555.0105 for category number 0001. SiteManager displays
the Work Items panel’s Record Work Item view, which
presents the usage data for that work item.
4. Click the New button.
5. In the Contractor dropdown list, select the desired choice.
6. In the Location field, type the desired text.
7. In the Measured Indicator area, click the Interim or Final button.
8. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
Now, let’s open the DWR template.
9. On the toolbar, click the DWR Template button.
SiteManager displays the DWR Template window.
10. In the Description column, double-click the NYSDOT
Multi-Row Truck and Mixing Info template name.
SiteManager displays the DWR Template –
MRTRMXIN1E window.
12 Creating Material Field Records and Entering Test Results
Now, let’s enter the information about the tickets.
11. In the FIRST TICKET # field, type 5287.
12. In the LAST TICKET # field, type 5288.
13. In the # OF TICKETS field, type 2.
14. In the CONCRETE CLASS dropdown list, select A.
SiteManager autopopulates the slump and air limits.
15. Click the TRUCK MIX button.
Now, let’s complete the lower pane for the first ticket.
16. In the TRUCK OR TICKET # field, type 5287.
17. In the LOAD SIZE [CY] field, type 8.
18. In the END BATCH TIME field, type 0900.
19. In the START MIX TIME field, type 0901.
20. In the END MIX TIME field, type 0915.
21. In the MIXING REVS field, type 70.
22. In the END DISCHARGE TIME field, type 0925.
23. In the SLUMP [IN] field, type 2.75.
24. In the AIR CONTENT [%] field, type 7.
25. In the CONC TEMP [DEG F] field, type 80.
26. In the REMARKS field, type Cast Cylinder Set.
27. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
Now, let’s add another row for another ticket.
28. On the toolbar, click the New button. SiteManager inserts
another row in the lower pane.
Now, let’s complete the lower pane for the second ticket.
29. In the TRUCK OR TICKET # field, type 5288.
30. In the LOAD SIZE [CY] field, type 8.
31. In the END BATCH TIME field, type 0930.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 13
32. In the START MIX TIME field, type 0931.
33. In the END MIX TIME field, type 0945.
34. In the MIXING REVS field, type 70.
35. In the END DISCHARGE TIME field, type 0955.
36. In the SLUMP [IN] field, type 2.5.
37. In the AIR CONTENT [%] field, type 8.
38. In the CONC TEMP [DEG F] field, type 80.
39. In the REMARKS field, type Cast Cylinder Set.
Now, let’s record the overall quantities.
40. In the QTY DELIVERED [CY] field, type 16.
41. In the QTY REJECTED [CY] field, type 0.0.
42. In the QTY WASTED [CY] field, type 2.
43. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
44. To close the DWR Template window, on the toolbar, click
the Close button.
You’ve recorded information in a DWR template.
USAGE / KNOWN ISSUE
MUST COMPLETE ALL
FIELDS IN THE
TEMPLATE. EVEN IF A
QUANTITY IS ZERO, MUST
TYPE 0.0, NOT 0. THE
FIELD WILL NOT DISPLAY
A VALUE FOR A ZERO
QUANTITY, BUT THIS IS A
NECESSARY STEP TO
PROPERLY CALCULATE
THE QTY USED FIELD.
REMEMBER TO TAB
THROUGH THE FIELDS
14 Creating Material Field Records and Entering Test Results
Creating Sample Records from Work Items on DWRs
Use the Material Inspection Detail window to establish a link from a DWR
and to a sample record and use the Maintain Sample Information window
to record basic sample data.
To assign tests, complete all required fields on the Basic Sample
Data panel, Addtl Sample Data panel and Contract panel. Then, on
the Other panel, assign a destination lab. Finally, on the toolbar,
click the Assign Tests button.
Recording Basic Sample Data
To log information about the material and associated data such as
supplier, material code, sample type, and geographic area, use the
Basic Sample Data panel.
Figure 5. Maintain Sample Information Window - Basic Sample Data Panel
NOTE
WHEN CREATING A
SAMPLE FROM A DWR IT
IS IMPORTANT TO
RECORD THE
FOLLOWING:
WHY (SAMPLE TYPE) WHO (SAMPLER, P/S, AND MNFCTR) AND
WHERE (GEOG AREA AND
DESTINATION LAB).
THE WHAT (MATERIAL) AND WHEN (SAMPLE
DATE) ARE POPULATED
FROM THE DWR.
USAGE
IF THE MANUFACTURER
OR SUPPLIER IS NOT
AVAILABLE TO SELECT, RECORD THE NAME ON
THE OTHER PANEL.
REFER TO QRG.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 15
Field Name Description
Smpl ID Sample ID. Unique. System-generated. Format includes user ID, date and time. Required. Auto-populated.
Status Identifies the current status of the sample record. Protected. All samples are in Pending status when first created. Auto-populated with the status appropriate for the current state of the sample. ▪ Creating sample - Pending ▪ Assigned tests - Logged ▪ Received by destination lab - Received ▪ Entering test results - In Testing ▪ Reviewing sample - Pre Authorization ▪ Authorized sample - Complete
Revised By Indicates user ID of the person who created the revised sample record. System-populated. Protected.
Revising Current sample has this status after it has been authorized and a revision is being made. Original sample is referred to as the new sample. Automatically populated by the system. Protected.
Sample Date Date is the same as the DWR date. Required. Auto-populated.
Link To Sample ID reflects another sample to which this sample is linked.
Link From Displays the ID of the sample that contains the sample in its Linked To field.
Log Date System-populated with the current system date and is used as part of the LIMS sample tracking information. Protected and required.
Smpl Type Sample Type. Used by LIMS in the default assignment of tests for the sample. Refer to NYSDOT Sample Login Spreadsheet for selection based upon material. Required.
Acpt Meth Acceptance Method. User-populated in the LIMS system when the sample review/approval is complete in LIMS. Protected.
Material Material code. Unique. LIMS uses to assign default tests for samples. Required. Auto-populated.
Material (2nd Field)
Material description.
Sampler User ID of the sampler that took the sample.
Sampler (2nd Field)
Sampler’s name.
P/S Producer/Supplier. Name of the supplier for the material.
P/S (2nd Field) Code for the supplier.
Type System-populated when supplier is selected. Identifies the type of source by code only.
NOTE
CALL ATTENTION TO
STATUS.
16 Creating Material Field Records and Entering Test Results
Field Name Description
City System-populated when a supplier is selected. Identifies where supplier is located.
Prod Nm Product Name. Brand name of material. Information pulled from the Approved Lists window.
Mnfctr Manufacturer. Name of manufacturer producing the selected product.
Town Name of the town.
Geog Area Geographic Area. Location where the sample was taken. Required.
Intd Use Intended Use. Description of intended use of the material.
Repr Qty Representative Quantity. Quantity of material represented by the sample.
Repr Qty (2nd Field)
Units of the representative quantity. Usage: Using “Variable Units” for this field.
Lab Control Number
SiteManager adds prefix ‘CN’ to the Sample ID. Auto-populated. Searchable.
Auth By Authorized By. System-populated with the SiteManager user ID of the sample reviewer that selects Completed on the LIMS component’s Review Samples window.
Auth Date Authorized Date. System-populated when the sample reviewer selects Completed on the LIMS component’s Review Samples window.
Lab Reference Number
Automatically generated by NYSDOT to help identify the sample. Protected.
Lock Type Successfully assigning tests locks the sample using the group lock. Determines the access level for updating the sample record.
Locked By Indicates who locked the sample.
Lock Date Indicates the date and time the sample record was locked.
NYSDOT Main office.
Zone Second-level office.
Region Third-level office.
Unit Fourth-level office.
Toolbar
Remarks Remarks. Optional.
Attachments Attachments. Optional.
Assign Tests Access the Assign Sample Tests window. Use to assign pre-defined sample test(s) based on the material code on the sample. Requires material code and sample type on the sample record and a Pending sample status. Disabled if tests are assigned on the sample using the Test panel.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 17
Field Name Description
Print Label Print sample data (including sample ID, date, lab control number, material description, and lab reference number) on a single 1” X 3.5” label. Preview label, select printer, and specify number of copies. Feature disabled on voided samples.
Open LIMS Access the LIMS component.
Table 3. Maintain Sample Information Window - Basic Sample Data Panel - Fields
Exercise 5
In this exercise, learn to create a sample record for an item’s
component material that uses the information already entered for
the item.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Inspector (INSP)
Keys: D263073; today’s date (DWR); 555.0105 (item code); 0001
(cat); CLASS-A-SUBS (material code)
1. Click the Open Material Inspection Detail Window
button on the toolbar.
2. On the Material Inspection Detail window, in the middle
pane, in the Material Component column,
select Class A Conc w/ Subs.
3. On the toolbar, click the Create Sample for Selected
Material button. SiteManager displays the Maintain Sample
Information window.
4. In the Smpl Type dropdown list, select the
Project Concrete – Slump/Air/Cast Cyl choice.
NOTE
SITEMANAGER AUTO-POPULATES SAMPLE ID, STATUS, SAMPLE DATE, LOG DATE AND MATERIAL
CODE.
18 Creating Material Field Records and Entering Test Results
Now, let’s select the sampler.
5. In the Sampler field, type db.
6. Using the right mouse button, click on the Sampler field.
7. On the object menu, select the Filter Search choice.
SiteManager displays the Search Window.
8. In the Sampled By column, double-click dbushika.
SiteManager displays the sampler in the Maintain Sample
Information window.
9. Make sure you have the correct Sample Date.
Now, let’s select the producer/supplier by its code.
10. Using the right mouse button, click on the P/S field.
11. From the object menu, select the Search choice.
SiteManager displays the Search Window window.
12. Double-click the row for the C0003 producer/supplier with
the Watervliet plant location.
13. Using the right mouse button, click on the Mnfctr field
14. From the object menu, select the Search choice.
SiteManager displays the Search Window window.
15. Double-click the row for the C0003 producer/supplier with
the Watervliet plant location.
Now, let’s select the region where the sample was taken.
16. In the Geog Area dropdown list, select Region 09.
17. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
You’ve created a sample record that uses the information already
entered for the material.
NOTE
‘DB’ ARE THE INITIALS OF
THE INSPECTOR WHO
CAST THE CYLINDERS.
TYPE WHAT YOU KNOW
OF THE USER ID AND
THEN USE FILTER
SEARCH.
USAGE
FIND THE
PRODUCER/SUPPLIER
CODE ON THE DELIVERY
TICKET(S).
CLICK ON PRODUCER
SUPPLIER CODE HEADER
TO SORT CODES
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 19
Recording Additional Sample Data
To capture sample details such as sampled at mill, plant or job,
sample size, and stationing information, use the Addtl (Additional)
Sample Data panel. On this panel, you may also link sample details
and test results to mix designs recorded in SiteManager.
Figure 6. Maintain Sample Information Window - Addtl Sample Data Panel
Field Name Description
Smpl ID Sample ID. Automatically system-populated with the value that appears on the Basic Sample Data panel.
Buy American Identifies if the material sampled fulfills the requirement for the Buy USA program.
Buy American (2nd Field)
Identifies the documentation required to accept materials for the Buy USA program (for example, Steel/Iron USA Certification).
Reqst By Requested By. Identifies who requested the sample by User ID.
Witnessed By Identifies the user ID of the person who witnessed the sampling.
Smpl Size Sample Size. Size of the material sample taken.
Smpl Size (2nd Field)
Unit code dropdown list.
Dist from Grade Distance from Grade. Distance from finished grade measurement (for example, height of fill, height of test, and test depth measurements).
Dist from Grade (2nd Field)
Length of measure in which the distance from finished grade is measured.
NOTE
TO LINK A SAMPLE
TO A MIX DESIGN, ENTER A MIX ID.
20 Creating Material Field Records and Entering Test Results
Field Name Description
Station Station point along the survey line where the sample is taken
Offset Distance and direction from the reference point from where the sampler took the sample.
Reference Location referenced on the plans where the sampler took the sample.
Smpld From Sampled From. Description of where the sampler took the sample.
Smpl Origin Sample Origin. Description of where the sample originated.
Control Type Usage: Do not use.
Cntrl Number Control Number. Unique. Ties one or many samples together.
Seal Number Helps to identify the sample. Protected.
Design Type Indicates the type of mix design to which the selected material is associated.
Mix ID Indicates the ID for the mix design.
Plant ID Unique identifier for the approved supplier plant that provided the material.
Plant ID (2nd Field)
ID for approved supplier plant that provided the material.
Plant Type Type of plant from which the material was supplied.
Sample Created from DWR
Indicates whether this sample record was created for the material directly from the Daily Work Reports window.
Creator User ID Creator of the sample record.
Include Standard Remarks
If selected, indicates that standard remarks display on the Lab Report.
DWR Date Displays date of the DWR if the sample record was created from the Daily Work Reports window.
Last Modified User ID
Last user to modify the sample record.
Last Modified Date
Date of the last modification made to the record.
DWR Inspector Displays the user ID of the DWR creator and the sample record if the sample record was created from the Daily Work Reports window.
Table 4. Maintain Sample Information Window - Addtl Sample Data Panel - Fields
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 21
Exercise 6
In this exercise, learn how to record additional sample data.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Inspector (INSP)
Keys: D263073; today’s date (DWR); 555.0105 (item code); 0001
(cat); CLASS-A-SUBS (material code)
1. Click the Addtl Sample Data tab. SiteManager displays the
Addtl Sample Data panel.
2. In the Design Type dropdown list, select PCC.
Now, let’s record the mix ID.
3. In the Mix ID field, type C0003.
4. Using the right mouse button, click on the Mix ID field.
5. From the object menu, select the Filter Search choice.
SiteManager displays the Search Window window.
6. To sort the column, click the Mix ID column heading.
7. In the Mix ID column, double-click C000308001.
Now, let’s record the plant ID.
8. Using the right mouse button, click on the Plant ID field.
9. From the object menu, select the Search choice.
10. In the Plant ID column, double-click C0003 with the
PCC – Dry Batch plant type.
11. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
You’ve recorded additional sample data.
22 Creating Material Field Records and Entering Test Results
Recording Contract Sample Data
To associate sample details and test results for a material to
specific contracts and contract items, use the Contract panel.
Since the sample record was generated from a DWR, the contract
item associated to the DWR will appear automatically.
Figure 7. Maintain Sample Information Window - Contract Panel
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 23
Field Name Description
Key Information
Sample ID of the sample. Agency-defined. Unique. Auto-populated.
Contract ID ID for the contract. Agency-defined. Unique.
Project Agency-defined. Unique. Number of project.
Line Item Line Item Number. Contract line item number of the item.
Item Code ID for the item.
Fed State Prj Nbr Federal, State, or Province Project Number. For the contract, project or category. Required.
Cont Est Matrl Qty Contract Estimated Material Quantity. Current expected material quantity of contract items multiplied by the conversion factor. Sum of bid quantity of contract item and change order quantity multiplied by the conversion factor.
Represented Qty Represented Quantity. Quantity of material represented by the sample.
Material Unit Item material unit short description.
Reported Matrl Qty Reported Material Quantity. Total material installed is calculated based on installed quantity of contract item multiplied by the conversion factor.
Satisfy Rep Matl Qty
Satisfy Represented Material Quantity. Total material quantity reported on the Contract panel of the Maintain Sample Information window. How much of the material this sample represents to this contract item. Total of satisfied represented material multiplied by conversion factor.
Line Item Description
Description of the contract line item.
Supp Description 1 Supplemental Description 1.
Supp Description 2 Supplemental Description 2.
Table 5. Maintain Sample Information Window - Contract Panel - Fields
QRG
CONVERSION FACTOR
24 Creating Material Field Records and Entering Test Results
Exercise 7
In this exercise, learn how to record contract-related data.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Inspector (INSP)
Keys: D263073; today’s date (DWR); 555.0105 (item code); 0001 (cat);
CLASS-A-SUBS (material code)
1. Click the Contract tab. SiteManager displays the Contract
panel.
2. In the Represented Qty column, verify that the quantity is
0.
3. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
You’ve verified the contract data.
KNOWN ISSUE
EVEN THOUGH NO
CHANGE WAS MADE, SITEMANAGER MAY
REQUIRE A SAVE HERE.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 25
Recording Other Sample Data
To assign the sample to a destination lab, a user for email
notification, and other information, use the Other panel.
Figure 8. Maintain Sample Information Window - Other Panel
Field Name Description
Key Information
Sample Automatically system-populated with the value that appears on the Basic Sample Data panel.
Type Dropdown list of agency-defined fields.
ID Values based on Type selected. Searchable or manual entry.
Description Description of selected ID.
Table 6. Maintain Sample Information Window - Other Panel - Fields
26 Creating Material Field Records and Entering Test Results
Exercise 8
In this exercise, learn to assign the sample to a field lab and track
more information.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Inspector (INSP)
Keys: D263073; today’s date (DWR); 555.0105 (item code); 0001 (cat);
CLASS-A-SUBS (material code)
1. Click the Other tab. SiteManager displays the Other panel.
2. In the Type dropdown list, select Destination Lab.
3. Using the right mouse button, click on the ID field.
4. From the object menu, select the Search choice.
5. In the Destination Lab column, double-click Field Lab.
6. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
Now, let’s identify the user to be notified when the sample has been
authorized.
7. On the toolbar, click the New button. SiteManager inserts a
blank row.
8. In the Type dropdown list, select User ID for email
notification. SiteManager automatically populates the ID
field with your user ID.
9. In the ID field, enter cn then right-click and select Filter
Search.
10. In the User ID column, double-click Your Trainers Name.
11. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
You’ve assigned the sample to a destination lab.
USAGE
IF TESTS ON THE SAMPLE
ARE TO BE PERFORMED
IN THE MAIN OFFICE, USE
THE MAIN OFFICE
DESTINATION LAB, NOT
THE FIELD LAB.
IF NO FIELDS ARE
VISABLE CLICK ON “NEW” ICON ON TASKBAR
TRAINER YOU WILL
RECEIVE AN E-MAIL
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 27
Handling Test Assignments
To accept default tests or assign additional tests, use the Assign Sample
Tests window. If you are not ready to lock the sample and assign tests,
click the Cancel button.
You should routinely click the Accept Default Tests button. The system
administrator has pre-determined the default tests for materials, because
you commonly perform these tests on these materials. If you desire
another test for a material, you must click the More button to add
additional tests. If you would like to add another test, but you are unsure
about which one to add, click the Cancel button. Once you save tests, you
cannot reassign them. SiteManager makes the Assign Tests button
unavailable from the Basic Sample Data panel.
Figure 9. Assign Sample Tests Window
Field Name Description
Sample ID Automatically populated by the system with the value that appears on the Basic Sample Data panel.
Sample Type Identifies the purpose of the sample.
Material Code Unique code that identifies the material.
Accept Default Tests
Click this button to accept default tests automatically associated by selecting the material.
Cancel Click this button to close the Assign Sample Tests window.
More Click this button to expand the Assign Sample Tests window to view panes with available tests and the tests to be assigned.
Table 7. Assign Sample Tests Window - Fields
28 Creating Material Field Records and Entering Test Results
Exercise 9
In this exercise, learn how to accept the default tests assigned to a
sample.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Inspector (INSP)
Keys: D263073; today’s date (DWR); 555.0105 (item code); 0001
(cat); CLASS-A-SUBS (material code)
1. On the toolbar, click the Assign Tests button. SiteManager
displays the Assign Sample Tests window.
Note: The message on the window informs you that
assigning tests to the sample will lock the sample. If you
are unsure about only needing the default tests, click the
Cancel button.
2. Click the Accept Default Tests button. SiteManager closes
the window, makes the Assign Tests button unavailable,
changes the sample’s status to Received, and displays the
Basic Sample Data panel.
3. On the toolbar, click the Save button. The system sends an
automated email to the user that logged the sample.
You’ve accepted the default tests assigned to a sample.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 29
Note: Users will receive an email with the lab reference number to use for
the cylinders.
Figure 10. Automated Email with Lab Reference Number Information
30 Creating Material Field Records and Entering Test Results
Printing Sample Labels
After you create a sample record in SiteManager, print a sample label. The
sample label identifies the sample by the sample ID and other fields so the
lab unit supervisor or lab manager in the destination lab can link the
sample to the correct record in SiteManager.
Figure 11. Print Label Window
Field Name Description
Label Information
Smpl Sample ID. Unique ID auto-generated by SiteManager.
Sample Date Date the sample was collected.
Lab Cntrl Control number associated to the sample.
Material Description Description of the Material.
Lab Ref Lab Reference Number. Optional ID used by the lab processing the sample. Automatically generated by NYSDOT to help identify the sample. Usage: Generated with a database trigger.
Window Functions
Available Printers Dropdown list of available printers.
Print Click to send the label to the specified printer.
Number of Copies Specify the number of desired copies.
Cancel Click to close the Print Label window without printing a label.
Table 8. Print Label Window - Fields
NOTE
WARN CLASS! DO
NOT CLICK PRINT IN
THE FOLLOWING
EXERCISE.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 31
Exercise 10
In this exercise, learn how to print a label.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Inspector (INSP)
Keys: D263073; today’s date (DWR); 555.0105 (item code); 0001
(cat); CLASS-A-SUBS (material code)
1. On the Basic Sample Data panel, on the toolbar, click the
Print Label button. SiteManager displays the Print Label
window.
2. In the Available Printers dropdown list, select the desired
choice.
3. In the Number of Copies field, type 2.
Note: Do NOT click the Print button. This exercise is for
demonstration purposes only.
4. Click the Cancel button. SiteManager closes the window.
5. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
You’ve learned how to print a label.
32 Creating Material Field Records and Entering Test Results
Understanding the Enter Test Results Window
To access the test templates in which you record test results, use the Enter
Test Results window.
On the middle pane, each row represents individual tests assigned to a
sample. When you select a row, the lower pane displays the test template.
Record the test results in the test template.
Note: As you select different rows, LIMS displays the corresponding test
templates in the bottom pane.
When finished, select the Test Completed check box and click the Save
button.
Figure 12. LIMS - Enter Test Results Window
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 33
Field Name Description
Test Completed Indicates that test results are complete.
Sample ID Unique ID auto-generated by SiteManager.
Lab Ref Number Unique lab unit identifier. Secondary sample identifier. Auto-generated.
Lab Control Number
Identifies a sample. Format is ‘CN’ followed by Sample ID. Use the same lab control number on different samples to group samples.
Test Description Textual description of the test.
Test Number Number that identifies the test.
Tester* Tester assigned to the test.
Test Status* Identifies where test is in the LIMS workflow.
Priority Importance of test. High, Medium or Low.
Due Date Date test results are due.
Material Code Material unique identifier.
Lab Unit Lab unit assigned to the test.
Sampler Identifies person who took the sample.
Sample Type Identifies purpose of the sample.
P/S Code Code for the supplier.
Producer/Supplier Name
Name of the supplier.
Receive Date Date sample received at lab unit.
Seal Number Unique lab unit identifier. Secondary sample identifier.
Control Number Identifies a sample.
Table 9. LIMS - Enter Test Results Window – Fields
34 Creating Material Field Records and Entering Test Results
Moving and Resizing Columns
If desired, change column widths and move locations of the columns on
the window.
Note: Once you move or resize a column, it remains in that position until
you move or adjust it again, even after you exit the window.
Tip! To move a column, do the following: Click and drag the desired
column heading to the desired location. Release your mouse button. The
column displays in the new location.
Tip! To resize a column, do the following: Position your mouse pointer
over the line between two columns, click and drag to the desired width.
Release your mouse button. The column displays with the new width.
Understanding Filter Criteria
To help define data displayed on the window, the Filter Criteria dropdown
list has fields available for you to choose. Some of the choices include
Contract ID, Sample Date (MM/DD/YY), and Test Description.
NOTE
DEMO THIS.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 35
Exercise 11
In this exercise, learn to access the Enter Test Results window and
create a filter.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Inspector (INSP)
Keys: D263073; today’s date (DWR); 555.0105 (item code); 0001
(cat);CLASS-A-SUBS (material code)
1. On the toolbar, click the Open LIMS button. SiteManager
launches the LIMS component.
2. Double-click the Enter Test Results icon. LIMS displays
the Enter Results window.
3. In the first Filter Criteria dropdown list, select the Sample
ID choice.
4. In the second Filter Criteria dropdown list, select the
Contains choice.
5. In the Filter Criteria text field, type your SM User Id.
6. Click the Apply button. The system selects your samples,
click on Sample Id created for your sample in
Sitemanager, LIMS will display the associated tests.
7. In the Test Description column, select Slump. The system
displays the test template in the lower pane.
You’ve accessed the Enter Test Results window and created a filter.
36 Creating Material Field Records and Entering Test Results
Using Material Templates to Enter Test Results
Each template has a header containing the test description and an area
below the header with three choices: In Spec, Out of Spec, and No Spec.
Based on test results, the system denotes the status of the test in most
cases by automatically selecting the proper choice.
To compare test results against specification requirements, some tests use
a material test specification with a minimum and maximum value range.
Since this material specification can change over time, the specification is
maintained by effective date. LIMS denotes this date in the Effective Date
dropdown list.
The system automatically updates the template to indicate if the test
results meet specifications or not by selecting the button that corresponds
to the sample result’s status. If the test results entered do not fall within
the effective date’s minimum and maximum value range, the system
highlights the results in red with an asterisk (*) to flag the failed test
result.
Figure 13. LIMS - Enter Test Results Window - Test Data - Detail
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 37
Exercise 12
In this exercise, learn to enter test results for air content, slump, and
concrete cylinder cast tests and mark the tests as complete.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Inspector (INSP)
Keys: Your sample ID; Slump (test)
Now, let’s enter the test results data for the slump test.
1. In the Test Data pane, in the Slump (in.)* field, type 2.75.
2. On the keyboard, press the Tab key. LIMS denotes the test
as In Spec.
Now, let’s mark the slump test as complete.
3. In the Test Completed column, select the check box.
4. On the toolbar, click the Save button. LIMS removes the
test from the queue.
Now, let’s enter the test results data for the air content test.
5. In the Test Description column, select Air Content.
6. In the Air Content (%)* field, type 7.
7. On the keyboard, press the Tab key. LIMS denotes the test
as In Spec. The test results field label changes to black.
8. In the Test Data pane, in the Instrument dropdown list,
select 2222222 - AIR POT. Optional, per Regional
directions.
Now, let’s record remarks about an out of spec result from an
earlier run.
9. On the toolbar, click the Remarks button.
10. In the Remarks window, click the Public Remarks remark
type.
11. In the Public Remarks field, type Air pot 1111111 needs
calibration. First run of test had 10% air content. -HB.
KNOWN ISSUE
MAY PROMPT YOU
TO SAVE AGAIN.
IF SO, CLICK YES.
USAGE
IN THE PUBLIC
REMARKS, RECORD
THE REASON WHY A
RESULT WAS OUT OF
SPEC.
Note:
If no information displays in dropdown then post all information about AIR POT in LIMS Public Remarks
38 Creating Material Field Records and Entering Test Results
12. To close the Remarks window, on the toolbar, click the
Remarks button again.
Now, let’s mark the air content test as complete.
13. In the Test Completed column, select the check box.
14. On the toolbar, click the Save button. LIMS removes the
test from the queue.
Now, let’s enter the test information for the concrete cylinder cast test.
15. In the Test Description column, select Concrete Cylinder
Cast.
16. In the Test Data pane, in the Location field, type RT 73.
17. In the Set field, type 1.
18. In the Time (HH:MM) field, type 10:09.
19. In the dropdown list box, select the AM choice.
20. In the Air Temperature (F) field, type 72.
21. In the Concrete Temperature (F) field, type 80.
22. In the How Many Pair? dropdown list, select 2. The
template displays additional fields.
23. In the Pair 1 Cast For dropdown list, select A+B.
24. In the Age field, type 7.0.
25. In the Days/Hours dropdown list, select Days.
26. In the Pair 2 Cast For dropdown list, select C+D.
27. In the Age field, type 28.0.
28. In the Days/Hours dropdown list, select Days.
Now, let’s complete the template with the available information
from the BR 316 form.
29. In the Cement Type field, type 1.
30. In the Fly Ash Supplier Code field, type 18.
31. In the Air Agent Code field (commonly: Air Entrainer),
type 1044.
TIP
DOUBLE-CLICK IN A
FIELD WHEN YOU
NEED TO TYPE OVER
AN EXISTING VALUE.
TIP
MAXIMIZE THE PANE
TO COMPLETE THE
TEMPLATE. RESTORE THE PANE
BEFORE SAVING.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 39
32. In the Water Reducer Code field, type 3049.
Now, let’s mark the concrete cylinder cast test as complete.
33. In the Test Completed column, select the check box.
34. On the toolbar, click the Save button. LIMS removes the
test from the queue.
Now, let’s clear the filter and prepare for the next exercise.
35. In the Filter Criteria area, click the Reset button.
36. On the toolbar, click the Exit SiteManager LIMS button.
LIMS prompts you to verify.
37. In the message box, click the Yes button. SiteManager
displays the Maintain Sample Information window.
38. On the toolbar, click the Close button. SiteManager displays
the Material Inspection Detail window.
You’ve entered test results and marked tests as complete.
40 Creating Material Field Records and Entering Test Results
Entering Certifications
Exercise 13
In this exercise, learn to enter Certifications, Visual and Approve
List.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Inspector (INSP)
Keys: D263073; Item 555.0105
1. Click on Material Code; 709-0100
2. On the toolbar, click the Create Sample for Selected
Material button. SiteManager displays the Maintain Sample
Information window.
3. In the Smpl Type dropdown list, select the Project
Material Acceptance choice.
Now, let’s select the Producer/Supplier by its code.
4. Using the right mouse button, click on the P/S field.
5. From the object menu, select the Search choice.
SiteManager displays the Search Window.
6. Double-click the row for the NUCMAR producer/supplier
code.
7. Using the right mouse button, click on the Mnfctr field
8. From the object menu, select the Search choice.
SiteManager displays the Search Window.
9. Double-click the row for the NUCMAR producer/supplier
code.
USAGE
FIND THE
PRODUCER/SUPPLIER
CODE ON THE DELIVERY
TICKET(S).
CLICK ON PRODUCER
SUPPLIER CODE HEADER
TO SORT CODES
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 41
Now, let’s select the region where the sample was taken.
10. In the Geog Area dropdown list, select Region 09.
11. Enter AL/Vis Qty field 14.
12. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
13. Click the Addtl Sample Data tab. SiteManager displays the
Addtl Sample Data panel.
14. If steel material click on Buy American, in dropdown select
USA Produced.
15. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
16. Click the Contract tab. SiteManager displays the Contract
panel.
17. Place Quantity in the Represented Qty field, 14.
18. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
19. Click the Other tab. SiteManager displays the Other panel.
If no line is available select “New” icon
20. In the Type dropdown list, select Destination Lab.
21. Using the right mouse button, click on the ID field.
22. From the object menu, select the Search choice.
23. In the Destination Lab column, double-click Field Lab.
24. Click New to get a new row.
25. In the Type dropdown list, select Approved List.
26. In the ID field type Yes.
27. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
28. Click “T” to assign tests.
29. Click Accept Default Tests
30. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
Sample Status is now Complete on DWR Info Tab.
42 Creating Material Field Records and Entering Test Results
31. On the toolbar, click the Close button. SiteManager displays
the Daily Work Reports window.
32. On the toolbar, click the Exit SiteManager button.
You have now successfully entered a Materials Certification and Approved List sample.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 43
Summary
To display the Daily Work Reports window:
1. On the Main Panel panel, double-click the Daily Work
Reports icon.
2. On the Daily Work Reports panel, double-click the Daily
Work Reports icon.
To display the Material Inspection Detail window (from the Daily
Work Reports window’s Work Items panel’s Record Work Item
view):
1. On the Daily Work Reports window’s Work Items panel’s
Record Work Item view’s toolbar, click the Open Material
Inspection Detail Window button.
2. In the Material Component column, select the desired
material.
To display the Material Detail window:
1. On Material Inspection Detail window’s toolbar, click the
View Material button.
44 Creating Material Field Records and Entering Test Results
To create a sample record from a DWR:
1. On Material Inspection Detail window’s toolbar, click the
Create Sample for Selected Material button.
2. On the Maintain Sample Information window, in the Smpl
Type dropdown list, select the desired choice.
3. Complete the desired optional fields.
4. In the Geog Area dropdown list, select the desired choice.
5. If Cert Type Sample, enter any Apl and/or Vis quantity in
the AL/Vis Qty field
6. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
7. Click the Addtl Sample Data tab.
8. Complete the desired optional fields.
9. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
10. Click the Contract tab.
11. If necessary, in the Represented Qty field, type the desired
value.
12. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
13. Click the Other tab.
14. In the Type dropdown list, select the Destination Lab
choice.
15. Using the right mouse button, click on the ID field.
16. On the object menu, select the Search choice. SiteManager
displays the Search Window.
17. In the Destination Lab column, double-click the desired
choice.
18. For Approved List / Visual insert rows for AL/Vis remark.
19. If necessary, insert additional rows.
20. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 45
To accept default tests:
1. On the Maintain Sample Information window’s toolbar,
click the Assign Tests button.
2. Click the Accept Default Tests button.
To print a label:
1. On the Maintain Sample Information window’s toolbar,
click the Print Label button.
2. In the Available Printers dropdown list, select the desired
choice.
3. In the Number of Copies field, type the desired number.
4. Click the Print button.
To access the Sampling and Testing panel:
1. On the Main Panel, double-click the Materials
Management icon.
2. On the Materials Management panel, double-click the
Sampling and Testing icon.
To enter test results:
1. On the LIMS panel, double-click the Enter Test Results
icon.
2. Select the sample’s test row.
3. Enter the test results for the test.
4. In the Test Completed column, click to select the check
box for the sample you are marking complete.
5. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
To use a DWR template:
1. On the Daily Work Reports window’s Work Items panel’s
toolbar, click the DWR Template button.
In the Description column, double-click the desired
template name.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 1
Viewing Sample Information in LIMS
In this chapter, you will receive instruction about the following:
▪ Opening View-Only Sample Records 2
▪ Understanding Sample Information Views 5
▪ Viewing the Lower Panels 7
▪ Summary 12
▪ Review Exercise 14
2 Viewing Sample Information in LIMS
Opening View-Only Sample Records
Before displaying the View-Only Sample Information window, LIMS
displays the Open Sample Records window where a user must specify
criteria to search for samples. To find a specific sample record or groups
of sample records based upon selected criteria, use the Open Sample
Records window.
Usage: All groups with access to LIMS have access to the View-Only
Sample Information window.
Using Generic Filter Criteria
The Filter dropdown list contains a default filter called Generic. Use the
generic filter to create search criteria for samples. The Generic filter
retains the filter criteria defined in the Open Sample Records window until
you clear the filter.
Tip! Create filters for frequently used search criteria.
Figure 1. LIMS - Open Sample Records Window
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 3
Table 1. LIMS - Open Sample Records Window - Fields
Exercise 1
In this exercise, learn how to search for samples on a contract to
view in the View-Only Sample Information window.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Inspector (INSP)
Keys: NA
1. Start and log on to LIMS. LIMS displays the Navigation Panel.
2. On the Navigation Panel, double-click the View-Only
Sample Information icon. LIMS displays the Open Sample
Records window with the generic filter criteria.
3. Click the Open Records button. LIMS displays the View-
Only Sample Information window with only the sample
records associated to D263073.
You’ve used a generic filter to view a desired set of records.
Field Name Description
Filter Dropdown list containing types of available filters (that is, Generic or user-specified).
New Filter Click to create a new filter.
Delete Filter Click to delete previously created filters.
Field Name of the field in which the filter criteria is applied.
Operator Equals, greater than, less than, begins with, and so on.
Value User-specified text by which to filter in a field.
And/Or Choose to combine criteria.
Add Criteria Click to add another row of criteria for additional comparisons.
Delete Criteria Click to remove the selected criterion.
Clear All Click to remove all selected criteria.
Open Records Click to invoke the search request.
Cancel Click to close the Open Sample Records window without performing a search request.
4 Viewing Sample Information in LIMS
Creating New Filters
To create a new filter, click the New Filter button, name it, select criteria,
and click the Save Criteria button. You may create as many filters as you
need, the system does not have a maximum limit.
Note: Switch filters at any time by selecting a filter from the Filter
dropdown list.
Tip! LIMS will retain the filter criteria unless you clear the criteria.
Exercise 2
In this exercise, learn how to create a new filter.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Inspector (INSP)
Keys: Contract ID - Equals - D263073 (filter)
1. On the toolbar, click the Open button. SiteManager displays
the Open Sample Records window.
2. Click the New Filter button. LIMS prompts you to name
the new filter.
3. In the Save New Filter As field, type Contract and P/S.
4. Click the OK button. LIMS displays ‘Contract and P/S’ in
the Filter dropdown list.
Now, let’s add criteria and open records.
5. Click the Add Criteria button. SiteManager adds a row.
6. In the Field dropdown list, select the Contract ID choice.
7. In the Operator dropdown list, select the Equals choice.
8. In the Value field, type D263073.
9. Click the Add Criteria button. SiteManager adds a row.
10. In the Field dropdown list, select the Producer Supplier
Code choice.
11. In the Operator dropdown list, select the Equals choice.
NOTE
VALUE FIELD IS
CASE-SENSITIVE.
IMPORTANT!
THE ASTERISK AT
THE END OF SOME
COLUMN HEADINGS
SERVES TO INFORM
YOU THAT THE
FILTER USES THE
CODE VALUE
RATHER THAN THE
DESCRIPTION.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 5
12. In the Value field, type C0003.
13. Click the Open Records button. LIMS displays only the
samples for D263073 with the producer supplier code
C0003.
14. What materials have been sampled for this
producer/supplier on this contract? __________
You’ve created a filter to view a desired set of records.
Understanding Sample Information Views
To verify information on a sample record, use the View-Only Sample
Information window. The View-Only Sample Information window’s
upper pane displays sample records in the system. By selecting a row in
the upper pane, the information in the lower pane changes to review
sample details, contract details, other details, sample receive information,
and tests assigned, for the selected row.
Figure 2. LIMS - View-Only Sample Information Window
ANSWERS
14. CLASS-A OR
CLASS-A-SUBS.
6 Viewing Sample Information in LIMS
Field Name Description
Sample ID Unique ID auto-generated by SiteManager.
Control Number Allows tracking of related samples in LIMS. SiteManager assigns "CN" followed by the sample ID.
Seal Number Secondary sample ID.
Material Code Unique ID of the material.
Material Name Name assigned to the material.
Sample Type* Identifies the purpose of the sample.
Sample Status* Status of the sample being viewed.
Sample Date Date that the sample was taken.
Log Date Date that the sample is entered into SiteManager.
Sample Finalized Date Date that the Sample is authorized.
Geographic Area* Region where the sample was taken.
P/S Code Code of the producer/supplier that supplied the material.
Plant ID Code for the plant that provided the material.
Product Name Brand name of the material.
Sampler User ID of the person who took the sample.
Logged By User ID of the person who entered the sample.
Sample Requestor Name of person requesting the sample.
Last Modified By User ID of the last user to modify the sample.
Table 2. LIMS - View-Only Sample Information Window - Fields
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 7
Exercise 3
In this exercise, learn how to sort the data in the upper pane of the
View-Only Sample Information window.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Inspector (INSP)
Keys: Contract ID - Equals - D263073
Producer Supplier Code – Equals – C0003 (filter)
1. Click the Sample ID column heading. The system sorts the
column alphabetically.
2. Select the row for the sample ID that ends in 5710.
You’ve sorted the records.
Viewing the Lower Panels
Use the panels in the lower pane of the window to view information about
the sample and associated tests. The system pulls details from the
Maintain Sample Information window, test templates, and various test and
sample review windows.
Figure 3. LIMS - View-Only Sample Information Window - Lower Panels
8 Viewing Sample Information in LIMS
Field Name Description
Sample Details panel
Smpl Id Sample ID. Unique ID auto-generated by SiteManager.
Lab Control Number
Provides tracking of related samples in LIMS. SiteManager assigns ‘CN’ followed by the sample ID.
Lab Ref Number Lab Reference Number. Used to help identify the sample.
Material Unique code of the material and description.
Sample Status Code that identifies the current status of the sample record. Reflects current state of the sample. Pending - Initial Status Logged - Tests Assigned Received - Received by Central Lab In Testing - Enter test results Pre-Authorization - Sample in Review Sample Queue Complete - When Sample Authorized
Sample Type Sample type’s code. Used in the default assignment of tests for the sample. Usage: Refer to NYSDOT Sample Login Spreadsheet for selection based upon material.
Acceptance Method
Populated by the user in LIMS when the Sample Review (Approval) is completed.
Log Date Date the sample was created in SiteManager.
Sample Date Date that the sample was actually taken.
Geographic Area Location where the sample was taken.
Authorized By LIMS populates this field with the SiteManager user ID of the person who completes the Sample Review/Approval in LIMS.
Authorized Date Authorized Date. LIMS dates when the sample completed the Sample Review (Approval) process.
Smpld By User ID of the person who took the sample.
Producer Supplier
Code and description of the producer supplier that supplied the material.
Manufacturer Manufacturer of the product selected.
Plant Identifies the plant that provided the material.
Plant Type Code for the plant that provided the material.
Mix Design Type Type of mix design (for example, PCC).
Mix ID Unique code to identify the mix.
Product Name Product Name. Brand of the material.
Reference Location referenced on the plans where the sample was taken.
Station Station ID that identifies where the installation work began.
Offset Offset from the station ID that identifies where the installation work began.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 9
Field Name Description
Dist from Fnshd Grd
Distance from Finished Grade.
Sample Origin Origination of the sample.
Town Name of the town from which the sample was taken.
Sampled From From where the sample was taken.
Requested By Name of Person requesting the sample.
Intended Use Reason for using the material.
Buy USA Indicates if the material fulfills the requirement for the BUY USA program.
Witnessed By ID of the person witnessing the taking of the sample.
Control Nbr Control Number. Provides tracking of related samples in LIMS. SiteManager assigns ‘CN’ followed by the sample ID.
Represented Qty Quantity and units of material represented by the sample.
Seal Nbr Seal Number. Automatically generated to be used to help identify the sample.
Sample Size Size of the sample being taken.
Linked Sample ID ID of the sample linked to the opened sample.
Revised from Sample ID
Original sample ID that was revised.
Contract Details panel
Contract ID Unique ID to identify the contract.
Project Nbr Project Number. Unique ID of the project.
Line Item Nbr Line Item Number. Within a project.
Represented Quantity
Quantity of the material for the selected contract item.
Other Details panel
Other Type Type of information tracked. Agency-defined.
Other Information Recorded value for the selected type.
Tests Assigned panel
Test Meth Test Method. Identification code of the assigned test performed on the sample.
Test Description Description of the assigned test performed on the sample.
Smpl Tst Nbr Sample Test Number. Number assigned to each unique test on a sample.
10 Viewing Sample Information in LIMS
Field Name Description
Test Status panel
Test Meth Test Method. Identification code of the assigned test performed on the sample.
Test Description Description of the assigned test performed on the sample.
Smpl Tst Nbr Sample Test Number. Number assigned to each unique test on a sample.
Test Status Identifies where the test is in the work flow.
Priority Priority of the test.
Due Dt Due Date. When the test results are due.
Reportable Indicates if test results are acceptable and will appear on reports.
Test Result Val Test Result Value.
Tester ID User ID of the tester.
Lab Unit Identifies the lab.
Chrg Amt Charge Amount. Pertains to the test.
Start Dt Start Date. When test results were first entered.
Actl Compl Dt Actual Completion Date of the test results.
Test Results panel
Test Template Name of the test.
Tst Desc Test Description. Description of the test.
Template Column Identifies the name of the test template.
Min Minimum range of test specification values.
Max Maximum range of test specification values.
< Sample ID > / < Test Number >
Identifies the sample and the test number.
Table 3. LIMS - View-Only Sample Information Window - Lower Panels - Fields
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 11
Exercise 4
In this exercise, learn how to view the lower panels.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Inspector (INSP)
Keys: Contract ID - Equals - D263073
Keys: jhanley169E125710 (sample ID)
1. On the Sample Details panel, what is the sample type?
____________
Now, let’s view the contract details.
2. Click the Contract Details tab. LIMS displays the
Contract Details panel.
3. What is the represented quantity of this sample? ____
Now, let’s view the destination lab and other details.
4. Click the Other Details tab. LIMS displays the Other
Details panel.
5. What is the destination lab for this sample? _________
Now, let’s view the tests assigned to the sample.
6. Click the Tests Assigned tab. LIMS displays the Tests
Assigned panel.
7. Which tests are assigned to this sample? _________
Now, let’s view the status of the tests performed.
8. Click the Tests Status tab. LIMS displays the Tests Status
panel.
9. Are any of the test results ‘Out of Spec’? _________
Now, let’s view the results of the tests.
10. Click the Tests Results tab. LIMS displays the Tests Results panel.
11. What are the Min and Max results for the Air Content test?
____________
You’ve viewed the lower panels.
ANSWERS
1. PROJECT
CONCRETE –
SLUMP/AIR/CAST CYL.
3. 0.000
5. DESTFELD
7. AIR CONTENT, CONCRETE CYLINDER
CAST, AND SLUMP.
9. NO.
11. 5 AND 8
12 Viewing Sample Information in LIMS
Summary
To open the View-Only Sample Information window:
1. On the Navigation Panel, double-click the Sample
Information Views icon.
To open the Open Sample Records window:
1. On the View-Only Sample Information window’s toolbar,
click the Open button.
To create a new filter:
1. On the Navigation Panel, double-click the View-Only
Sample Information icon.
2. In the Filter dropdown list, select the Generic choice.
3. Click the Add Criteria button.
4. In the Field dropdown list, select the desired choice.
5. In the Operator dropdown list, select the desired choice.
6. In the Value field, type the desired text.
7. Click the Open Records button.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 13
To create a multi-criteria filter:
1. On the Open Sample Records window, in the Filter
dropdown list, select the Generic choice.
2. Click the Add Criteria button.
3. In the Field dropdown list, select the desired choice.
4. In the Operator dropdown list, select the desired choice.
5. In the Value field, type the desired text.
6. Click the Add Criteria button again.
7. In the And/Or dropdown list, select the desired choice.
8. In the Field dropdown list, select the desired choice.
9. In the Operator dropdown list, select the desired choice.
10. In the Value field, type the desired text.
11. Click the Open Records button.
To clear all criteria:
1. On the Open Sample Records window, in the Filter
dropdown list, select the desired choice.
2. Click the Clear All button.
3. Click the Open Records button.
To delete a filter:
1. On the Open Sample Records window, in the Filter
dropdown list, select the desired choice.
2. Click the Delete Filter button.
To view Sample Details, Contract Details, Other Details, Sample
Receive, Tests Assigned, or Test Results panels:
1. On the View-Only Sample Information window, in the
upper pane, select the desired sample record.
2. In the lower pane, click the desired tab.
14 Viewing Sample Information in LIMS
Review Exercise
In this exercise, demonstrate how to enter criteria to filter samples.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Inspector (INSP)
Keys: NA
1. Switch to the generic filter.
2. Clear the filter.
3. Create a generic filter to open sample records where the
sample date equals 05/22/15.
4. View a record.
5. Exit SiteManager LIMS.
Trainer remember to go in as RCA and reset the User Id’s used to PASSWORD
After Training is complete remember to open the Switcher App and change back to Production
(Prod)
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 1
Glossary
Use the following alphabetical list of useful terms and their definitions to
better understand Project SiteManager and the contract lifecycle at
NYSDOT.
Term Definition
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
AASHTOWare Project Contract Estimation to Finalization Software Suite used at DOT
Acceptance Date Date all of the work in a contract is completed and accepted.
Authorized Quantity NYSDOT’s term. Synonymous to SiteManager's ‘Current Quantity’ (Bid + Approved Change Orders).
Autopay Item An item automatically paid by the system; no entry needed.
BidX Bid Express
C/S Client/Server
CAS Contract Administration System (a Project module)
CAT Category
Catalog Project term for the ‘Catalog of Items’ in Estimator. Often referred to as the ‘Item List’ in PES.
Category Project term. Synonymous with ‘Fiscal Share.’ Logical grouping of Estimate Items in a Project (that must be within a single Fiscal Share (see ‘FS’), funded by a common funding breakout.
CES Cost Estimation System (a Project module)
CO Change Order. Project SiteManager term. Synonymous with ‘OOC.’
CR Civil Rights
Current Quantity SiteManager’s term. Synonymous to NYSDOT's ‘Authorized Quantity’ (Bid + Approved Change Orders).
D/M/WBE Disadvantaged/Minority/Woman’s Business Enterprise
DC Dollars & Cents. Unit of measure.
Delayed Work DWR/Diary remark type intended to capture delay of work not related to a Stop Work Order. Includes design delays.
Detailed Estimate Listing of estimate items and cost for the project broken down by category.
District Project term. Synonymous to NYSDOT’s ‘Region.’
DIV Division
DNumber Identifying attribute of a contract. Synonymous with ‘Proposal Number’ and ‘Contract Number.’
DOB Division of Budget
DOL Department of Labor
DOT Department of Transportation
DSS Decision Support System (a Project module).
DWR Daily Work Report. Project SiteManager term. Synonymous with ‘IR.’
2 Glossary
Term Definition
EEO Equal Employment Opportunity
EFS External Funding Source
Environment Area on the Project database, such as test, production, and so on.
Estimate 1. Listing of the estimate items broken down by group. Highest level of data in Estimator. 2. Progress estimate of items to pay the contractor.
Estimate Item Smallest unit of work on an Estimate. Composed of work, materials, and equipment. Synonymous with ‘Project Item.’
Estimated Quantity Calculated amount based on plans. Design quantity.
FA Federal Aid
FAW Force Account Work
FCP Field Change Payment (formerly, ‘Field Change Order’; briefly also known as ‘Field Change Item’).
FIN Federal ID Number
Final Paid Date Date in which the contractor for a contract has been fully paid.
Fiscal Share Used to fund a project. Category in SiteManager (see ‘Category’).
FS Fiscal Share (see ‘Category’).
IAST Independent Assurance Sampling and Testing
INSP Inspector
Item Smallest unit of work that may be selected for a proposal or a contract.
Item Code Project term. Synonymous with ‘Item’ and ‘Item Number.’
Item List List of items available for use on proposals and contracts.
ITI Info Tech, Inc. An unofficial abbreviation. Do not use.
JOC Job Order Contract
LAN Local Area Networks
LAS Letting and Award System (a Project module)
LD Liquidated Damages
LIMS Laboratory Information Management System. SiteManager’s component for managing laboratory information. Also refers to NYSDOT's existing homegrown legacy system.
Line Item Number Project SiteManager term. Synonymous with ‘Sequence Number.’
LPE Last Progress Estimate
LS Lump Sum. Unit of measure.
MA Material Acceptance
MAT Materials
MDPA Material Discrepancy Payment Adjustment. SiteManager system code table value. Appears in the Line Item Adjustments window.
MIR Merchandise/Invoice Received. Date the PM received the documentation for an estimate. In SiteManager, the Estimate PM Approval Date (in the Estimate Tracking window) documents this date.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 3
Term Definition
Mobile Inspector An App on your phone or tablet that will let you enter info on DWR’s which then can be transferred to SiteManager
NCA Non-Certification Acceptance
NYSDOT New York State Department of Transportation
OE Office Engineer. Synonymous with ‘ASSTPM.’
One-Year Letting Schedule
Calendar of dates and deadlines for lettings for a given year.
OSC Office of the State Comptroller
PCN Project Control Number
PES Proposal and Estimates System (a Project module)
PIN Project Identification Number
Pipeline Project SiteManager term that refers to bidirectional data transfer between the server and a standalone computer.
PM Project Manager. Synonymous with ‘EIC.’
PM Personal Machine, as it pertains to the pipeline process.
PPI Producer Price Index. (Fuel and Asphalt Adjustments)
Project 1. Project term for a portion of a contract. 2. NYSDOT term for estimate. 3. NYSDOT term which includes other high-level information including a textual location of work, counties in which the work will be performed, funding, road names, and more.
Project Items Smallest unit of work on a project and a proposal. Synonymous with ‘Estimate Item.’
PSC Program Support Center
PSS Project Scheduling System. PPMIS software’s module that PMD uses.
PUG Project Users Group
QA Quality Assurance
QAF Quality Adjustment Factor
QC Quality Control
RE Resident Engineer. Assistant PM group in SiteManager. Synonymous with ‘ASSTPM.’
SDF State Dedicated Fund
Sequence Number Number used by finance in a contract. Synonymous with ‘LIN’ or ‘Line Item Number’ in SiteManager.
SFY State Fiscal Year
SiteManager Comprehensive construction management software that seamlessly covers the complete construction and materials management process from contract award through contract finalization. (Project module)
Sites Project term created in order to ensure work is done in a timely manner and impose a penalty or collect liquidated damages when work is not completed on time. Similar to Milestones in SiteManager.
SM SiteManager
4 Glossary
Term Definition
SMA-M SiteManager Administrators - Materials
SMC SiteManager Construction
SMM SiteManager Materials
Stockpiled (Partial Payment)
See ‘Stockpiled Materials.’
Stockpiled Materials SiteManager term. Synonymous to NYSDOT’s ‘Stored Materials’ or ‘Partial Payment.’
Stored Materials See ‘Stockpiled Materials.’
SUB Subcontractor
Suspension of Work DWR/Diary Remark type. Intended to capture any Stop Work Order related delay of work.
Tablet Computer used for drawing.
Template Customized screen in SiteManager that allows data entry.
TPA Project (Pre-construction) System Administrator
Unit Price Estimated price of installing an item in an Estimate of Project.
UWA Uncompleted Work Agreement
Work Authorized to Date
Work Completed to Date (and currently entered into CEES)
WZTC Work Zone Traffic Control
Table 1. Terms and Definitions
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 1
Initializing and Revising Contract Materials
In this chapter, you will receive instruction about the following:
▪ Understanding Maintenance for Materials on a Contract 2
▪ Modifying Conversion Factors for Contract Materials 3
▪ Summary 6
2 Initializing and Revising Contract Materials
Understanding Maintenance for Materials on a Contract
After a contract has been activated and sampling and testing requirements
have been generated, use SiteManager’s Contract Materials component to
generate an Outstanding Item List report for a list of contract items with
no sampling and testing requirements defined, generate contract item
sampling and testing requirements, and modify sampling and testing
requirements to meet the needs of the contract.
Exercise 1
In this exercise, learn how to display the Contract Materials panel.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073 or D261177
1. Start and log onto SiteManager as user regxx01.
2. Double-click the Materials Management icon.
SiteManager displays the Materials Management panel.
3. Double-click the Contract Materials icon. SiteManager
displays the Contract Materials panel.
4. Double-click the Contract Sampling and Testing icon.
SiteManager displays the Contract Sampling and Testing
panel.
You’ve displayed the Contract Sampling and Testing panel.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 3
Modifying Conversion Factors for Contract Materials
To modify materials contained within a contract line item and contract
sampling and testing requirements for the material, including changes to
the conversion factor, testing frequencies or material, use the Contract
Sampling and Testing Requirements window.
Note: When adding a new item to the contract via change order,
SiteManager automatically generates contract sampling and testing
requirements records for each material of the item upon change order
approval.
Usage: Upon contract activation, the conversion factor for all primarily
used materials, and their sub-components, will be 1.00.
Modifying an Item’s Materials for a Contract
A contract may require an approved source or a different conversion factor
for a material. To modify an item’s materials for a contract, use the
Contract Sample and Testing Requirement’s window’s Materials panel.
Figure 1. Contract Sample and Testing Requirements Window - Materials Panel
USAGE
1.00 AND 0.00 IS
SIMILAR TO ITEMS
REQUIRING
CERTIFICATIONS OR NOT
IN CEES, BUT IT
INCLUDES ALL SUB-COMPONENTS AS WELL.
4 Initializing and Revising Contract Materials
Field Description
Key Information
Contract ID code for the contract. Agency-defined.
Project ID for the project.
Bid Item Code Id for the item.
Item Unit Unit of measure for the item.
Item Information
Desc 1 Description 1
Desc 2 Description 2
Supp Desc 1 Supplemental Description 1
Supp Desc 2 Supplemental Description 2
Material Information
Material Code ID for the material.
Material Code (2nd field)
Description of the material.
Conversion Factor Used by the required samples calculation to convert current quantity to required quantity.
Approved Source Required
Indicates whether an approved source must be used.
Material Quantity Quantity of the material.
Material Unit Unit of measure for the material.
Special Instruction Pertains to the material on the contract.
Table 1. Contract Sample and Testing Requirements Window - Materials Panel - Fields
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 5
Exercise 2
In this exercise, learn how to modify an item’s material for a
contract to reflect that you expended one material and have to use a
different material for the remainder of the job.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073
1. On the Contract Materials panel, double-click the
Contract Sampling and Testing icon. SiteManager
displays the Contract Sample and Testing Requirements
window.
2. In the Contract ID area, double-click D263073.
3. In the Project/Line Item area, in the Description column,
double-click SILT FENCE - TEMPORARY.
4. In the Material pane, in the Material Code column,
highlight 737-0102.
5. In the Conversion Factor field, type 0.
6. In the Special Instruction field, type Contractor using
different material.
7. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
Now, let’s change the conversion factor for the material you will
use in the expended material’s place.
8. In the Material pane, in the Material Code column,
highlight 737-0103.
9. In the Conversion Factor field, type 1.00.
10. In the Special Instruction field, type Contractor chose to
use this material in lieu of 737-0102.
11. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
12. On the toolbar, click the Exit SiteManager button.
You’ve modified an item’s material for a contract.
USAGE
THERE MAY BE
INSTANCES WHERE THE
SPECIAL INSTRUCTION
FIELD HAS REMARKS
FROM THE GLOBAL
SAMPLE AND TESTING
REQUIREMENTS
WINDOW. YOU MAY
APPEND TO, BUT NOT
DELETE THESE.
6 Initializing and Revising Contract Materials
Summary
To display the Contract Materials panel:
1. On the Main Panel panel, double-click the Materials
Management icon.
2. Double-click the Contract Materials icon.
To modify an item’s material for a contract:
1. On the Contract Materials panel, double-click the
Contract Sampling and Testing icon.
2. In the Contract ID area, double-click the desired contract.
3. In the Project/Line Item area, in the Line Item Number
column, double-click the desired line item number.
4. In the Material pane, in the Material Code column,
highlight the desired material code.
5. In the Conversion Factor field, type the desired number.
6. If necessary, select the Approved Source Required check
box.
7. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 1
Viewing Basic Contract Information
In this chapter, you will receive instruction about the following:
▪ Viewing Contracts 2
▪ Viewing Projects 24
▪ Viewing Categories 31
▪ Viewing Contract Items 35
▪ Viewing Contract Funding Sources 40
▪ Viewing Contract Authority 45
▪ Summary 48
▪ Review Exercise 50
2 Viewing Basic Contract Information
Viewing Contracts
To access all windows related to a contract, use the Contracts Records
panel. To view a contract record, use the Contracts window.
Exercise 1
In this exercise, learn to access the Contract Records panel.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: NA
1. Start and log on to SiteManager as user regxx01.
2. On the Main Panel panel, double-click the Contract
Administration icon. SiteManager displays the Contract
Administration panel.
3. Double-click the Contract Records icon. SiteManager
displays the Contract Records panel.
You’ve accessed the Contract Records panel.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 3
Viewing Contract Descriptions
To add, maintain, and view the basic description of the contract, use the
Description panel.
Figure 1. Contracts Window – Description Panel
USAGE
IF THE FED
OVERSIGHT BOX IS
SELECTED, THE
FHWA MUST ALSO
APPROVE CHANGE
ORDERS AND HC193
FOR MATERIAL
CERTIFICATION
MUST BE
COMPLETED AT THE
END OF THE
CONTRACT.
4 Viewing Basic Contract Information
Field Name Description
Key Information
Contract ID ID for the contract. Agency-defined. Required. Needed for activation.
Federal Aid # Pertains to the contract, project or category. Required. Needed for activation. Usage: Customized label from ‘Fed St/Pr Prj Nbr’.
Contract Information
Status Indicates the current status of a contract (that is, Pending, Active, Complete and Archived).
PIN Project defined for this contract. If multiple projects exist for the contract, select the primary project. Usage: Customized label from ‘Primary PCN’.
Zone Office number for the Level 2 office responsible for administering the contract. Agency-defined label. Required. (Level 1 office is the transportation agency headquarters.) Needed for activation. Usage: Customized label.
Region Office number for the Level 3 office responsible for administering the contract. Agency-defined label. If there are only two administration levels, does not display. Usage: Customized label.
Unit Office number for the Level 4 office responsible for administering the contract. Agency-defined label. If there are only two or three administration levels, does not display. Usage: Customized label.
Progress Sched Progress Schedule. Type used for the contract (that is, Percent Complete for a Time Period, Percent of Critical Items Complete for a Time Period, or Critical Path Method.) If Critical Path Method is selected, no schedule is processed for this contract in SiteManager. If the user selects a different schedule type on the Progress Schedule window, the system changes this field.
Variance Pct Variance Percentage. Percentage difference between a schedule’s anticipated and actual completion percent. SiteManager generates a message when the difference is greater than this percentage. Example: Assume the Variance Pct is 10%. If you anticipated 30% of the work would be complete by a certain date, but the actual percentage complete is 19% (a variance of 11%), SiteManager notifies the recipient(s) of the variance.
Desc Description. Pertains to the contract. Required. Needed for activation.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 5
Field Name Description
Funding Indicates that the contract is funded by federal funds only, non-federal funds only (state, province, etc.), or both. Required. Needed for activation.
Time Charges How to assess time charges for the contract (that is, Work Days, Calendar Days, or Fixed Completion Date). Required. Needed for activation.
Bid Days Original number of days for the contract. Required when the Work Days or Calendar Days is selected from the Time Charges dropdown list. Needed for activation.
Bid Amt Bid Amount. Original bid amount of the contract. Inquiry-only.
Contract Type Agency-defined classification of the contract type (for example, Biddable, Safety, A + B, Prime Contract). Required. Needed for activation.
Fed Oversight Federal Oversight. Indicates that federal authorities must receive and approve any change orders for this contract. Usage: If selected, the FWHA must also approve change orders and HC193 for material certification must be completed for the end of the contract.
Work Type Agency-defined classification of the major type of work being done on the contract (for example, Bridge Work, Beautification). Required. Needed for activation.
Local Oversight Indicates that local authorities must approve change orders.
Proposal Fund Type Type of funds used for the contract.
Item Spec Year Specification Year. The Item Master specification year of the items used for the contract. Required. Needed for activation. Usage: Customized label from ‘Spec Yr’.
Unit System Indicates that the measurement system used for the contract is either English or Metric. Required. Needed for activation.
Spec Book Year Specification Book Year. Supplemental Item Master specification year of the Items used for the contract. Usage: Customized label from ‘Suppl Spec Bk Yr’.
Alt ID Alternate ID. Pertains to the contract. Agency-defined. Cannot be modified if an estimate has been generated.
Wage Decision Information
Wage Decision ID Agency-defined ID for a wage decision applicable to the contract. Searchable. Required. Needed for activation. Used during the loading of contractor payrolls to determine potential wage rate variances.
Wage Decision Description
Description of the wage decision.
Genrl Wg Dcsn ID General Wage Decision ID.
Table 1. Contracts Window – Description Panel – Fields
6 Viewing Basic Contract Information
Exercise 2
In this exercise, learn to view the contract description.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: NA
1. On the Contract Records panel, double-click the
Contracts icon. SiteManager displays the Select Contract
window.
2. In the Contract ID area, in the Contract ID column,
double-click D263073. SiteManager displays the Contracts
window’s Description panel.
3. What is the contract type? _______________________
4. What is the number of bid days? _________________
You’ve accessed the Contracts window’s Description panel.
ANSWERS
3. BID
4. 558
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 7
Viewing Contract Location Data
To view contract location data and counties, use the Location panel. Each
contract must have one county selected as the primary county. Cannot
remove a county currently associated with one of the contract’s projects.
Figure 2. Contracts Window – Location Panel
8 Viewing Basic Contract Information
Field Name Description
Key Information
Contract ID ID for the contract. Agency-defined.
Location Information
Location Description of the contract location. Required. Needed for activation.
Beg Sta Nbr Beginning Station Number. Precisely defines the station number where the work begins.
Beg Termini Beginning Termini. Precisely defines the termini where the work begins.
Route Nbr Route Number. Where the primary work is done.
End Sta Nbr End Station Number. Precisely defines the station number where the work ends.
End Termini Precisely defines the termini where the work ends.
Highway Nbr Highway Number. Where the primary work is done.
Road System Type of road system where the primary work is done (for example, interstate, state highway, county road).
Highway Type Type of highway where the primary work is done (for example, asphalt, concrete, gravel).
Town Town in which the work is done.
County Information
Contract County Name of a county in which the work is done. Searchable.
Primary County Primary county in which the work is done. A single primary county must be indicated. Needed for activation.
Table 2. Contracts Window – Location Panel – Fields
Exercise 3
In this exercise, learn to view the location data for the contract.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073
1. On the Contracts window, click the Location tab.
SiteManager displays the Location panel.
2. What is the primary county? ____________________
You’ve accessed the Contracts window’s Location panel.
ANSWERS
2. TIOGA
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 9
Viewing Contract Payment Data
To view contract payment data (that is, the day of the month to generate
estimates and contract payment amount limits), use the Payment Data
panel.
Figure 3. Contracts Window – Payment Data Panel
10 Viewing Basic Contract Information
Field Name Description
Contract ID ID for the contract. Agency-defined.
Current Contract Amt
Current Contract Amount. Current amount of the contract (original bid amount plus approved change orders). Inquiry-only.
Generate Est1 Day Day of the month to generate the contract’s first monthly estimate. Three days before this day, SiteManager notifies the Project Manager that estimate generation is approaching.
Contract Limit Amt Contract Limit Amount. Amount allowed over the original bid amount for the contract. Added to the bid amount to calculate the maximum amount that can be paid for the contract. If populated, SiteManager protects the Contract Limit Pct field.
Liquidated Dam Rate Amt
Liquidated Damages Rate Amount. Pertains to the contract.
Generate Est2 Day Day of the month to generate the contract’s second monthly estimate. Three days before this day, SiteManager notifies the Project Manager that estimate generation is approaching. Must be later than the day in the Generate Est1 Day field.
Contract Limit Pct Contract Limit Percentage. Percent allowed over the original bid amount for the contract. Product of the limit percent multiplied by the bid amount is added to the bid amount to calculate the maximum amount that can be paid for this contract. If populated, SiteManager protects the Contract Limit Amt field.
Auto Liquidated Dam Usage: Do not use.
Price Adjmnt Ind Price Adjustment Indicator. Indicates that price adjustments are allowed for the contract’s items.
Retainage Information
Retainage Securities Allowed
Usage: Do not use.
Retainage Stkpiled Ind
Usage: Do not use.
Retainage Unlimited Escrow Ind
Usage: Do not use.
Retainage Max Escrow Amt
Usage: Do not use.
Retainage Changes Information
Retainage Changes Work Compl Basis
Usage: Do not use.
Retainage Changes Effect Date
Usage: Do not use.
Retainage Changes Pct
Usage: Do not use.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 11
Field Name Description
Retainage Changes Pct Base
Usage: Do not use.
Retainage Changes Max Pct
Usage: Do not use.
Retainage Changes Max Amt
Usage: Do not use.
Retainage Changes Lump Amt
Usage: Do not use.
Retainage Changes Trgr Pct
Usage: Do not use.
Retainage Changes Trgr Base
Usage: Do not use.
Table 3. Contracts Window – Payment Data Panel – Fields
Exercise 4
In this exercise, learn to view the payment data for the contract.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073
1. On the Contracts window, click the Payment Data tab.
SiteManager displays the Payment Data panel.
2. What is the current contract amount? ______________
You’ve accessed the Contracts window’s Payment Data panel.
ANSWERS
2. $3,773,000.00
12 Viewing Basic Contract Information
Receiving Notifications of Changes to Actual Dates
When you record an actual date, SiteManager notifies the recipients
identified in the Distribution List field.
Viewing Critical Dates
To view critical dates, use the Critical Dates panel. SiteManager has pre-
defined descriptions of the critical dates that you cannot modify because
the system adds the same critical date types to all contracts, whether added
manually or from the pre-construction system.
The actual occurrence of a critical date event appears in the Actual
Occurrence Date field. SiteManager automatically enters some actual
dates; authorized users enter others.
Figure 4. Contracts Window – Critical Dates Panel
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 13
Field Name Description
Contract ID ID for the contract. Agency-defined.
Critical Date Description
▪ System-defined critical date type. ▪ All contracts have the defaults. ▪ Cannot be added, modified, or deleted.
Actual Date also Actual Occurrence Date
▪ Date the event actually occurred. ▪ In most cases, the date must be current or in the past. ▪ If Fixed Completion Date, the ‘Original Completion
Date’ may be in the future. ▪ When an actual date is entered, the system notifies
the selected recipient(s). ▪ Important! See following table for details regarding
what happens when recording an actual date for ‘Final Agreement Approved Date’.
Required to Activate
Indicates that the event that must occur before the contract status may be changed from Pending to Active (for example, Letting Date, Award Date, Execution Date).
Required to Finalize
Indicates that the event must occur before the contract status may be changed to Complete.
Distribution List ▪ Group of users specified to receive notifications when an event has occurred.
▪ Searchable. ▪ Use this or Recipient ID. If selected, SiteManager
protects Recipient ID field.
Recipient ID ▪ User ID of the person specified to receive notifications when an event has occurred.
▪ Searchable. ▪ Use this or Distribution List. If selected, SiteManager
protects Distribution List field.
Message Text Standard message to notify the recipient(s).
Table 4. Contracts Window – Critical Dates Panel – Fields
Critical Date Type Requirements for Entering the Actual Date
Accepted Date ▪ Cannot require to activate.
Adjusted Completion Date
▪ System-entered by the change order process. ▪ Inquiry-only.
Award Date ▪ Inquiry-only when the contract is from the pre-construction system.
Checked Out to Field Date
▪ System-entered by the pipeline process when the contract is checked out.
▪ Cannot require to activate. ▪ Inquiry-only.
Contract Archived Date
▪ System-entered by the contract archival process. ▪ Cannot require to activate or finalize.
14 Viewing Basic Contract Information
Critical Date Type Requirements for Entering the Actual Date
Contractor Bankruptcy Date
▪ Cannot require to activate or finalize.
Contractor Default Date
▪ Cannot require to activate or finalize.
Contractor Final Release Date
▪ Cannot require to activate.
Execution Date ▪ Modifiable when in Pending status.
Letting Date ▪ Inquiry-only if contract transferred from the pre-construction system.
Notice to Proceed Date
▪ Inquiry-only until Active status.
Open to Traffic Date ▪ Cannot require to activate.
Original Completion Date
▪ If Calendar Days, system-entered and inquiry-only. ▪ If Fixed Completion Date, modifiable only while the
contract has a Pending status. ▪ If Available Work Days, do not record a date.
Final Agreement Approved Date
▪ Cannot require to activate. ▪ Inquiry-only until Active status. ▪ Before entering this date, approve or deny all
change orders. ▪ When you enter this date, SiteManager prompts you
to verify that you wish to continue. ▪ Important! SiteManager changes all items to Final
status upon entering and saving this date, and prompts you to verify your decision to continue. Once you save, you can no longer record work against items changed to the Final status. SiteManager notifies personnel and enters final quantities for active items and changes all active items to Final status.
Price Adjustments Base Date
▪ Modifiable when in Pending status.
Signed Date ▪ Inquiry-only when the contract is from the pre-construction system.
Substantial Work Complete Date
▪ Cannot require to activate. ▪ Modifiable when in Active status.
Work Begin Date ▪ Cannot require to activate.
Table 5. Contracts Window – Critical Dates and Requirements
VERY IMPORTANT!
CALL ATTENTION TO
THE PHYSICAL WORK
COMPLETE DATE.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 15
Exercise 5
In this exercise, learn to view the critical dates for the contract.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073
1. On the Contracts window, click the Critical Dates tab.
SiteManager displays the Critical Dates panel.
2. What is the execution date? _____________________
3. What is the notice to proceed date? _______________
You’ve accessed the Contracts window’s Critical Dates panel.
ANSWERS
2. 05/21/16
3. 05/22/16
USAGE
REGIONAL CONTRACT
ADMINISTRATOR (RCA) ACTIVATES CONTRACT.
QRG
CRITICAL DATES AND
INPUT DATA
16 Viewing Basic Contract Information
Viewing Primary Personnel Data
To view the contract’s primary personnel, use the Primary Personnel
panel.
Figure 5. Contracts Window – Primary Personnel Panel
NOTES
THE PROJECT
MANAGER AND
PROJECT ENGINEER
HERE MAY NOT MATCH
THE PURPOSE THE
AGENCY HAS DEFINED
FOR THESE ROLES. THESE ARE SYSTEM-DEFINED FOR THE
PURPOSE OF
IDENTIFYING THE
ROLES TO BE NOTIFIED
OF CERTAIN CHANGES
TO THE CONTRACT.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 17
Field Name Description
Key Information
Contract ID ID for the contract. Agency-defined.
Persons Responsible for the Contract
Project Manager User ID of the Project Manager for the contract. Receives specific messages, reports, and contract authority. Searchable. Required. Usage: The EIC.
Project Engineer User ID of the Project Engineer for the contract. Receives specific messages, reports, and contract authority. Searchable. Required. Usage: Either the RE or OE. If no OE/RE, then the EIC.
Inspected By How the Contract is being Inspected. Usage: Either State or Consultant.
Contract Created By
Name of the user who added the contract, or a system indicator for contracts built by the system.
Notification Recipients
Contract Status Changed to Active
User ID ▪ User ID of the person that SiteManager will notify when the contract changes from Pending to Active status.
▪ Searchable. ▪ Use this or Distribution List. If selected, SiteManager
protects Distribution List field.
Distribution List ▪ Name of the Distribution List that SiteManager will notify when the contract changes from Pending to Active status.
▪ Searchable. ▪ Use this or User ID. If selected, SiteManager protects
User ID field.
Work Progress Behind Schedule
User ID ▪ User ID of the person that SiteManager will notify when the contract progress falls behind schedule equal to or greater than the variance percentage. SiteManager will generate the message only if the Variance Pct field is populated and the contract work is tracked by a progress schedule.
▪ Searchable. ▪ Use this or Distribution List. If selected, SiteManager
protects Distribution List field.
18 Viewing Basic Contract Information
Field Name Description
Distribution List ▪ Name of the Distribution List that SiteManager will notify when the contract progress falls behind schedule equal to or greater than the variance percentage. SiteManager will generate the message only if the Variance Pct field is populated and the contract work is tracked by a progress schedule.
▪ Searchable. ▪ Use this or User ID. If selected, SiteManager protects
User ID field.
Civil Rights Exception Report Generated
User ID ▪ User ID of the person that SiteManager will notify when the contract’s civil rights monitoring generates an exception report.
▪ Searchable. ▪ Use this or Distribution List. If selected, SiteManager
protects Distribution List field.
Distribution List ▪ Name of the Distribution List that SiteManager will notify when the contract’s civil rights monitoring generates an exception report
▪ Searchable. ▪ Use this or User ID. If selected, SiteManager protects
User ID field.
Table 6. Contracts Window – Primary Personnel Panel – Fields
Receiving Notifications of Changes to Contract Conditions
SiteManager requires every contract to have a person identified as a
Project Manager and a Project Engineer.
Select personnel—an individual or a group—for SiteManager to notify of
certain conditions (for example, when the contract status is changed to
Active, when the contract work falls behind schedule).
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 19
Exercise 6
In this exercise, learn to view the primary personnel for the
contract.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073
1. On the Contracts window, click the Primary Personnel tab.
SiteManager displays the Primary Personnel panel.
2. Who is the Project Manager? _________________________
3. Who is the Project Engineer? _________________________
You’ve accessed the Contracts window’s Primary Personnel panel.
ANSWERS
2. WZAMBITO
3. N/A
20 Viewing Basic Contract Information
Viewing Prime Contractor Data
To view the prime contractor, the prime contacts, and the prime associates,
use the Prime Contractors panel.
Figure 6. Contracts Window – Prime Contractor Panel
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 21
Field Name Description
Key Information
Contract ID ID for the contract. Agency-defined.
Prime Contractor Information
Current Prime Vendor ID and short name for the current prime contractor. Agency-defined. Searchable. Required. When changing the current prime contractor, SiteManager deletes the data in the other fields.
Joint Venture Indicates contract was awarded to two or more investors to share ownership and control over operations.
Payroll Area Information
Required Indicates that certified payrolls are required for the contract. Select for federal contracts. Select to process payrolls in SiteManager. If selected, populate the Freq in Weeks field.
Freq in Weeks Frequency in Weeks. Weekly frequency that certified payrolls are required to be received for the contract. Select 1 for every week; 2 for every 2 weeks; 4 for every 4 weeks. Required if Required check box is selected. Required before the contract changes to Active status.
Subcontractor Information
Max Subcontract Pct
Maximum Subcontract Percentage. Maximum percentage of the total contract amount that the prime contractor is allowed to subcontract (excluding specialty items).
Subcontractors Paid
Indicates whether the prime contractor has paid all of the subcontractors. Selected by default.
Bankruptcy Information
Bankruptcy Date
Date the prime contractor filed for bankruptcy.
Bankruptcy Type Desc
Bankruptcy Type Description. Type of bankruptcy filed (for example, Chapter 11 or Chapter 13).
Defaulted Information
Indicator Select to indicate that the prime contractor is in default and another contractor or surety has taken over responsibility for the contract.
Reason Reason the original prime contractor defaulted (for example, performance or bankruptcy). Required if Indicator check box is selected.
Date Date the prime contractor defaulted. Required if Indicator check box is selected.
Original Prime Contractor
Vendor ID and short name for the original prime contractor who was awarded the contract and then defaulted. Agency-defined.
22 Viewing Basic Contract Information
Field Name Description
Prime Contacts Information
Contact Name Name of the contact person for the prime contractor. Searchable.
Contact Type Title of the contact person for the prime contractor (for example, EEO).
User ID User ID for the prime contact, if one has been assigned. Agency-defined.
Prime Associates Information
Assoc Vendor ID
Associate Vendor ID. ID for the prime contractor’s associate. Usually the Federal Tax ID. Agency-defined. Searchable.
Associate Short Name
Short name for the prime contractor’s associate.
Associate Type
Type of prime contractor associate (that is, Surety, Insurance, Escrow, Banking, Surety Agent, Escrow Agent, Other Payee, Other). Note: SiteManager requires a surety and insurance associate for every contract.
Table 7. Contracts Window – Prime Contractor Panel – Fields
Understanding the Prime Entities
The entities associated with the prime contractor follow:
▪ Prime Contractor - Contractor who is awarded the
contract.
▪ Prime Contacts - Prime contractor’s personnel who are
contact persons for the contract.
▪ Prime Associates - Vendors who have a contract-specific
relationship with the prime contractor.
Usage: Use **Surety Generic and **Insurance Generic.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 23
Exercise 7
In this exercise, learn to view the prime contractor for the contract.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073
1. On the Contracts window, click the Prime Contractor tab.
SiteManager displays the Prime Contractor panel.
2. Who is the prime contractor? ________________________
3. Why are the prime associates generic? ___________________
__________________________________________________
You’ve accessed the Contracts window’s Prime Contractor panel.
ANSWERS
2. ECONOMY PAVING CO
INC
3. NYSDOT IS NOT USING
PRIME ASSOCIATES. USE
GENERIC TO SATISFY
SITEMANAGER
REQUIREMENTS.
24 Viewing Basic Contract Information
Viewing Projects
To view contract project information, use the Projects window.
Note: SiteManager requires every contract to have at least one project.
Viewing Descriptions
To view descriptions of contract projects, use the Projects window’s
Description panel.
Figure 7. Projects Window – Description Panel
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 25
Field Name Description
Key Information
Contract ID ID for the contract. Agency-defined.
Project Information
Project Nbr Project Number. Project control number. Agency-defined. Required.
Fed St Prj Nbr Federal State Project Number. Pertains to the project. Must be unique within a contract. Inquiry-only after an estimate has been generated. Required.
Alt Prj ID Alternate Project ID. Agency-defined. Inquiry-only after an estimate has been generated.
Description Description of the project. Required.
Spec Yr Specification Year. Item Master specification year of the items used for the contract. Required.
Description Description of the project. Required.
Unit Sys Unit System. Indicates that the measurement system used for the contract is either English or Metric. Required.
Status Indicates the current status of a project (for example, Complete, Construction, Active Construction, Awaiting Award).
Complete Indicates that the project work is complete.
Auth Pay Limit Authorized Payment Limit. Used to determine if a voucher will be processed. If total payments exceed this amount, voucher will not be processed. To indicate no cap exists for total payments, leave blank. Inquiry-only after an estimate has been generated.
Release Retainage
Indicates that the project retainage is to be automatically released when the project changes to Complete status.
Acct Prj Nbr Accounting Project Number. Defined by accounting department. Inquiry-only after an estimate has been generated.
Prj Type Project Type. Identifies the type of project (for example, Federal). Required.
Work Type Code that identifies the major type of work done in the project (for example, Grading, Widening, Overlay, Construction). Agency-defined. Required.
Surface Type Type of surface grading used in the project (for example, Asphalt).
26 Viewing Basic Contract Information
Field Name Description
Location Information
Route Nbr Route Number. Where the project work takes place.
Sect Nbr Section Number. Pertains to road where the project work takes place.
Road System Type of road system where the project work takes place (for example, interstate, federal highway, state highway, or county highway).
Road Name Name of the road where the project work takes place.
Location Description of the physical location of the project. Required.
Engr Pct Engineering Percentage. The engineering construction percentage represents the state or province’s cost of managing a project. This percentage of the total project item amounts can be used to compute the total project estimated cost, which equals total project item amount multiplied by (100 + the engineering percentage).
Location Description of the physical location of the project. Required.
Work Site Identifies the landscape of the project work site (for example, Urban).
Beg Sta Beginning Station. Precisely defines the station number where the project work begins.
Beg Termini Beginning Termini. Precisely defines the termini where the project work begins.
Latitude Midpoint latitude of the project location.
End Sta End Station. Precisely defines the station number where the project work ends.
End Termini Precisely defines the termini where the project work ends.
Longitude Midpoint longitude of the project location.
Table 8. Projects Window – Description Panel – Fields
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 27
Exercise 8
In this exercise, learn to view the Projects window’s Description
panel.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073
1. On the Contracts Records panel, double-click the Projects
icon. SiteManager displays the Select Contract Project
window.
2. In the Project Nbr area, in the PIN column, double-click
904131. SiteManager displays the Projects window’s
Description panel.
3. This work will affect which routes? ______________
You’ve accessed the Projects window’s Description panel.
ANSWERS
3. ROUTE 17C
28 Viewing Basic Contract Information
Viewing Project Counties
To view associations to counties on a project, use the Projects window’s
Counties panel. For every county included in the project, the percentage of
the project work to be done in the county must be recorded.
Important! The percentages for all counties must add up to 100%.
Figure 8. Projects Window – Counties Panel
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 29
Field Name Description
Key Information
Contract ID ID for the contract. Agency-defined.
Project Information
Project Nbr Project Number. Project control number. Agency-defined.
Fed State Project Nbr
Federal State Project Number. Usage: Same as Federal Aid # on Contracts window.
Description Description of the project.
Location Description of the project location. Displays text from both Location fields on the Description panel.
Available Counties
Available Counties Counties included in the contract that have not been associated with this project.
Buttons
Add -> Click to move selected county from Available Counties pane to Associated Counties pane.
Add All ->> Click to move all counties from Available Counties pane to Associated Counties pane.
<- Remove Click to move selected county from Associated Counties pane to Available Counties pane.
<<- Rem All Remove All. Click to move all counties from Associated Counties pane to Available Counties pane.
Associated Counties
Project Counties Counties that have been associated with this project.
Proj Len % Project Length Percentage. Percentage of the total length of the work to be done in each county. Required for every project county. Total percentages for all counties must equal 100.
Table 9. Projects Window – Counties Panel – Fields
30 Viewing Basic Contract Information
Exercise 9
In this exercise, learn to view the project county.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073
1. Click the Counties tab. SiteManager displays the Counties
panel.
2. How many counties does the project cover? _____________
3. To close the Projects window, on the toolbar, click the Close
button. SiteManager displays the Contract Records panel.
You’ve accessed the Projects window’s Counties panel.
ANSWERS
2. ONE, TIOGA COUNTY.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 31
Viewing Categories
To view categories, use the Categories window. Use categories to group
items within a project funded by the same source. Each category in a
project may have a different funding source. Once a category has items
associated to it, you cannot delete the category. When you add a new
project to a contract, you must associate at least one category to the new
project.
Figure 9. Categories Window
32 Viewing Basic Contract Information
Field Name Description
Key Information
Contract ID ID for the contract. Agency-defined.
PCN Project Control Number. Agency-defined. Protected.
Category Information
Category Number Grouping of items assigned during pre-construction. Unique within a project. Protected. Erroneously created categories must be deleted.
Description Description (of the category).
Work Class Type Category Work Class Type. Classification of work for a category within a project.
Selected Category Detail Information
Catg Nbr Category Number. Grouping of items assigned during pre-construction. Unique within a project. Protected. Erroneously created categories must be deleted.
Federal Aid # Federal, State, or Province Project Number (for the category). If not entered, defaults to the Fed St/Pr Prj Nbr for the project. Usage: Label customized from Fed St/Pr Prj Nbr.
Desc Description (of the category).
Length Length of road represented by the category. If more than one category contains work for the same portion of road, the length is split between them.
Width Width of road represented by this category. If more than one Category contains work for the same portion of road, the width is split between them.
Catg Wk Cls Type Category Work Class Type. Classification of work for a category within a project.
Bridge ID Identifies a bridge or other structure. Agency-defined. Use only if the category represents structure work.
Engr Pct Engineering Percentage. Engineering construction percentage that represents the cost of managing a category. Percentage of the total category item amounts used to compute the total category estimated cost: [total category item amount x (100 + engineering percentage)].
Brdg Type Bridge Type (represented by this category). Protected if the Bridge ID field is empty.
Fed Wrk Catg Type
Federal Work Category Type. Identifies the type of work for the category.
Bridge Span Nbr Bridge Span Number. Number of spans within the bridge structure. Protected if the Bridge ID field is empty.
Rd Sect Nbr Road Section Number. Where the category work is done.
Fed Wrk Cls Type Federal Work Class Type. Class of construction used for the category.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 33
Field Name Description
Brdg Lth Bridge Length. Length of the structure represented by this category. Protected if the Bridge ID field is empty.
Hwy Nbr Highway Number. Where the primary category work occurs.
Suppl Wrk Cls Type
Supplementary Work Class Type. Federal supplementary work class for a category.
Brdg Wth Bridge Width. Width of the structure represented by this category. Protected if the Bridge ID field is empty.
Hwy Type Highway Type. Where the primary category work is done. Agency-defined.
Beg Sta Nbr Beginning Station Number. Precisely defines the station number where the category work begins.
Beg Termini Beginning Termini. Precisely defines the termini where the category work begins.
Unit Nbr Unit Number (under which the category is grouped for reporting purposes).
End Sta Nbr Ending Station Number. Precisely defines the station number where the category work ends.
End Termini Ending Termini. Precisely defines the termini where the Category work ends.
Desc Description (of the unit number under which the category is grouped).
Table 10. Categories Window – Fields
34 Viewing Basic Contract Information
Exercise 10
In this exercise, learn to view the categories for a contract.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073
1. On the Contracts Records panel, double-click the Categories
icon. SiteManager displays the Categories window.
2. What is the purpose of a category? _____________________
3. Is there more than one Category?
______________________________________
4. To close the Categories window, on the toolbar, click the Close
button. SiteManager displays the Contracts Records panel.
You’ve accessed the Categories window.
ANSWERS
2. USED TO GROUP
ITEMS THAT ARE FUNDED
BY THE SAME SOURCE.
3. YES
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 35
Viewing Contract Items
To view items on the selected contract and project, use the Items window.
Agency-defined standard items appear on the Item Master list. Use the
Items window to view the items from the Item Master that have been
associated to the contract.
Figure 10. Items Window
KNOWN ISSUE
SITEMANAGER
INCORRECTLY DISPLAYS
THE CATEGORY NBR
LABEL.
36 Viewing Basic Contract Information
Field Name Description
Key Information
Contract ID Code for the contract. Agency-defined
Project Nbr Project Number. ID for the project. Agency-defined. May be multiple per contract.
Item Information
Category Nbr Category Number. Used to group items for various reasons, primarily for funding. Inquiry-only after saving. If you mistakenly add items to the incorrect categories, you must delete them from the incorrect category and add the item to the correct category.
Line Item Nbr Line Item Number. Number that identifies each item as it appears on the contract. User-defined for all items added to the contract via change order. Unique within the contract. Inquiry-only after saving. If you mistakenly add an item with an incorrect line item number, you must delete the incorrect entry and reenter it.
Item Code Code used to identify an item. Agency-defined. Supplied by the Item Master list. Searchable. Inquiry-only after the contract changes from Pending to Active status.
Units Type Unit of measure for this item. Supplied by the Item Master list. Inquiry-only.
Spec Year Specification Year. Year of the specification book in which the item appears. From the Item Master list.
Description Description of the item. Supplied by the Item Master list. Inquiry-only.
Major Item Indicates if the item is considered major rather than minor. Major items may have different overrun limits and parameters for change order approvals. Inquiry-only if the contract has an associated estimate, or if the item has any of the following associated: ▪ Change order ▪ Dispute ▪ Plan discrepancy (through change order) ▪ Stockpiled material
Specialty Indicates if the item is a specialty item. Specialty Items are excluded from the calculation to determine the amount of the contract that may be sublet. Inquiry-only if the contract has an associated estimate, or if the item has any of the following associated: ▪ Change order ▪ Dispute ▪ Plan discrepancy (through change order) ▪ Stockpiled material
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 37
Field Name Description
Status Type Code that indicates the current status of an item. Status types include the following: ▪ Pending - Default when the item is added. ▪ Active - When contract changes to Active status, all of the contract’s
items change to Active status. If active, cannot delete. ▪ Final - When a Final Item Quantity Change Order is approved, all of the
change order’s items change to Final status. ▪ Audited - When approved or accepted through an audit. ▪ Complete - When a contract changes to Complete status, all of the
contract’s items change to Complete status.
Unit Price Unit price of the item; identified on the invoice and contract documents. Inquiry-only after the contract changes from Pending to Active status.
Bid Qty Bid Quantity. Original quantity of the line Item as indicated on the proposal or contract. Must be greater than zero (0). If the item’s unit of measure is Lump Sum, must be equal to one (1). Inquiry-only after the contract changes from Pending to Active status. If item was added through a change order, inquiry-only and blank; in which case, quantity is obtained through the change order item quantity amount.
Bid Amt Bid Amount. Total dollar amount of item at bid. Inquiry-only. Equals bid quantity multiplied by unit price.
Proposal Line Nbr
Proposal Line Number. Line number that identifies item as it appears on the proposal. Inquiry-only. Supplied by a pre-construction system.
Related Item Allows grouping of line items (for example, all traffic control items or all items for a structure) for reporting and funding purposes. Inquiry-only if the contract has an associated estimate, or if the item has any of the following associated: ▪ Change order ▪ Dispute ▪ Plan discrepancy (through change order) ▪ Stockpiled material
Critical Indicates that the item is considered critical. Used to track the progress of contracts with the ‘Critical Items Installed’ progress schedule type. Non-critical Items such as landscaping are not included in progress tracking. If the ‘Allow Critical Item Indicator Update’ system operational parameter is set to ‘No’, the item is inquiry-only if the contract has an associated estimate, or if the item has any of the following associated: ▪ Change order ▪ Dispute ▪ Plan discrepancy (through change order) ▪ Stockpiled material ▪ Subcontract If the ‘Allow Critical Item Indicator Update’ system operational parameter is set to ‘Yes’, the checkbox is available at all times until the item changes to Final status.
38 Viewing Basic Contract Information
Field Name Description
Pay Plan Qty Pay to Plan Quantity. Indicates if the line item is paid to plan quantity. If selected, SiteManager sends an email to the user who generated the estimate to indicate that the item has exceeded the notified quantity. Inquiry-only if the contract has an associated estimate, or if the item has any of the following associated: ▪ Change order ▪ Dispute ▪ Plan discrepancy (through change order) ▪ Stockpiled material
Supp Desc Req’d Supplemental Description Required. Indicates that a supplemental description must be provided.
Material Discrepancy Adj
Material Discrepancy Adjustment. ▪ If selected, when you run estimates, SiteManager checks against
sampling and testing requirements and creates a line item adjustment if short.
Supplemental Descriptions
Description that is supplemental to the item's description from the Item Master. Editable.
Change Order Information
CO Nbr Change Order Number. Sequential number assigned to all change orders for the contract.
Pend CO Qty Pending Change Order Quantity. Net change to the item quantity from all unapproved change orders. Inquiry-only.
Pend CO Amt Pending Change Order Amount. Net change to the item quantity from all unapproved change orders multiplied by unit price. Inquiry-only.
Net CO Qty Net Change Order Quantity. Net change to the item quantity from all approved change orders.
Table 11. Items Window – Fields
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 39
Exercise 11
In this exercise, learn to view the contract items.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073
1. On the Contract Records panel, double-click the Items icon.
SiteManager displays the Select Contract Item window.
2. Click the Open Icon and double-click Contract D263073.
3. In the Project area, in the PIN column, double-click 904131.
4. In the Contract Item area, to sort the column and activate the
Find feature, click the Item Code column heading.
5. In the Find field, type 555.0105. SiteManager selects the row
for item ‘555.0105, CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES,
CLASS A’.
6. Click the OK button. SiteManager displays the Items window.
Now, let’s answer a few questions.
7. What is the unit price and bid quantity of this item?
_________________________________________
8. Are there any pending change orders for this item?
_________________________________________
9. To close the Items window, on the toolbar, click the Close
button. SiteManager displays the Contract Records panel.
You’ve accessed the Items window.
ANSWERS
6. $2065 AND 2
7. NO
40 Viewing Basic Contract Information
Viewing Contract Funding Sources
To view specified funding for the entire contract, and for the contract’s
projects, categories, and line items, use the Contract Funding window.
Figure 11. Contract Funding Window
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 41
Field Name Description
Key Information
Contract ID Agency-defined code for the contract.
List of Funding Sources
Contract ID Agency-defined code for the contract.
Project Number Agency-defined code for the project.
Category Number Grouping of items assigned during pre-construction. Items can be grouped within categories for various reasons, primarily for funding.
Line Item Number Line Item Number (for the contract). Identifies each item as it appears on the contract. All bid line item numbers are assigned by the pre-construction function. All line item numbers added to the contract after construction begins are assigned by the user.
Funding Source Code
Identifies a particular source of funding. Required. Read-only after save.
Funding Source Description
Description of the funding source. Usage:
▪ Line: (3) ▪ Action: A (add) or C (change) (1) ▪ Dept: (2) ▪ Cost Center Unit: (6) ▪ Variable: (2) ▪ Year: (2) ▪ Object: (5) ▪ 9-digit PIN: (9)
Data separated with dashes (for example, ‘001-A-17-220008-A1-06-71210-112524321’).
Priority Order Indicates order funds are appropriated to the contract. Valid range is between 1 and 9.
Source Participation Percent
Percentage of the total amount in the project/category provided by the funding source. Required. Valid percentage is between 1 and 100.
Selected Funding Source Detail
Project Number Agency-defined code for the project.
Funding Source Code
Identifies a particular source of funding. Required. Read-only after save.
Funding Source Description
Description of the funding source.
Category Number Grouping of items assigned during pre-construction. Items can be grouped within categories for various reasons, primarily for funding.
Source Participation Percent
Percentage of the total amount in the project/category provided by the funding source. Required. Valid percentage is between 1 and 100.
42 Viewing Basic Contract Information
Field Name Description
Priority Order Indicates order funds are appropriated to the contract. Valid range is between 1 and 9.
Local Agreement Nbr
Local Agreement Number. Identifies an agreement between a local authority and the agency. Agreement defines the funding provided by the local authority with regard to a particular job.
TC Codes provided to OSC when there's a Local Share or a Utility that's paying for a share. Usage: Customized label.
Combine Required. Defaults to none to indicate items are not combined. To indicate items combined for funding purposes by related item code, select Like Item Code. To indicates items combined for funding purposes by proposal line number, select Proposal Num.
Send to OSC Indicates that funding record is ready to send to OSC via the financial interface. Usage: Custom generic field.
Change Order # Indicates change order number created for the funding amount change (could include a new funding record, if it is for a new category and funding record). Usage: Custom generic field.
Funding CO Amt Usage: Works with ‘Send to OSC’ and ‘CO Number’ fields to indicate amount of the funding change (for a change order change which can be defined as a new funding record due to a new item on the contract or one that has increase or decreased funding). Once the change order has been approved, SiteManager adjusts the current cap amount by the funding CO amount. Usage: Renamed field from ‘Fed/State Project Nbr’.
Subledger Codes provided to OSC when there's a Local Share or a Utility that's paying for a share. Usage: Customized label.
Related Item Use codes to group items (for example, all traffic control items) for reporting and funding purposes. To group line items, which are not in the same category, but funded from the same source and at the same percentage, create a related item code. Then, during the funding process, select items with this related item code. Fund line items that share a related item code. To do this:
1. Create a related item code in the system code tables.
2. On the Items window, associate line items with the related item code.
3. On the Contract Funding window, select a funding source for the related items.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 43
Field Name Description
State Funding Code
Agency-defined. Required by financial system.
Proposal Line Nbr Proposal Line Number. Identifies item as it appears on proposal. Required (when Proposal Num option selected).
Original Cap Amt Original Cap Amount. Original funding limit.
Prev Estimates Amt Used
Previous Estimates Amount Used. Auto-calculated.
Current Cap Amt Current Cap Amount. Current funding limit.
Current Estimate Amt Used
Current Estimate Amount Used. Amount used in current estimate. Auto-calculated.
Table 12. Contract Funding Window – Fields
Exercise 12
In this exercise, learn to view the contract funding.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073
1. On the Contract Records panel, double-click the Contract
Funding icon. SiteManager displays the Contract Funding
window.
2. How many funding sources for Category 0001? ______
3. How do the funding sources differ? _____________________
4. To close the Contract Funding window, on the toolbar, click
the Close button. SiteManager displays the Contract Records
panel.
You’ve accessed the Contracts Funding window.
ANSWERS
4. TWO
5. BY CATEGORY AND
SOURCE PARTICIPATION
PERCENT / FUNDING
SOURCE CODE
44 Viewing Basic Contract Information
Understanding Funding Sources
Remember the following key points about funding:
▪ You must fully fund all active contracts.
▪ If you fund any part of the contract with multiple sources,
the combined funding must equal 100%.
▪ If you assign more than one priority level, the combined
funding for each priority level must equal 100%.
Understanding Cap Amounts
Each funding source may have an assigned cap amount.
Remember the following key points about cap amounts:
▪ When the highest priority funding source reaches its cap
amount, the funding source with the next highest priority
continues the funding.
▪ If the lowest priority funding source has a cap amount,
SiteManager ignores the cap amount until you add a lower
priority funding source.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 45
Viewing Contract Authority
To view office-level assignments and group assignments for each
individual user, use the Contract Authority window.
When the Project Manager and the Project Engineer were added to the
contract, SiteManager automatically added a row for each user’s group
assignment to the Contract Authority window.
Figure 12. Contract Authority Window
46 Viewing Basic Contract Information
Field Name Description
User Identification Pane
User ID ID of the user. Agency-defined.
User Name Name of the user.
DOT Central office assignment. Assigned by Main Office DOT. Usage: Customized label from Gen (General).
Zn Zone. Assigned by Main Office DOT. Usage: Customized label from Div (Division).
Reg Region. Assigned by Main Office DOT. Usage: Customized label from Dis (District).
Unt Unit. Assigned by Main Office DOT. Usage: Customized label from Are (Area).
Active Indicates whether the user is active.
Contract Authority Assignment Pane
Group Description
Selected user’s active group assignments. Required.
Office-wide Access
Indicates whether the user has been assigned group access rights to all contracts within the user’s assigned office. Inquiry-only if the user already has current, non-end-dated, office-wide contract authority for the specified group. If selected, the Contract ID field will be cleared and made inquiry-only.
Contract ID Required if Office-wide Access check box is not selected. Identifies the contract to which the user is assigned group access rights. Searchable, but limited to contracts on which the user is not currently assigned authority.
Contract Description
Description of the contract to which the user is assigned group access rights. Inquiry-only.
Authority Start Date
Date contract authority begins for the selected user. Defaults to the current date when saved. Populated only for contract-specific authority; not used for office-wide contract authority.
Authority End Dt
Authority End Date. Date contract authority ends for the selected user’s group. Defaults to the current date. Populated only for contract-specific rows; not used for office-wide contract authority.
Table 13. Contract Authority Window – Fields
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 47
Exercise 13
In this exercise, learn to view the contract authority granted to
users.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073
1. On the Contract Records panel, double-click the Contract
Authority icon. SiteManager displays the Contract Authority
window.
2. In the User Identification pane, to sort the column, click the
User ID column heading.
3. In the User ID column, select regxx01
4. If Ron Guidry logs on as an Assistant PM, may he view a
contract assigned to Region 2? ________________________
Now, let’s view another user’s contract authority.
5. In the User Identification pane, in the User ID column, select
dward.
6. Does Dave Ward have contract authority to a contract in zone
D, Region 01, Unit G? ________________________________
7. Why does or did Dave Ward need specific contract authority
for D263073 or D261177? _______________
8. To close the Contract Authority window, on the toolbar, click
the Close button. SiteManager displays the Contract Records
panel.
You’ve accessed the Contract Authority window.
ANSWERS
4. YES. WHEN ASSIGNED
TO CENTRAL DOT, SHOULD BE ABLE TO SEE
ALL CONTRACTS.
6. NO. BELONGS TO
REGION 2.
7. THE CONTRACTS ARE
OUTSIDE OF REGION 2.
48 Viewing Basic Contract Information
Summary
To access the Contract Records panel:
1. On the Main Panel panel, double-click the Contract
Administration icon.
2. On the Contract Administration panel, double-click the
Contract Records icon.
To access the Contracts window:
1. On the Contract Records panel, double-click the Contract
icon.
To view basic contract information:
1. Open the Contracts window.
2. Click the tabs.
To access the Projects window:
1. On the Contracts Records panel, double-click the Projects
icon. SiteManager displays the Select Contract Project
window.
2. In the Project Nbr area, in the PIN column, double-click the
desired project.
To view basic project information:
1. Open the Projects window.
2. Click the tabs.
To view the categories for a contract:
1. On the Contracts Records panel, double-click the Categories
icon.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 49
To view the contract items:
1. On the Contract Records panel, double-click the Items icon.
SiteManager displays the Select Items window.
2. In the Project area, in the PIN column, double-click the
desired project.
3. In the Contract Item area, to sort the column and activate the
Find feature, click the Item Code column heading.
4. In the Find field, type the desired item code.
5. Click the OK button.
To view the contract funding:
1. On the Contract Records panel, double-click the Contract
Funding icon. SiteManager displays the Contract Funding
window.
To view the contract authority granted to users:
1. On the Contract Records panel, double-click the Contract
Authority icon.
2. In the User Identification pane, to sort the column, click the
User ID column heading.
3. In the User ID column, select the desired user ID.
50 Viewing Basic Contract Information
Review Exercise
In this exercise, demonstrate how to view basic contract
information.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D261177
1. Open D261177 in the Contracts window.
2. What is the bid amount of contract D261177? __________
3. Who is the prime contractor on D261177? _____________
4. What is the project county on D261177? _____________
5. What is the category number for item code 606.10, BOX
BEAM GUIDE RAILING?
__________________________________
6. In which window can you find the type of funding assigned
to category number 0001? _____________________
7. Explain the difference between office-wide contract
authority and specific contract authority. _______________
________________________________________________
________________________________________________
________________________________________________
8. Exit SiteManager.
ANSWERS
2. $4,876,543.21
3. HARRISON &
BURROWES
4. ORANGE
5. 0001
6. CONTRACT FUNDING
WINDOW
7. OFFICE-WIDE
PROVIDES ACCESS TO
ANY CONTRACT IN THE
ASSIGNED OFFICE
LEVEL. SPECIFIC
CONTRACT AUTHORITY
PROVIDES ACCESS TO A
SPECIFIC CONTRACT
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 1
Viewing Subcontracts
In this chapter, you will receive instruction about the following:
▪ Viewing Subcontracts 2
▪ Viewing Subcontract Items 7
▪ Summary 11
▪ Review Exercise 12
2 Viewing Subcontracts
Viewing Subcontracts
To view subcontracts and subcontract data, including calculated DBE
commitment amounts, use the Subcontracts window.
Usage: EBO tracks subcontracts and items. Use the EBO interface to
populate subcontractors and pass to SiteManager. SiteManager displays
subcontract information in an inquiry-only format.
Figure 1. Subcontracts Window - Description Panel
NOTE
ONCE A
SUBCONTRACTOR IS
APPROVED, THE
APPROVAL DATE IS
RECORDED. IF THE
APPROVAL DATE FIELD IS
BLANK, THE SUB IS NOT
APPROVED AND WILL
NOT BE AVAILABLE TO BE
SELECTED ON THE DAILY
WORK REPORTS
WINDOW.
NOTE
DOLLAR VALUES FOR
SUBCONTRACTS WILL BE
TRACKED IN THE EBO
SYSTEM, NOT IN
SITEMANAGER.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 3
Field Name Description
Contract ID Agency-defined. ID for the contract.
SubCont Nbr Subcontract Number. User-defined number associated with each subcontract. Required.
Parent Subcont Nbr Parent Subcontract Number. Number for the parent subcontract.
Subcontractor Short name for the subcontractor. Required.
Subcont Type Subcontractor Type. Agency-defined. Required.
Work Type Code of work class. Agency-defined. Required.
Approval Date Date the approval was given for this subcontract. Equals or follows the contract award date. Required to display the subcontractor name in the Contractor dropdown list on the Contractors and Record Work Items panels on the Daily Work Reports window.
Effective Date Same as Approval Date
Expiration Date Date Sub-Contractor is no longer on the Contract. One entered Sub-Contractor will not appear on DWR dropdown list
DBE Type Code for the subcontractor’s DBE type. Agency-defined.
Cert Type Certification Type. System-defined code to indicate certification as a DBE by the State or Federal government, or both. Protected.
Supp/Hauler Ind Supplier/Hauler Indicator. Indicates subcontractor is a supplier or hauler only. If selected, the subcontract cannot have items and has a manually-entered Total Subcontract Amount.
Pct Twrds DBE Goal Percent Towards DBE Goal. Percentage of the subcontract amount counted towards the DBE commitment goal. For nested subcontracts, if any higher-level DBE subcontract has counted the item towards the DBE goal, defaults to 0%. For non-nested DBE subcontracts with no line items (that is, a supplier or hauler), defaults to 100%. For other non-nested DBE subcontracts, defaults to 100%.
Fed Supp/Haul Fund Pct
Federal Supplier/Hauler Funding Percentage. Percentage of the subcontract DBE commitment goal covered by Federal funding for a DBE supplier or hauler. When contract funding is Federal, defaults to 100%. When contract funding is State, defaults to 0%. When contract funding is Both State and Federal, user-entered.
Last Verified Payment Amt
Last Verified Payment Amount. Last verified amount paid to the subcontractor. Positive or negative.
Total Verified Payment Amt
Total Verified Payment Amount. Total verified amount paid to the subcontractor. Must be positive.
4 Viewing Subcontracts
Field Name Description
This Subcontract Information
This Subcontract: Amounts
Quantity multiplied by subcontract line item unit price for all subcontract items.
This SubContract: Pct of Total Sub’d
This Subcontract: Percentage of Total Subcontracted. Percentage of the total subcontracted amounts that are covered by this subcontractor.
This SubContract: Pct of Total Contract
This Subcontract: Percentage of Total Contract. Percentage of the contract’s current amount covered by this subcontract’s total amount.
This Original Commitment Information
This Original Commitment: Amounts
Original amount that the prime contractor commits to subcontract to the DBE. Must be positive.
This Original Commitment: Pct of Total Sub’d
This Original Commitment: Percentage of Total Subcontracted. Percentage of the sum of the subcontract original commitment amounts covered by this subcontract.
This Original Commitment: Pct of Total Contract
This Original Commitment: Percentage of Total Contract. Percentage of the contract’s current amount covered by this subcontract’s original commitment amount.
This Current Commitment Information
This Current Commitment: Amounts
For Subcontracts where DBE Type is indicated, calculated by multiplying the subcontract amount by the percent towards DBE goal.
This Current Commitment: Pct of Total Sub’d
This Current Commitment: Percentage of Total Subcontracted. Percentage of the sum of the subcontract current commitment amounts covered by this subcontract current commitment amount.
This Current Commitment: Pct of Total Contract
This Current Commitment: Percentage of Total Contract. Percentage of the contract’s current amount covered by this subcontract’s current commitment amount.
Total Original Commitment Information
Total Original Commitment: Amounts
Sum of the original commitment amounts for all the DBE subcontracts for a contract.
Total Original Commitment: Pct of Total Contract
Total Original Commitment: Percentage of Total Contract. Percentage of the contract’s current amount covered by the total original commitment amount.
Total Current Commitment Information
Total Current Commitment: Amounts
Sum of current commitment amounts for all the DBE subcontracts for a contract.
Total Current Commitment: Pct of Total Contract
Total Current Commitment: Percentage of Total Contract. Percentage of the contract’s current amount covered by the total current commitment amount.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 5
Field Name Description
Total Allowable Maximum (non-specialty) Information
Total Allowable Max (non-spclty): Amounts
Total Allowable Maximum (non-specialty): Amounts. Maximum allowed amount (excluding specialty items) for all subcontracts in a contract. Maximum allowed subcontract percent (in the System Operational Parameter table) multiplied by the difference of the total contract amount minus the specialty items amount.
Total Allowable Max (non-spclty): Pct of Total Contract
Total Allowable Maximum (non-specialty): Percent of Total Contract. Percentage of the contract’s current amount covered by the total allowable maximum (non-specialty) amount.
Total Towards Maximum (non-specialty) Information
Total Towards Max (non-spclty): Amounts
Total Towards Maximum (non-specialty): Amounts. Current amount of all subcontracts that contribute towards the maximum allowable amount (non-specialty). Sum of all of the non-line item subcontract amounts plus all of the non-specialty subcontract line item amounts.
Total Towards Max (non-spclty): Pct of Total Contract
Total Towards Maximum (non-specialty): Percent of Total Contract. Percentage of the contract’s current amount covered by the total towards maximum (non-specialty) amount.
Total Specialty Subcontracted Information
Total Spclty Subcontracted: Amounts
Total Specialty Subcontracted: Amounts. Sum of all specialty item amounts for all of the subcontracts in the contract.
Total Spclty Subcontracted: Pct of Total Contract
Total Specialty Subcontracted: Percent of Total Contract. Percentage of the contract’s current amount covered by the total specialty subcontracted amount.
Total Subcontracted Information
Total Subcontracted: Amounts
Sum of all parent subcontract amounts for the contract.
Total Subcontracted: Pct of Total Contract
Total Subcontracted: Percent of Total Contract. Percentage of the contract’s current amount covered by the sum of all the parent subcontract amounts.
Table 1. Subcontracts Window - Description Panel – Fields
Note: Information only NYSDOT does not use fields in table starting with “This Subcontract Information” See EBO for actual correct values.
6 Viewing Subcontracts
Exercise 1
In this exercise, learn to view a subcontract.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: NA
1. Start and log on to SiteManager.
2. On the Main Panel panel, double-click the Contract
Administration icon.
3. On the Contract Administration panel, double-click the
Contractor Management icon.
4. On the Contractor Management panel, double-click the
Subcontracts icon. SiteManager displays the Select
Contract ID window.
5. In the Contract ID area, double-click D263073.
SiteManager displays the Subcontract area.
6. In the Subcontractor column, double-click DONNELLY
CONSTRUCTION INC. SiteManager displays the
Subcontracts window.
Now, let’s answer a few questions.
7. When was this subcontractor approved? ____________
8. If this subcontractor was not approved, would an inspector
be able use a DWR to record the work the subcontractor
did? ____________
You’ve accessed a subcontract.
ANSWERS
7. 05/21/16
8. NO, THE SUB
WOULDN’T BE AVAILABLE
TO SELECT.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 7
Understanding DBE Commitment Amounts
The percentage of the subcontract that counts toward the contract’s DBE
goal depends on the subcontract’s level, the subcontractor’s DBE status,
and whether or not the subcontract includes items.
Consider the following scenarios:
▪ A parent subcontract with a DBE subcontractor and items
always counts 100% toward the contract’s DBE goal.
▪ If the subcontract has no items (that is, the subcontractor is
a supplier/hauler), the user enters the percentage counted
towards the DBE goal.
▪ For nested subcontracts, if a higher-level DBE subcontract
counts 100% toward the DBE goal, the percentage of the
nested subcontract is always zero.
Viewing Subcontract Items
To view subcontract items, use the Subcontracts window’s Items panel.
Note: If the subcontractor is a hauler or supplier only, the subcontract will
not have items.
Figure 2. Subcontracts Window - Items Panel
8 Viewing Subcontracts
Field Name Description
Key Information
Contract ID ID for the contract. Agency-defined.
Subcontract Nbr Subcontract Number. ID for each subcontract. User-entered.
Available Items
Project Number ID for the project. Agency-defined.
Line Item Contract line item for the subcontractor to work.
Item Code ID for a particular item. Agency-defined.
Units Type Unit of measure for the subcontract line item.
Specialty Indicates that the line item is a specialty item. Specialty items are excluded from the calculation to determine the maximum amount of the contract that can be subcontracted.
Short Description Description of the line item.
Line Item Nbr Line Item Number. For a parent subcontract, the line item is selected from the Contract Item list. For lower-level subcontracts, the line item is selected from the Parent Subcontract Line Item dropdown list.
Supp Description 1 Supplemental Description 1. Description supplemental to the item’s description.
Supp Description 2 Supplemental Description 2. Secondary description supplemental to the item’s description.
Contract Bid Information
Contract Bid: Quantity Contract bid quantity of the contract line item.
Contract Bid: Unit Unit of the item identified on the invoice.
Contract Bid: Price $ Unit price of the item identified on the invoice.
Contract Bid: Amount $ Total amount of the bid Item available for subcontract. Equals the product of the contract bid unit price of the item multiplied by the contract bid quantity.
Current Contract Information
Current Contract: Quantity
Current quantity of the contract line item including any change orders. Equals the sum of bid quantity and the net change order quantity.
Current Contract: Unit Unit of the item identified on the invoice.
Current Contract: Price $ Unit price of the item identified on the invoice.
Current Contract: Amount $
Total amount of the current item available for subcontract. Equals the product of the contract bid unit price of the item multiplied by the current contract quantity.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 9
Field Name Description
Parent Subcontract Information
Parent Subcontract: Quantity
Quantity of the line item subcontracted to the parent subcontract. Empty on a parent subcontract.
Parent Subcontract: Unit Unit of the parent subcontract line item.
Parent Subcontract: Price $
Unit price of the item for parent subcontract. If this is a parent subcontract, it will be blank.
Parent Subcontract: Amount $
Total amount of the item available for lower-level subcontract. Parent subcontract item equals the product of the parent subcontract unit price of the item multiplied by the parent subcontract quantity.
This Subcontract Information
This Subcontract: Quantity
Quantity of the line item subcontracted to this subcontract. Must be positive and less than or equal to the parent subcontract quantity for a lower-level subcontract. For a parent subcontract, must be less than or equal to the current quantity minus all other parent subcontract quantities for this item.
This Subcontract: Unit Unit of this subcontract line item. Defaults to the unit on the contract bid item.
This Subcontract Price $ Unit price of the item for this subcontract.
This Subcontract Amount $
Total amount of the subcontract item. Subcontract item amount equals the product of subcontract unit price of this subcontract item multiplied by the subcontract quantity. If this amount exceeds the current contract amount (for level 1 subcontracts), or the parent subcontract amount (for lower-level subcontracts), a warning will be displayed.
Subcontract Amount Sum of quantity times unit price for all subcontract items, or the value entered directly if the subcontract has no line items (that is, a supplier or hauler).
Shared Information
Shared Level 1 Item Ind Shared Level 1 Item Indicator. Indicates whether this item is included on any other level 1 subcontract for this contract.
Table 2. Subcontracts Window - Items Panel - Fields
10 Viewing Subcontracts
Exercise 2
In this exercise, learn to view subcontract items.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073; 001 (subcontract)
1. On the Subcontracts window, click the Items tab.
SiteManager displays the Items panel.
2. Is the subcontractor approved to work on item code 304.15
____________.
You’ve viewed subcontract items.
ANSWERS
2. YES
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 11
Summary
To access the Subcontracts window:
1. On the Main Panel panel, double-click the Contract
Administration icon.
2. Double-click the Contractor Management icon.
3. Double-click the Subcontracts icon.
4. On the Select Contract ID window, in the Contract ID area,
double-click the desired contract.
5. In the Subcontract area, double-click the desired
subcontract.
To view subcontracts:
1. On the Subcontracts window, click the Description tab.
To view subcontract items:
1. On the Subcontracts window, click the Items tab.
12 Viewing Subcontracts
Review Exercise
In this exercise, learn to view subcontract items.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073; 001 (subcontract)
1. View subcontract 001 for contract D263073.
2. Is this subcontractor approved to work on item code 209.15
as part of this contract? _________
3. Exit SiteManager.
ANSWERS
2. NO
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 1
Reviewing and Accepting Samples in LIMS
In this chapter, you will receive instruction about the following:
▪ Understanding the Review Samples Workflow 2
▪ Reviewing Sample Records and Associated Test Results 5
▪ Authorizing, Accepting and Completing a Sample 10
▪ Summary 12
2 Reviewing and Accepting Samples in LIMS
Understanding the Review Samples Workflow
The sample reviewer accepts or rejects entries at the sample level after
selecting an acceptance method and completion status for the entire
sample.
Figure 1. LIMS - Review Samples Window
Field Name Description
Data View Area
Control Number Click to display sample tests by Control Number.
Sample ID Click to display sample tests by Sample ID.
Filter Criteria Area
Filter Criteria Select criteria from the dropdown lists and enter text in the field to limit the samples displayed on the window.
Apply Click to activate filter criteria entered by the user.
Reset Click to clear filter criteria.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 3
Field Name Description
Review Samples Area
Authorize Select to indicate that sample tests were reviewed and a final action is being taken.
Acceptance Method *
Choose method by which the sample is accepted (for example, Accept, Monitor or Reject).
Sample Status * Status of the sample reviewed (that is, Complete, Fail, or Void).
Sample ID Unique ID auto-generated by SiteManager. Format is composed of user ID, date and time.
Contract ID Unique ID to identify the contract.
Lab Ref Number Lab Reference Number. User created ID to identify the sample.
Test Method Identifies the test.
Test Description Description of the test to be performed.
Test Number Number assigned to each unique test on a sample. Defaults to 1. If a supervisor orders a retest, an identical test will be assigned to the sample with the next sequential test number.
Test Status * LIMS location of the test.
Send Test Back to Lab
Select to indicate that sample test is being referred back to the Lab Unit for additional testing.
Lab Unit Lab Unit where the test was performed.
Material Code Unique identifies material.
Sampler User ID of the user that took the sample.
Sample Type * Identifies type of sample taken (that is, purpose of the sample, Approved List Evaluation, and so on).
Producer Supplier Identifies supplier that supplied the material.
Completion Date The date the test was marked as complete in the Enter Test Results window.
Manufacturer * Manufacturer of the material.
Sample Date Date the sample was taken.
Control Number Sample ID preceded by ‘CN’ to identify a group of related samples.
Seal Number Number to identify the sample. Companion to sample ID. Auto-generated.
Table 1. LIMS - Review Samples Window (Upper Pane) – Fields
Note: When defining criteria for a filter, the asterisk ( * ) that follows
some of the field names denotes that the corresponding code must be used
rather than the name.
QRG
REVIEW SAMPLES / ACCEPTANCE METHOD / SAMPLE STATUS
4 Reviewing and Accepting Samples in LIMS
Exercise 1
In this exercise, learn how to access the Review Samples window.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass Connection: Server
Group Name: Assistant PM (ASSTPM)
Keys: NA
1. Start and log on to LIMS. The system displays the LIMS
application window with the Navigation Panel open by
default.
2. On the Navigation Panel window, double-click the Review
Samples icon. LIMS displays the Review Samples window.
You’ve accessed the Review Samples window.
NOTE
IF ACCESSING LIMS VIA
THE SITEMANAGER LIMS
DESKTOP ICON, THE
SYSTEM REQUIRES YOU
TO LOG ON.
IF ACCESSING VIA
SITEMANAGER, THE
SYSTEM DOES NOT
REQUIRE A SEPARATE
LOG ON.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 5
Reviewing Sample Records and Associated Test Results
To review samples, use the Review Samples window. In the upper pane,
each row represents individual tests assigned to a sample. The sample
appears here once all tests associated to the sample have been marked as
Complete in the Review Tests window.
To view the test results associated to a sample, click the View/Compare
Results button. Then, compare the same test method or different test
methods across one sample or multiple samples.
Exercise 2
In this exercise, learn how to view tests associated with a sample.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass Connection: Server
Group Name: Assistant PM (ASSTPM)
Keys: NA
1. In the first Filter Criteria dropdown list, select the Sample
Date (mm/dd/yy) choice.
2. In the second Filter Criteria dropdown list, select the
Equals choice.
3. In the Filter Criteria text box, type 05/03/10.
4. Click the Apply button. LIMS displays the
dedzenga1055105725 sample record.
5. How many tests are assigned to the dedzenga1055105725
sample record? ____
You’ve viewed tests associated with a sample.
ANSWERS
5. THREE.
6 Reviewing and Accepting Samples in LIMS
Viewing Test Results for Single Samples
To view test results for a single sample, select the desired test or tests and
click the View Compare Results button.
Figure 2. LIMS - Review Samples Window - View/Compare Results - Single Sample
Field Name Description
View/Compare Results Displays results of a single test or multiple tests for a single sample in a grid format.
Test Template Template ID code for the test performed on the sample; use only one test template at a time for comparison purposes on one or more samples.
Template Column Labels to describe the test template layout and data entry fields used by the lab technician to record the test results performed on the sample. The system changes the color of the text to red when the test results do not meet the minimum or maximum standards.
Min Minimum value accepted for the test template column’s test results defined in SiteManager. If there is no minimum value requirement, no value displays..
Max Maximum value accepted for the test template column’s test results defined in SiteManager. If there is no maximum value requirement, no value displays.
Sample ID / Test Number
Unique identifier/number of the test.
Table 2. LIMS - Review Samples Window (Lower Pane) - Fields
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 7
Exercise 3
In this exercise, learn how to view test results for a specific sample.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass Connection:
Server
Group Name: Assistant PM (ASSTPM)
Keys: dedzenga1055105725 (sample ID)
1. For the dedzenga1055105725 sample record, select the Air
Content test.
Now, let’s view the test results.
2. Click the View/Compare Results button. The system
displays the test results in the lower pane.
3. Is the test within specifications? ________________
Now, let’s select all tests on this sample.
4. On your keyboard, press and hold the Ctrl key.
5. In the Test Description column, click all tests.
6. Release the Ctrl key.
Now, let’s compare all test results on this sample.
7. Click the View/Compare Results button.
8. To enlarge the Test Results pane, click the Maximize
button.
9. Are the test results for the Slump test in spec? _________
10. To restore the original size of the Test Results pane, click
the Restore Down button.
Now, let’s clear the filter.
11. In the Filter Criteria area, click the Reset button.
You’ve viewed test results for a specific sample.
ANSWERS
3. YES.
9. YES.
TIP
TO SELECT A
NUMBER OF
RECORDS
DISPLAYED IN A
GROUP, PRESS AND
HOLD THE SHIFT KEY
WHEN YOU CLICK
THE FIRST AND LAST
RECORDS IN A
SEQUENCE.
8 Reviewing and Accepting Samples in LIMS
Viewing and Comparing Test Results for Multiple Samples
To view and compare test results for multiple samples using the same
template, select the desired test or tests and click the View Compare
Results button.
Figure 3. LIMS - Review Samples Window - View/Compare Results - Multiple Samples
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 9
Exercise 4
In this exercise, learn how to view the test results for samples that
use the same test template.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass Connection: Server
Group Name: Assistant PM (ASSTPM)
Keys: NA
1. In the first Filter Criteria dropdown list, select the Test
Description choice.
2. In the Filter Criteria text field, type Air.
3. Click the Apply button. SiteManager displays the samples
with associated Air Content tests.
Now, let’s select multiple sample records.
4. Select every row for all samples.
Tip! Use Shift+click to select multiple tests that are
grouped together in the list.
Now, let’s view and compare the test results.
5. Click the View/Compare Results button.
6. Are all test results in spec? _____
Now, let’s clear the filter.
7. In the Filter Criteria area, click the Reset button.
You’ve viewed the test results for samples that use the same test
template.
ANSWERS
6. NO.
10 Reviewing and Accepting Samples in LIMS
Authorizing, Accepting and Completing a Sample
To indicate that you reviewed a sample, select the Authorize check box.
Note: Before the system removes the sample from the Review Samples
queue, complete the Acceptance Method* dropdown list, the Sample
Status* dropdown list, and select the Authorize check box.
Figure 4. LIMS - Review Samples Window
Exercise 5
In this exercise, learn how to authorize a sample.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass Connection: Server
Group Name: Assistant PM (ASSTPM)
Keys: dbushika166N121523 (sample ID)
1. In the first Filter Criteria dropdown list, select the
Contract ID choice.
2. In the Filter Criteria text field, type D263073.
3. Click the Apply button. SiteManager displays the Samples
from Contract D263073.
4. For your sample record, in the Authorize column, select the
check box.
Now, let’s accept the results.
5. In the Acceptance Method* dropdown list, select the
ACPT-Accept choice.
KNOWN ISSUE
IF DROPDOWN LISTS DO
NOT APPEAR, REFRESH.
NOTE
THE ‘CONTAINS’ OPERATOR IS SELECTED
BY DEFAULT. DO NOT
USE ‘EQUALS’ IF ONLY
PROVIDING A PORTION
OF THE SAMPLE ID.
USAGE
THESE STEPS ARE
REQUIRED TO MOVE
FORWARD WITH
CERTIFICATION
DOCUMENTATION.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 11
Now, let’s indicate the completion status.
6. In the Sample Status* dropdown list, select the
COMP-Complete choice.
7. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
Now, let’s clear the filter.
8. In the Filter Criteria area, click the Reset button.
You’ve accepted test results, indicated completion status, and
notified the Materials group to start their process for cylinder
breaks.
Note: The process for cylinders must be completed in a timely
manner prior to breaking the cylinders.
You’ve authorized and completed a sample.
Understanding the Impact of Authorizing Samples
After the sample progresses from the Review Samples queue, the system
updates the Maintain Sample Information window’s fields. The choice you
select in the Acceptance Method* dropdown list on the Review Samples
window displays in the Acceptance Method field in SiteManager’s
Maintain Sample Information window. The system also populates the
Auth By field with the reviewer’s user ID, populates the Auth Date with
the current system date, and changes the sample status from Pending
Authorization to Complete.
QRG
CYLINDERS AND REVIEW/ACCEPT
12 Reviewing and Accepting Samples in LIMS
Summary
To open the Review Samples window:
1. On the Navigation Panel window, double-click the Review
Samples icon.
To view samples by sample ID:
1. On the Review Samples window, in the Data View area,
click the Sample ID button.
To view test results:
1. On the Review Samples window, in the upper pane, select a
sample’s test row.
2. Click the View/Compare Results button.
To authorize a sample:
1. On the Review Samples window, in the upper pane, select a
test row.
2. In the Authorize column, select the checkbox.
3. In the Acceptance Method* dropdown list, select the
desired choice.
4. In the Sample Status* dropdown list, select the desired
choice.
5. Click the Save button.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 1
Creating Diaries and Authorizing DWRs
In this chapter, you will receive instruction about the following:
▪ Understanding Diaries 2
▪ Viewing Existing Diaries 4
▪ Creating Diaries 4
▪ Previewing Diaries and DWRs 7
▪ Authorizing DWRs 10
▪ Unauthorizing DWRs 16
▪ Summary 17
▪ Review Exercise 19
2 Creating Diaries and Authorizing DWRs
Understanding Diaries
Use the Diary window to create a new diary, preview DWRs, record
remarks, and to authorize or unauthorize the installed quantities all users
recorded on DWRs for a contract for that day. Once authorized, the
installed quantities determine the payment on an estimate.
Typically, for each contract, create one diary per day. In other words:
One diary, per contract, per day.
Figure 1. Diary Window
Panel Name Description
Authorize Authorize or unauthorize DWRs, and add remarks to the diary.
Charge Usage: Do not use this panel.
Table 1. Diary Window – Panels
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 3
Exercise 1
In this exercise, learn to log on and open the Diary window.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: NA
1. Start and log onto SiteManager as user regxx01.
2. On the Main Panel panel, double-click the Daily Work
Reports icon.
3. On the Daily Work Reports panel, double-click the Diary
icon. SiteManager displays the Diary window.
You’ve opened the Diary window.
4 Creating Diaries and Authorizing DWRs
Viewing Existing Diaries
To view a diary and all submitted DWRs for a date, on the Authorize
panel, select a contract and enter a date.
Creating Diaries
To create a new diary for a date on a contract for which you have not
already created a diary, use Choose Keys. SiteManager displays a list of
the DWRs sorted alphabetically by the name of DWR creator.
You may create a diary for the current day or a previous date; you cannot
create a diary for a future date. SiteManager restricts you from creating a
diary for a date for which you already created a diary. Create, authorize,
and unauthorize all diaries on the server.
Figure 2. Diary Window - Authorize Panel
USAGE
LOGIN ON THE DIARY IS 1
DWR PER PERSON PER
DAY PER CONTRACT.
IF A DWR IS NOT ON THE
SERVER, IT CANNOT BE
INCLUDED IN THE DIARY.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 5
Field Name Description
Key Information
Contract ID ID for the contract.
Diary Information
Diary Date Date of the diary
Last Modified User ID User ID of the last person to modify the diary.
Creator User ID User ID of the diary creator.
DWR Information
Inspector Name of the DWR creator.
Authorized Indicates if DWR is authorized for payment.
Authorized Date Date the DWR was authorized on a diary.
DWR Template Indicates if a DWR template is used.
Remarks
Remark Types (no label)
SiteManager displays a check mark next to the remark type to indicate that a remark exists.
Remarks No size limit.
Spell Check Click to check spelling of the visible remark text.
Table 2. Diary Window - Authorize Panel - Fields
6 Creating Diaries and Authorizing DWRs
Exercise 2
In this exercise, learn to choose keys to create a new diary.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: NA
On the Services menu, select the Choose Keys choice. SiteManager
displays the Contract ID window.
4. In the Contract ID area, scroll to and double-click
D261177. SiteManager displays a new diary for that
contract with today’s date.
Now, let’s change the date.
3.5.In the Diary Date field, type 050410.
6. On your keyboard, press the Tab key. SiteManager displays
the list of DWRs submitted for the selected date.
7. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
You’ve chosen keys to create a new diary.
NOTE
DOUBLE-CLICK TO OPEN
CALENDAR FOR DATE
FIELD. NOT USEFUL IN
TRAINING, BUT IS
USEFUL IN PRODUCTION.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 7
Previewing Diaries and DWRs
To preview a DWR, or view and print a summary of a DWR without
leaving the Diary window’s Authorize panel, click the Preview DWR
button. Use the choices available from the Services menu to view all
DWRs and their associated diary in one report.
Figure 3. Print Preview Window
8 Creating Diaries and Authorizing DWRs
Previewing DWRs from Assistant PM Group
The OE/RE created a DWR to list which DWRs have been reviewed and
approved for authorization on this diary.
Exercise 3
In this exercise, learn to preview the OE/RE’s DWR.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D261177; 05/04/2010 (diary)
1. In the Inspector column, select the RE, Michael Fuller.
2. On the toolbar, click the Preview DWR button.
SiteManager displays the Print Preview window.
3. Which DWRs did the OE/RE review and approve to be
authorized on this diary? __________________________
_______________________________________________
4. On the toolbar, click the Close button.
You’ve reviewed the OE/RE’s DWR and now know
which DWRs may be authorized.
ANSWERS
3. MICHAEL BETANZOS
AND DANIEL EDZENGA.
NOTE
THE LABEL FOR THE
INSPECTOR COLUMN
COULD BE MISLEADING
SINCE SITEMANAGER
LISTS DWRS FROM NON-INSPECTORS ALSO.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 9
Previewing DWRs from Inspector Group
The inspectors created DWRs subsequently reviewed by the RE who
granted approval to authorize on this diary.
Tip! Use the Services menu’s Preview Diary and All DWRs choice to
create a report that includes all DWRs included on the diary.
Exercise 4
In this exercise, learn to preview an inspector’s DWR listed as
reviewed by the RE in the last exercise.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D261177; 05/04/2010 (diary)
1. On the Services menu, select the Preview Diary and All
DWRs choice. SiteManager displays the Print Preview
window.
2. Review the report.
3. On the toolbar, click the Close button.
You’ve previewed all of the inspectors’ DWRs.
10 Creating Diaries and Authorizing DWRs
Authorizing DWRs
To mark a DWR as ready for use in the next estimate, thus authorizing
payment to the contractor for the installed work reported on the DWR,
select the Authorize check box. Upon authorizing a DWR, SiteManager
automatically records the current date in the Authorized Date field and
locks the DWR from being modified.
Note: You do not need to authorize all DWRs at once.
Figure 4. Diary Window – Authorize Panel (with Authorized DWR)
Choosing Not to Authorize
If you choose not to authorize a DWR, inform the DWR creator to make
any necessary changes.
Understanding the Impact of Authorized DWRs
Important! Once you use an authorized DWR in an approved estimate to
pay a contractor for the installed work reported on the DWR, nobody may
remove authorization or modify the DWR in any way.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 11
Note to Trainer: Use your last Inspectors class
information and Date instead of the names and date
used in the following Exercises
Exercise 5
In this exercise, learn to authorize DWRs.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D261177; 05/04/2010 (diary)
1. For Michael Betanzos’s DWR, select the Authorized
check box.
2. For Daniel Edzenga’s DWR, do not select the Authorized
check box since you discovered he did not record contractor
hours.
3. Will Daniel Edzenga’s DWR be included in the next
estimate if it’s not authorized? ___________
4. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
You’ve authorized one DWR and chosen not to authorize the others.
At this point, you should notify inspector Daniel Edzenga that
changes are necessary.
ANSWERS
3. NO.
12 Creating Diaries and Authorizing DWRs
Viewing Data Recorded in DWR Templates
To view data recorded in a DWR template, access the Daily Work Reports
window and open the appropriate DWR and work item that used the
template. Then, on the toolbar, click the DWR Template button.
Exercise 6
In this exercise, learn to view a DWR template.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D261177; (diary) “Inspector Class Date”
1. On the toolbar, click the SiteManager Panel button.
SiteManager displays the Daily Work Reports panel.
2. Double-click the Daily Work Reports icon. SiteManager
displays the Daily Work Reports window.
3. On the toolbar, click the Open button. SiteManager displays
a message to prompt you to save changes.
4. In the message, click the No button. SiteManager displays
the Contract ID window.
5. In the Inspector area, in the Inspector Name column,
double-click an Inspector Class Id.
6. In the Date area, in the DWR Date column, double-click
Inspector Class Date. SiteManager displays a message to
inform you that the DWR will open in a read-only format.
7. In the message, click the OK button. SiteManager displays
the Daily Work Reports window.
Now, let’s open the appropriate work item.
8. Click the Work Items tab. SiteManager displays the Work
Items panel.
9. In the Item Code column, double-click 207.20.
10. Note that SiteManager selected the Templt Used check box.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 13
11. On the toolbar, click the DWR Template button.
SiteManager displays the DWR Template window.
12. In the Description column, double-click Sum of Area
Calculations Based in Shapes (SqFt). SiteManager
displays the DWR Template – AreaSqFt01 window.
13. View the recorded values.
14. On the toolbar, click the Close button. SiteManager displays
the Daily Work Reports window’s Work Items panel.
15. On the toolbar, click the Close button. SiteManager displays
the Diary window.
You’ve opened a DWR, viewed a work item that used a DWR
template, and viewed the values recorded in the template.
14 Creating Diaries and Authorizing DWRs
Recording Diary Remarks
To record a diary remark, select the appropriate remark type on the Diary
window. The remarks pertain to the diary for the day.
Note: Use the Spell Check feature as needed.
Figure 5. Diary Window – Authorize Panel (with Diary Remarks)
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 15
Exercise 7
In this exercise, learn to record diary remarks.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D261177; (diary) “Inspector Class Date”
1. In the list of remark types, select 02 WZTC.
2. In the Remarks field, type A mobile lane closure was
performed for line striping – see DWR for detail.
3. In the list of remark types, select 03 General.
4. In the Remarks field, type Wage rate was performed –
see Corr file, wages found to be in conformance.
5. In the list of remark types, select 04 Contrctr Work Hrs.
6. In the Remarks field, type Contractor worked 0900-1700.
7. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
You’ve recorded different types of remarks on a diary.
16 Creating Diaries and Authorizing DWRs
Unauthorizing DWRs
Sometimes you may have to change a DWR after it was completed. To
remove authorization (and the authorized date) from a DWR not yet
included in an estimate, clear the Authorized checkbox.
Note: If the DWR to be changed is included in a pending estimate, you
may still unauthorize the DWR. However, you must first delete the
pending estimate before you can unauthorize the DWR on the diary.
Once unauthorized, SiteManager no longer locks the DWR from
modification and the DWR author may make the necessary changes.
Exercise 8
In this exercise, learn to unauthorize a DWR on another diary.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D261177; 05/04/2010 (diary)
1. On the toolbar, click the Open button.
2. In the Date area, double-click 05/04/10. SiteManager
displays the Diary window.
3. For Michael Betanzos’s DWR, to clear the check, click the
Authorized check box. SiteManager also clears the
Authorized Date field.
4. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
5. Now, if we generate an estimate that uses the 05/04/10
diary, how many DWRs from that day will be included? ___
You’ve removed authorization from a DWR.
ANSWERS
5. TWO
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 17
Summary
To open the Diary window:
1. On the Main Panel panel, double-click the Daily Work
Reports icon.
2. On the Daily Work Reports panel, double-click the Diary
icon.
To choose keys to create a new diary:
1. With the Diary window open, on the Services menu, select
the Choose Keys choice.
2. In the Contract ID area, scroll to and double-click the
desired contract.
3. In the Diary Date field, type the desired date.
4. Click the Save button.
To preview DWRs from the toolbar:
1. On the Diary window, in the Inspector column, select the
desired DWR.
2. Click the Preview DWR button.
3. To close the preview window, click the Close button.
To preview a diary and associated DWRs in one report:
1. With the Diary window open, on the Services menu, select
the Preview Diary and All DWRs choice.
2. To close the preview window, click the Close button.
18 Creating Diaries and Authorizing DWRs
To authorize a DWR:
1. On the Diary window, in the Inspector column, select the
desired DWR to be authorized.
2. Select the Authorized check box.
3. Click the Save button.
To unauthorize a DWR:
1. In the Inspector column, select the desired DWR to be
unauthorized.
2. Click the Authorized check box.
3. Click the Save button.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 19
Review Exercise
In this exercise, as the EIC, demonstrate how to create a new diary,
preview DWRs, authorize DWRs, and record diary remarks.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D261177
1. Create a diary for 05/06/10 for Contract D261177.
2. Preview the diary and all DWRs.
3. Did any DWRs use a DWR template? _____________
4. If so, open the template and review values entered on the
template.
5. What are the dimensions of the rectangular area?
____________________________________________
6. Add a remark that states contractor’s time and WZTC.
7. Exit SiteManager.
NOTE
THE EIC IS A MEMBER OF
THE PM GROUP.
ANSWERS
3. YES.
5. 10.5 FT X 6 FT.
NOTE
YOU MUST SAVE THE
DIARY FOR ALL
SERVICES MENU
OPTIONS TO APPEAR.
HINT
OPEN DWR WINDOW TO
VIEW TEMPLATE DATA
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 1
Generating and Approving Progress Estimates
In this chapter, you will receive instruction about the following:
▪ Processing Estimates 2
▪ Generating Estimates 4
▪ Viewing the Estimate Summary 8
▪ Handling Discrepancies 11
▪ Viewing the Estimate Item Paybook 17
▪ Adjusting Line Items 20
▪ Approving Estimates 27
▪ Tracking Estimates 30
▪ Rejecting Estimates 322
▪ Viewing the Estimate History Error! Bookmark not defined.5
▪ Summary 35
▪ Review Exercise 42
2 Generating and Approving Progress Estimates
Processing Estimates
To generate and approve estimates for a contract, use SiteManager
software’s Contractor Payments component.
Exercise 1
In this exercise, learn to access the Estimate panel.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Assistant PM (ASSTPM)
Keys: NA
1. Start and log on to SiteManager.
2. On the Main Panel panel, double-click the Contractor
Payments icon. SiteManager displays the Contractor
Payments panel.
3. Double-click the Estimate icon. SiteManager displays the
Estimate panel.
You’ve accessed the Estimate panel.
Understanding User Tasks
To process an estimate in SiteManager, perform the following tasks:
▪ Generate an estimate.
▪ Resolve estimate discrepancies.
▪ Review estimate information.
▪ Review estimate item details.
▪ Approve or reject estimates.
▪ Track estimate status.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 3
Understanding Automated Tasks
When generating an estimate, SiteManager performs the following tasks:
▪ Checks for a prior pending estimate for the same period
of time.
If a pending estimate does exist and you wish to regenerate
the estimate for that period, confirm that you wish to delete
that prior pending estimate and generate a new estimate.
▪ Identifies discrepancies such as sampling and testing
discrepancies (including insufficient material certifications)
on items.
▪ Calculates required line items adjustments for installed
units during the estimate period.
▪ New Stockpiled Materials - The invoice amount is paid
by a line item adjustment.
▪ Stockpiled Materials with reported install amounts -
SiteManager uses the conversion factor to create a line
item adjustment to adjust the payment amount.
▪ Overruns - SiteManager adjusts the item payment with
a line item adjustment.
▪ Insufficient Certifications / Sampling and Testing - If a
material does not meet sampling and testing
requirements for the installed amount, SiteManager
creates a material discrepancy payment adjustment.
▪ Determines funding amounts from different funding
sources.
▪ Determines quantities to pay for each line item that has
items installed for the estimate period.
Understanding Estimate Types
The first and all subsequent estimates leading up to the final estimate are
progress estimates. SiteManager selects Progress estimate by default.
The three types of estimates include the following:
▪ Progress
▪ Final
▪ Supplemental
NOTE
PENDING ESTIMATES
CAN BE REGENERATED
AND MODIFIED BECAUSE
THEY HAVE NOT BEEN
APPROVED.
4 Generating and Approving Progress Estimates
Generating Estimates
To generate an estimate, use the Generate Estimate window.
Important! Remember the following points about estimates in SiteManager:
▪ You can generate only one estimate for a period of time.
▪ To generate an estimate for a later time period, all
estimates for earlier time periods must first be
approved up through the Comptroller.
▪ To make a change on a diary or a DWR that has been
included on a pending estimate, but not an approved
estimate, you must first delete the pending estimate.
▪ If no diary or DWR changes are necessary, but you need to
generate the estimate again, just regenerate the estimate.
Note: When regenerating an estimate for the same period, SiteManager
prompts you to delete the previous estimate.
Usage: Generating estimates equate to running a CONR22.
Figure 1. Generate Estimate Window
NOTE
DIRECT STUDENTS TO
VIEW FIELD DEFINITIONS.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 5
Field Name Description
Key Information
Contract ID ID code for the contract. Agency-defined.
Estimate Number Information
Last Estimate Number Number of the last estimate generated.
Generate Estimate Number
Number of the estimate to be generated.
Date Information
Begin Estimate period begin date. Defines the beginning date for the estimate generation period. Note: For the first estimate, this is the Notice to Proceed Date.
End Estimate period end date. Defines the ending date for the estimate generation period. Cannot contain a date later than the current date or earlier than the Begin date.
Estimate Type Information
Progress First and all subsequent estimates leading to the final estimate. Default. Usage: Generated by Assistant PM (if an OE is on the project) and the PM (if there is no OE on the project).
Final Generated during contract finalization. Only one final estimate. Usage: Generated by Main Office.
Supplemental Generated after final estimate. Not available until final estimate has been generated. Used to record a supplemental payment amount for a contract adjustment. No supplemental estimates required, but may have many. Usage: If needed, generated by Main Office.
Calendar
Calendar Feature from which to select the End date.
Delay Generation Usage: Do not use.
Table 1. Generate Estimate Window – Fields
6 Generating and Approving Progress Estimates
Exercise 2
In this exercise, learn to generate a progress estimate.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Assistant PM (ASSTPM)
Keys: NA
1. On the Estimate panel, double-click the Generate Estimate
icon. SiteManager displays the Contracts window.
2. In the Contract area, double-click D261177. SiteManager
displays the Generate Estimate window.
Now, let’s enter the ending date of the generation period.
3. In the End field, type Today’s Date.
4. On the toolbar, click the Generate Estimate button.
SiteManager displays a message to inform you that another
estimate exists for the generation period and prompts you to
confirm deletion.
5. In the message, click the Yes button.
Now, let’s view the messages that will occur in production and
complete the necessary steps for training.
SiteManager first displays a message to inform you of the
submitted process.
Figure 2. Client Job Monitor Message (Production)
NOTE
IF THERE IS A PENDING
ESTIMATE AND YOU
REGENERATE AN
ESTIMATE WITH THE
SAME NUMBER, SITEMANAGER WILL
INFORM YOU THAT AN
ESTIMATE ALREADY
EXISTS FOR THAT
PERIOD AND CONFIRMS
DELETION.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 7
In the message, click the OK button. Then, SiteManager
displays a message to inform you that the process has
completed.
Figure 3. DPS Status Monitor Message (Production)
In the message, click the OK button. SiteManager changes the
Generate Estimate window to inquiry-only mode.
Now, let’s prepare for the next exercise.
6. On the toolbar, click the Close button. SiteManager displays
the Estimate panel.
You’ve generated a progress estimate.
Managing the Workflow with System-Generated Messages
As you move estimates through the estimate process, SiteManager
automatically generates messages and delivers them to one or more
appropriate users. These messages inform the recipient of necessary tasks.
Usage: Messages display in State DOT email system.
For example, during the approval cycle, SiteManager sends a message to
inform the next approver that the estimate is awaiting review.
8 Generating and Approving Progress Estimates
Viewing the Estimate Summary
To view calculated estimate summary information, use the Estimate
Summary window.
Figure 4. Estimate Summary Window
Note: Middle column, last row is what is paid to the Contractor. Zero dollar and negative Estimates are not to be sent to Comptroller.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 9
Field Name Description
Key Information
Contract ID ID code for the contract. Agency-defined.
Estimate Nbr Estimate Number. Sequential number for the estimate on a contract.
Column Labels
Previous Estimate(s) ($) Total amount paid for all previous estimates before current estimate period.
This Estimate ($) Total amount calculated for current estimate period.
Total ($) To Date Total amount paid for all previous estimates and calculated for the current estimate period.
Row Labels
Item Earnings Dollar amount of the work items installed and included in an estimate.
Participating Dollar amount federally funded for all the items included in an estimate.
Non-Participating Dollar amount not federally funded for all the items included in an estimate.
Retainage Usage: Do not use.
Stockpiled Materials Dollar amount of installed stockpiled materials.
Incentive Usage: Do not use.
Disincentive Usage: Do not use.
Liquidated Damage Usage: Do not use.
Other Adjustments Dollar amount of line item adjustments (other than overrun adjustments). Usage: Includes other charges to the contractor.
Overrun Adjustments Dollar amount of line item adjustments resulting from overruns.
Paid to Contractor Dollar amount paid to the contractor. Computation of item total, retainage, liquidated damages, stockpiled materials, overrun adjustments, and other adjustment totals.
Discrepancies Information
Deficient Payrolls Usage: Do not use. Tracked in EBO.
Civil Rights Rpt. Deficiency
Usage: Do not use. Tracked in EBO.
Item Indicates that item/material discrepancies exist for the current estimate.
Other Indicates contract completion date missed for the current estimate.
Subcontractors Information
Subcontractors Paid Indicates subcontractor performed work during the current estimate period.
Table 2. Estimate Summary Window – Fields
10 Generating and Approving Progress Estimates
Exercise 3
In this exercise, learn to view an estimate summary.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Assistant PM (ASSTPM)
Keys: D261177
1. On the Estimate panel, double-click the Estimate Summary
icon. SiteManager displays the Select Contract and Estimate
window.
Now, let’s view a different contract.
2. In the Selection area, click the Contract button. SiteManager
displays the Contract area.
3. In the Contract ID column, double-click D261177.
4. In the Estimate area, in the Estimate Number column,
double-click last Estimate. SiteManager displays the Estimate
Summary window.
You’ve viewed an estimate summary.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 11
Handling Discrepancies
To view all discrepancies associated with an estimate, use the Estimate
Discrepancies window.
The types of discrepancies include the following:
▪ Overrun quantities of an item
▪ Material sampling and testing requirements not met
▪ Contract completion date missed
Usage: All discrepancies must be resolved prior to approving an estimate.
SiteManager continues to display the discrepancies until you resolve them.
To remove resolved discrepancies from an estimate, in the Estimate
Discrepancy window, recalculate the discrepancies. Recalculating the
discrepancies does not affect overridden or unresolved discrepancies.
Figure 5. Estimate Discrepancies Window
USAGE
DO NOT PROCESS OR
APPROVE ESTIMATE
WITH UNRESOLVED
DISCREPANCIES.
USAGE
ONCE YOU HAVE
RESOLVED ALL
DISCREPANCIES, REGENERATE THE
ESTIMATE, THEN MAKE
APPROPRIATE MANUAL
LINE ITEM
ADJUSTMENTS. THIS IS
NECESSARY FOR
PROPER REPORTING.
12 Generating and Approving Progress Estimates
Field Name Description
Key Information
Contract ID ID code for the contract. Agency-defined.
Estimate Nbr Sequential number for the estimate on a contract.
Status Status of the estimate.
Discrepancy Information
Description Description of the discrepancy.
Status Status of the discrepancy. Unresolved or Override.
By User ID of the user overriding the discrepancy.
Resolve Date Date user overrode the discrepancy.
Resolve Time Time user overrode the discrepancy.
Table 3. Estimate Discrepancies Window – Fields
Exercise 4
In this exercise, learn to view discrepancies.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Assistant PM (ASSTPM)
Keys: D261177, Estimate 0012
1. On the toolbar, click open then pick Dnumber D261177 then
double click on Estimate 0012.
1.2.While on the Estimate Summary window, on the Services
menu, select the Discrepancy choice. SiteManager displays the
Estimate Discrepancies window.
2.3.In the Description column, select Minor Item 806212/0036
exceeds Overrun Limits.
3.4.On the toolbar, click the Remarks button. SiteManager
displays the Remarks (General Remarks) window.
4.5.What do the remarks indicate? ________________________
5.6.To close the Remarks (General Remarks) window, on the
toolbar, click the Remarks button again.
You’ve viewed the list of all discrepancies on an estimate.
ANSWERS
5. DISCREPANCY WAS
AUTOMATICALLY
ADDRESSED BY LINE
ITEM ADJUSTMENT.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 13
Viewing Discrepancy Details
When you click the Navigation button, SiteManager displays different
windows depending on the discrepancy type.
Figure 6. Estimate Item Detail Window
Field Name Description
Key Information
Contract ID ID code for the contract. Agency-defined.
Estimate Nbr Estimate Number. System-defined.
Estimate Items
Project Nbr Project Number. Identifies the project to which the item is associated.
Line Item Number Contract Line Item Number. Unique identifier for each item on the project.
Item Code Agency-defined code to identify a particular item.
Item Description Description of the item.
Qty Installed This Est Quantity Installed This Estimate. Total units installed for the item for the current open estimate. If no pending estimate, total units installed for the line item to date.
Amt Installed This Est Amount Installed This Estimate. Total dollar value installed for the item for the current open estimate. If no pending estimate, total dollar value installed for the line item to date. Dollar value equals item unit price multiplied by quantity installed to date.
Qty Reported to Date Quantity Reported to Date. Total number of installed units reported to date for the line item.
14 Generating and Approving Progress Estimates
Field Name Description
Qty Authorized To Date Quantity Authorized to Date. Total of all reported quantities on authorized DWRs.
Supplemental Description 1
Additional to the item’s description.
Supplemental Description 2
Additional to the item’s description.
Estimate Item Details
Bid: Quantity Bid quantity for the selected line item.
Bid: Amount Bid amount for the selected line item. Equals item unit price multiplied by bid quantity.
Current: Quantity Quantity equals the bid quantity plus the net change order quantity for the line item selected.
Current: Amount Current dollar value equals item unit price multiplied by current quantity.
Unit Price Unit price of the item.
Unit of Measure Unit of measure for the item.
Pending CO: Quantity Pending Change Order: Quantity. Net pending quantity for the line item selected from the unapproved change orders.
Pending CO: Amount Pending Change Order: Amount. Current dollar value equals item unit price multiplied by pending quantity.
Notified Qty: Quantity Notified Quantity: Quantity. Notification quantity threshold. If the installed quantity is equal or greater than notified quantity, then SiteManager notifies the project manager.
Notified Qty: Amount Notified Quantity: Amount. Dollar value equals item unit price multiplied by notified quantity.
Projected Qty: Quantity Projected Quantity: Quantity. Anticipated number of units installed at the completion of the contract. Equals current quantity plus pending quantity.
Projected Qty: Amount Projected Quantity: Amount. Dollar value for the notified quantity. Equals item unit price multiplied by projected quantity.
Installed to Date: Quantity
Total units installed for the line item to date. Includes the current estimate.
Installed to Date: Amount
Dollar value equals item unit price multiplied by installed to date quantity.
Installed This Est: Quantity
Installed This Estimate: Quantity. Total units installed for the line item for the current estimate. Note: Not applicable if viewing all contract items.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 15
Field Name Description
Installed This Est: Amount
Installed This Estimate: Amount. Dollar value equals item unit price multiplied by installed this estimate quantity. Note: Not applicable if viewing all contract items.
Paid Previously: Quantity
Total units paid for the line item on previous estimates. Note: Not applicable if viewing all contract items.
Paid Previously: Amount Dollar value equals item unit price multiplied by paid previously quantity. Note: Not applicable if viewing all contract items.
Pay This Est: Quantity Pay This Estimate: Quantity. Number of units installed for the line item on the current open estimate to be paid. Defaults to value of installed quantity during the current open estimate period. Note: Not applicable if viewing all contract items.
Pay This Est: Amount Pay This Estimate: Amount. Dollar value equals item unit price multiplied by pay this estimate quantity. Note: Not applicable if viewing all contract items.
Paid To Date: Quantity Total number of units paid to date for the line item.
Paid To Date: Amount Dollar value equals item unit price multiplied by pay to date quantity.
Table 4. Estimate Item Detail Window – Fields
16 Generating and Approving Progress Estimates
Exercise 5
In this exercise, learn to view discrepancy details.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Assistant PM (ASSTPM)
Keys: D261177, Estimate 0012
1. While on the Estimate Discrepancies window, on the toolbar,
click the Navigation button. SiteManager displays the Estimate
Item Detail window.
2. In the Line Item Number column, scroll to and select 0036.
3. Is the quantity in the Installed to Date field greater than the
quantity in the Current field? ________________
4. Note the Exceeds Allowed Overrun Ind check box selected
by the system.
5. To close the Estimate Item Detail window, on the toolbar, click
the Close button. SiteManager displays the Estimate
Discrepancies window.
Now, let’s prepare for the next exercise.
6. To close the Estimate Discrepancies window, on the toolbar,
click the Close button. SiteManager displays the Estimate
Summary window.
7. To close the Estimate Summary window, on the toolbar, click
the Close button. SiteManager displays the Estimate panel.
You’ve viewed the details about a discrepancy.
ANSWERS
3. YES. THIS CAUSED
THE DISCREPANCY TO
APPEAR.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 17
Viewing the Estimate Item Paybook
To view the payment history for an item, use the Estimate Item Paybook
window. SiteManager displays the item payment history in reverse
chronological order with current items at the top.
Figure 7. Estimate Item Paybook Window
NOTES
BE SURE TO SCROLL TO
SEE ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION AVAILABLE
FROM THIS WINDOW.
18 Generating and Approving Progress Estimates
Field Name Description
Key Information
Contract ID Agency-defined contract ID code.
Prj Nbr Project Number. Agency-defined.
Ln Itm Nbr Contract Line Item Number. Unique identifier for each item on the project.
Paid Estimate Item Information
Prj Nbr Project Number. Identifies the project to which the item is associated.
Cat Nbr Category Number. Used to group items for funding.
Ln Itm Nbr Contract Line Item Number. Unique identifier for each item on the project.
Item Code Agency-defined code to identify a particular item.
Item Description Description of the item.
Supplemental Description 1
Additional to the item’s description.
Supplemental Description 2
Additional to the item’s description.
Unit Price Unit price of the item.
Units Type Unit of measure for the item.
Bid Quantity Bid quantity for the item.
Current Quantity Total quantity for the item.
Paid Estimate Detail Information
Estimate Nbr Estimate Number. System-defined number to identify an estimate.
Period End Date End date of the estimate period.
Approver User ID User ID of the estimate approver.
Approval Date Date final approval was granted.
Total Amt Total Amount. Total amount of the item in the estimate.
Adjmnt (+) Adjustment (positive). Sum of positive adjustment amounts for the line item.
Adjmnt (-) Adjustment (negative). Sum of negative adjustment amounts for the line item.
Table 5. Estimate Item Paybook Window – Fields
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 19
Exercise 6
In this exercise, learn to view the payment history for an item.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Assistant PM (ASSTPM)
Keys: D261177, Estimate 0012
1. On the Estimate panel, double-click the Estimate Item
Paybook icon. SiteManager displays the Select Contract and
Line Item window.
2. In the Contract area, in the Contract ID column, double-click
D261177. SiteManager displays the Line Item area.
3. To sort the column and perform a quick find, click the Ln Itm
Nbr column heading.
4. In the Find field, type 0036. SiteManager selects the first row
that contains ‘0036.’
5. In the Ln Itm Nbr column, double-click 0036. SiteManager
displays the Estimate Item Paybook window.
6. What is the overrun adjustment for estimate 0012 for this item?
______
Now, let’s prepare for the next exercise.
7. To close the Estimate Item Paybook window, on the toolbar,
click the Close button. SiteManager displays the Estimate
panel.
8. On the SiteManager Panel window, click the Contractor
Payments tab.
9. On the Contractor Payments panel, double-click Contract
Adjustments icon.
You’ve viewed the payment history for an item.
ANSWERS
6. $ -7,800.00
20 Generating and Approving Progress Estimates
Adjusting Line Items
To adjust the estimate total or the final payable amount, use the Line Item
Adjustments window.
The types of line item adjustments include the following:
▪ User-defined
▪ System-generated
Figure 8. Line Item Adjustments Window (system-generated adjustment)
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 21
Field Name Description
Key Information
Contract ID Contract ID. Agency-defined contract ID code.
Estimate Nbr Estimate Number. System-defined.
Line Item Adjustments
Catg Nbr Category Number. Used to group items for funding.
Prj Nbr Project Number. Identifies the project to which the item is associated.
Item Code Agency-defined code to identify a particular item.
Line Item Number Contract Line Item Number. Unique identifier for each item on the project.
Description Description of the item.
Price Adj Type Type of price adjustment applicable for the line item.
Entered Date Date on which adjustment was entered or modified. Required.
Supplemental Description 1
Additional to the item’s description.
Supplemental Description 2
Additional to the item’s description.
Key Adjustment Information
Project Number Identifies the project to which the item is associated.
Line Item Number Contract Line Item Number. Unique identifier for each item on the project.
Line Item Adjmnt Detail Information
Type Type of line item adjustment. Required.
Entered By System or user ID of the person entering or modifying the line item adjustment.
Amount Dollar value of adjustment to line item.
Entered Date Date on which adjustment was entered or modified. Required.
Quantity Quantity of adjustment to line item.
Unit Price Unit price of the line item.
Stockpiled Information
Stockpiled Sn Stockpiled Sequence Number. Identifies number of stockpiles for the item. System-generated.
Replenish Sn Replenish Sequence Number. Identifies number of times a stockpile has been replenished for the item.
Table 6. Line Item Adjustments Window – Fields
22 Generating and Approving Progress Estimates
Viewing System-Generated Line Item Adjustments
You may only view system-generated line item adjustments. The types of
system-generated line item adjustments include the following:
▪ Overrun
▪ Material discrepancy
▪ Stockpile
Understanding Material Discrepancy Line Item Adjustments
If a material discrepancy exists, SiteManager creates a system-generated
line item adjustment to reduce the paid quantity, which withholds
payment, to match the number of samples that fulfill the sampling and
testing requirements.
If a previous system-generated line item adjustment existed for a material
discrepancy that reduced the paid quantity for an item, but sufficient
sample quantities now fulfill the sampling and testing requirements,
SiteManager creates a system-generated line item adjustment to release
the previously withheld payment.
Understanding Overrun Line Item Adjustments
During the estimate generation process, SiteManager creates a line item
adjustment for each item with an overrun discrepancy. The line item
adjustment deducts payment for the quantity exceeding the item’s current
quantity. SiteManager also generates a remark for each overrun line item
adjustment.
Understanding Stockpile Line Item Adjustments
If you create a stockpile, SiteManager creates a line item adjustment for
the initial stockpile payment. When stockpiled item has an installed
quantity for an estimate period, SiteManager creates a line item
adjustment to reduce the quantity of the stockpiled material.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 23
Exercise 7
In this exercise, learn to view line item adjustments.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Assistant PM (ASSTPM)
Keys: D261855, Estimate 0003
1. On the Contract Adjustments panel, double-click the Line
Item Adjustments icon. SiteManager displays the Line Item
Adjustments window.
Now, let’s view a line item adjustment to a stockpiled material.
2. In the upper pane, in the Line Item Number column, select
0050.
3. What is the quantity of the item installed on the DWR? ______
Now, let’s view a line item adjustment for a stockpile payment.
4. In the upper pane, in the Line Item Number column, select
0050. SiteManager displays line item adjustment details in the
lower pane.
5. What is the amount of the stockpile payment for this stockpile?
________________
Now, let’s view a line item adjustment for a materials discrepancy.
6. In the upper pane, in the Line Item Number column, select
0014. SiteManager displays line item adjustment details in the
lower pane.
7. According to the remark, for which DWR date does this
adjustment apply? _____________________________
You’ve viewed various types of system-generated line item
adjustments.
ANSWERS
3. 30.00
5. -$228.75
7. 02/20/2012
24 Generating and Approving Progress Estimates
Adding User-Defined Line Item Adjustments
You may add, modify and delete user-defined line item adjustments.
The types of user-defined line item adjustments include the following:
▪ Contract charges that are not related to a Item Spec.
number
▪ Rounding and getting exact values
Figure 9. Line Item Adjustments Window (user-defined adjustment)
Exercise 8
In this exercise, learn to add a user-defined line item adjustment.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Assistant PM (ASSTPM)
Keys: D261177, Estimate 0013
1. While on the Line Item Adjustments window, on the toolbar,
click the New button. SiteManager creates a new row in the
upper pane.
2. In the lower pane, in the Project Number dropdown list, select
806212.
QRG
TABLE OF LINE ITEM
ADJUSTMENT TYPES AND
WHEN TO USE.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 25
3. In the Line Item Number field, right-click and select the
Search choice. SiteManager displays the Search Window
window.
4. To sort the list, click the Item Code column heading.
5. In the Item Code column, scroll to and select 696.01 for
category number 0001.
6. Click the OK button. SiteManager populates the associated
LIN in the Line Item Number field.
Now, let’s define the type and amount of the adjustment.
7. In the Type dropdown list, select the Item Specific Charge
choice.
8. In the Amount field, type -200.25.
Now, let’s add a remark.
9. On the toolbar, click the Remarks button. SiteManager
displays the Remarks window.
10. In the Remarks (General Remarks) field, type WZTC
charge not exact.
11. To close the Remarks window, on the toolbar, click the
Remarks button again.
12. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
Now, let’s add an attachment.
13. On the toolbar, click the Attachments button. SiteManager
displays the Attachments window and extends the toolbar.
14. On the extended toolbar, click the New OLE button.
SiteManager displays the Insert Object window.
15. Click the Create From File tab.
Now, let’s locate the file to attach.
16. Click the Browse button. SiteManager displays a Browse
window.
17. To locate the file you wish to attach, browse to P:\Office of
Operations\Construction\SiteManager\Training\Attachments
NOTE
NOTE THE NEGATIVE
AMOUNT.
NOTE
IF YOU MUST
REGENERATE AN
ESTIMATE, MUST REDO
MANUAL LINE ITEM
ADJUSTMENTS.
26 Generating and Approving Progress Estimates
18. In the Files of type dropdown list, select the All Files (*.*)
choice (may be the default).
19. Select the 696.01_WZTC_Workup.pdf file.
20. On the Browse window, click the Open button.
21. On the Insert Object window, click the OK button.
SiteManager closes the Insert Object window and displays the
OLE Attachment window.
Now, let’s add a name and description, assign security groups, and
save the attachment.
22. In the Name field, type WZTC.
23. In the Description field, type WZTC Workup – 01/31/17.
24. In the Attachment Security area, click the Add All button.
SiteManager makes the attachment available to all security
groups.
25. Click the Add button. SiteManager displays the new
attachment in the Attachments window.
26. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
27. To close the Line Item Adjustments window, on the toolbar,
click the Close button. SiteManager displays the Contract
Adjustments panel.
You’ve added a user-defined line item adjustment.
QRG
GENERATING ESTIMATES
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 27
Approving Estimates
To provide first-level approval for progress estimates, use the Estimate
Approve window.
Usage: Approving estimates as a project manager equate to
transferring an estimate for payment.
The OE (Assistant PM) generates the estimate. If there is an RE
(Assistant PM), the RE must perform the first-level approval of the
estimate (required to certify payment), not the OE who generated the
estimate. If there is no RE, then the OE may perform the first-level
approval. Then, the EIC/PM approves the estimate (this date is the
MIR date).
Having both the RE and EIC approving the estimate replaces the
CONR 30b.
Figure 10. Estimate Approve Window
USAGE
CALL ATTENTION TO THIS
CHANGE IN CLASS.
28 Generating and Approving Progress Estimates
Field Name Description
Key Information
Contract ID ID for the contract.
Estimate Nbr Estimate Number. Sequential number for the estimate on a contract.
Estimate Generation Information
Generated By User ID of the person who generated the estimate.
On Date on which the estimate was generated.
On (2nd field) Time on which the estimate was generated.
Type Type of estimate.
Approval Levels
Approval Group Name (no label)
Name of selected approval group.
Approved (no label) Indicates approval of the estimate by approval group.
Approval Date (no label) Date approver gave estimate approval for approval group.
Approval Time (no label) Time approver gave estimate approval for approval group.
Approver ID (no label) User ID of person approving estimate for specified approval group.
Table 7. Estimate Approve Window – Fields
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 29
Exercise 9
In this exercise, learn to provide first-level approval for a progress
estimate.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Assistant PM (ASSTPM)
Keys: D261177, Estimate 0013
1. On the SiteManager Panel window, click the Contractor
Payments tab.
2. Double-click the Estimate icon. SiteManager displays the
Estimate panel,
3. Double-click the Estimate Approval icon. SiteManager
displays the Select Contract/Estimate window.
4. In the Contract area, double-click D261177. SiteManager
displays the Estimate Approve window.
Now, let’s give approval.
5. In the Approval Levels area, for the Assistant PM approval
level, select the Approved check box.
6. On the toolbar, click the Save button. SiteManager populates
the approval date, approval time and approver ID.
7. On the toolbar, click the Close button. SiteManager displays a
message to inform you notification was sent to the next
approval level.
8. In the message, click the OK button. SiteManager
automatically closes the Estimate Approve window and
displays the Estimate panel.
You’ve provided first-level approval for a progress estimate.
30 Generating and Approving Progress Estimates
Tracking Estimates
To track the generation and approval of estimates, use the Estimate
Tracking window.
Figure 11. Estimate Tracking Window
Field Name Description
Key Information
Contract ID ID for the contract.
Estimate Nbr Sequential number for the estimate on a contract.
Estimate Tracking Information
Action or Group Name (no label)
Generated or name of approval level.
Date Date the estimate was generated or approved by the approval level.
Time Time the estimate was generated or approved by the approval level.
User ID User ID of the estimate generator or approver.
Table 8. Estimate Tracking Window – Fields
USAGE
FUNDING REJECTS FOR:
- INSUFFICIENT
INSURANCE - NEGATIVE CATEGORY - MANUAL OVERRIDE
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 31
Exercise 10
In this exercise, learn to track an estimate.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D261177 0013 (estimate)
1. On the Estimate panel, double-click the Estimate Tracking
icon. SiteManager displays the Estimate Tracking window.
2. On what date did the Assistant PM approve the estimate?
____________
3. Which approval group is next in line for approving this
estimate? _____________
4. To close the Estimate Tracking window, on the toolbar, click
the Close button.
You’ve tracked an estimate.
ANSWERS
2. TODAY’S DATE.
3. PROJECT MANAGER.
32 Generating and Approving Progress Estimates
Rejecting Estimates
To reject estimates, use the Estimate Reject window.
Figure 12. Estimate Reject Window
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 33
Field Name Description
Key Information
Contract ID ID for the contract.
Estimate Nbr Estimate Number. Sequential number for the estimate on a contract.
Estimate Generation Information
Generated By User ID of the person who generated the estimate.
On Date on which the estimate was generated.
On (2nd field) Time on which the estimate was generated.
Type Type of estimate.
Approval Information Area
Approval Group Name (no label)
Name of selected approval group.
Approved (no label) Indicates approval of the estimate by approval group.
Approval Date (no label) Date approver gave estimate approval for approval group.
Approval Time (no label) Time approver gave estimate approval for approval group.
Approver ID (no label) User ID of person approving estimate for specified approval group.
Reason for Rejection Field to enter in reason for rejection.
Table 9. Estimate Reject Window – Fields
34 Generating and Approving Progress Estimates
Exercise 11
In this exercise, learn to reject an estimate.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D261177
1. Start and log on to SiteManager as regxx01, PM.
2. On the Main Panel panel, double-click the Contractor
Payments icon. SiteManager displays the Contractor
Payments panel.
3. Double-click the Estimate icon. SiteManager displays the
Estimate panel.
4. Double-click the Estimate Rejection icon. SiteManager
displays the Select Contract/Estimate window.
5. In the Contract area, double-click D261177. SiteManager
displays the Estimate Rejection window.
Now, let’s reject an estimate.
6. In the Reason for Rejection field, type Item XXX.xxx not
included; need to include on this estimate.
7. On the toolbar, click the Save button. SiteManager displays a
message to inform you that the selected approvers for this
estimate have been notified.
8. In the message, click the OK button.
9. To close the Estimate Rejection window, on the toolbar, click
the Close button. SiteManager displays the Estimate panel.
You’ve rejected an estimate.
KNOWN ISSUE
NOTIFICATION MESSAGE
LOOKS LIKE AN ERROR
MESSAGE.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 35
Viewing the Estimate History
To display all estimates for a contract or to delete pending and rejected
estimates, use the Estimate History window.
Tip! To jump directly to the Estimate Discrepancy window and the
Estimate Summary window, use the Services menu choices.
Figure 13. Estimate History Window
Field Name Description
Key Information
Contract ID Agency-defined contract ID code.
Description 1 Description of the contract.
Estimate History Information
Estimate Number System-defined number to identify an estimate.
Net Pay Net payment for the estimate.
Period End Date End date of the estimate period.
PM User ID User ID of the person who generated the estimate.
PM Appr Date Project Manager Approval Date. Date of the first-level approval.
Last Appr User ID Last Approver’s User ID. User ID of the last approver of the estimate.
Last Appr Date Last Approval Date. Date the last approval group granted approval of the estimate.
Est Status Estimate Status. Code for status of estimate.
Est Type Estimate Type. Code for type of estimate.
Table 10. Estimate History Window – Fields
NOTE
TO CORRECT A DWR
THAT IS INCLUDED ON A
PENDING ESTIMATE, YOU
MUST FIRST DELETE THE
PENDING ESTIMATE.
36 Generating and Approving Progress Estimates
Exercise 12
In this exercise, learn to view the history of estimates on a contract
and delete a pending estimate.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Assistant PM (ASSTPM)
Keys: D261177 0013 (estimate)
1. Start and log on to SiteManager as regxx01, ASSTPM
1.2.On the Estimate panel, double-click the Estimate History
icon. SiteManager displays the Estimate History window.
2.3.In the Estimate Number column, try to select 0001.
3.4.On the toolbar, try to click the Delete button.
4.5.Why is the Delete button not available? _______________
Now, let’s open a contract with a pending estimate.
5.6.On the toolbar, click the Open button. SiteManager displays
the Contracts window.
6.7.In the Contract ID column, double-click D261177.
SiteManager displays the Estimate History window.
7.8.In the Estimate Number column, select 0013.
8.9.On the toolbar, click the Delete button. SiteManager prompts
you to confirm deletion.
9.10. In the message, click the Yes button. SiteManager deletes
the selected pending estimate.
10.11. To close the Estimate History window, on the toolbar, click
the Close button. SiteManager displays the Estimate panel.
Now, let’s prepare for the next exercise.
12. On the File menu, select the Exit choice.
You’ve viewed the estimate history and deleted a pending estimate.
ANSWERS
4. THE ESTIMATE IS
APPROVED. YOU CAN
ONLY DELETE PENDING
AND REJECTED
ESTIMATES.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 37
Summary
To access the Estimate panel:
1. On the Main Panel panel, double-click the Contractor
Payments icon.
2. On the Contractor Payments panel, double-click the
Estimate icon.
To generate a progress estimate:
1. On the Estimate panel, double-click the Generate Estimate
icon.
2. On the Contracts window, in the Contract area, double-click
the desired contract.
3. In the Generate Estimate window, in the End field, type the
desired date.
4. On the toolbar, click the Generate Estimate button.
5. If another estimate exists for the period, follow the prompts to
confirm deletion.
To view an estimate summary:
1. On the Estimate panel, double-click the Estimate Summary
icon.
2. In the Select Contract and Estimate window, in the Selection
area, click the Contract button.
3. In the Contract area, in the Contract ID column, double-click
the desired contract.
4. In the Estimate area, in the Estimate Number column,
double-click the desired estimate.
To view discrepancies:
1. While on the Estimate Summary window, on the Services
menu, select the Discrepancy choice. SiteManager displays the
Estimate Discrepancies window.
38 Generating and Approving Progress Estimates
To view discrepancy details:
1. While on the Estimate Discrepancies window, select the
desired discrepancy.
2. On the toolbar, click the Navigation button. SiteManager
displays the Estimate Item Detail window.
3. In the upper pane, select the desired line item.
4. In the lower pane, view the details.
To override a discrepancy:
1. While on the Estimate Discrepancies window, select the
desired discrepancy.
2. In the Status dropdown list, select the Override choice.
SiteManager displays the Remarks window.
3. In the Remarks (General Remarks) field, type the desired
remark.
4. To close the Remarks window, on the toolbar, click the
Remarks button again.
5. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
To recalculate discrepancies:
1. On the Estimate Discrepancies window, on the Services menu,
click the Recalculate Discrepancies choice. SiteManager
displays a message to inform you that recalculating may take
several minutes.
2. In the message, click the Yes button. SiteManager displays a
message to inform you that the refresh is complete.
3. In the message, click the OK button. SiteManager removed the
resolved discrepancy from the list.
4. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 39
To view the payment history for an item:
1. On the Estimate panel, double-click the Estimate Item
Paybook icon.
2. In the Select Contract and Line Item window’s Contract area,
in the Contract ID column, double-click the desired contract.
3. In the Line Item area, double-click the desired line item.
SiteManager displays the Estimate Item Paybook window.
To view line item adjustments:
1. On the Contractor Payments panel, double-click Contract
Adjustments icon.
2. On the Contract Adjustments panel, double-click the Line
Item Adjustments icon.
3. In the Line Item Adjustments window’s upper pane, in the
Line Item Number column, select the desired line item.
SiteManager displays line item adjustment details in the lower
pane.
To add a user-defined line item adjustment:
1. While on the Line Item Adjustments window, on the toolbar,
click the New button.
2. In the lower pane, in the Project Number dropdown list, select
the desired project number.
3. In the Line Item Number field, search for and select the
desired line item number.
4. Click the OK button.
5. In the Line Item Adjustments window’s Type dropdown list,
select the desired choice.
6. In the Amount field, type the desired amount.
7. If necessary, add a remark.
8. Click the Save button.
40 Generating and Approving Progress Estimates
To approve an estimate:
1. On the Estimate panel, double-click the Estimate Approval
icon. SiteManager displays the Select Contract/Estimate
window.
2. In the Contract area, double-click the desired contract.
SiteManager displays the Estimate Approve window.
3. In the Approval Levels area, for the appropriate approval
level, select the Approved check box.
4. On the toolbar, click the Save button. SiteManager populates
the approval date, approval time and approver ID.
5. To close the Estimate Approve window, on the toolbar, click
the Close button. SiteManager displays a message to inform
you that the next approval group has been notified.
6. In the message, click the OK button.
To reject an estimate:
1. On the Estimate panel, double-click the Estimate Rejection
icon. SiteManager displays the Select Contract/Estimate
window.
2. In the Contract area, double-click the desired contract.
SiteManager displays the Estimate Rejection window.
3. In the Reason for Rejection area, type an appropriate remark.
4. On the toolbar, click the Save button. SiteManager displays a
message to inform you that the selected approvers for this
estimate have been notified.
5. In the message, click the OK button.
To track an estimate:
1. On the Estimate panel, double-click the Estimate Tracking
icon. SiteManager displays the Estimate Tracking window.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 41
To view the history of estimates on a contract and delete a pending
estimate:
1. On the Estimate panel, double-click the Estimate History
icon.
2. On the Estimate History window’s toolbar, click the Open
button.
3. In the Contracts window’s Contract ID column, double-click
the desired pending estimate.
4. In the Estimate History window’s Estimate Number column,
select the desired estimate.
5. Click the Delete button.
6. Click the Yes button.
42 Generating and Approving Progress Estimates
Review Exercise
In this exercise, demonstrate the estimate generation and approval
process.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073
2.1.Generate a progress estimate for contract D263073 with an end
date of Today’s Date.
2. Open the Estimate Discrepancies window for contract D263073.
3. What kind of discrepancy exists on this estimate? ________
5.4.Save.
6.5.Approve estimate 0001 on contract D263073.
7.6.In the Estimate Tracking window, what is the next approval group?
______________________
7. Exit SiteManager.
ANSWERS
3. NONE
7. MO ACCT PAY
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 1
Managing Stockpile Records
In this chapter, you will receive instruction about the following:
▪ Understanding Stockpiles 2
▪ Creating Stockpile Records 5
▪ Replenishing Stockpiles 7
▪ Closing Out Stockpile Balances 9
▪ Summary 10
▪ Review Exercise 12
2 Managing Stockpile Records
Understanding Stockpiles
To select materials or items for a stockpile on a contract and enter invoice
data for the materials, use the Stockpiled Materials window. During
estimate generation, SiteManager uses the data on the Stockpiled
Materials window to determine the amount to be paid for the items
installed.
Usage: Partial payments are SiteManager’s stockpiles.
Figure 1. Stockpiled Materials Window
NOTE
STOCKPILED MATERIALS
= PARTIAL PAYMENTS
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 3
Field Name Description
Contract Line Item Data
Contract ID Agency-defined ID for the contract.
Project Nbr Project Number. Agency-defined ID for the project.
Catg Nbr Category Number. Assigned to the line item.
Line Itm Nbr Contract Line Item Number that identifies each item as it appears on the contract.
Units Description of the unit of measurement for the line item.
Unit Price Price for a single unit of the line item, as indicated on the proposal or contract.
Bid Quantity Quantity of the line item, as indicated on the proposal or contract.
Item Description Short explanation of the item.
Supp Description 1 Supplemental Description 1. Additional explanation of the item.
Supp Description 2 Supplemental Description 2. Additional explanation of the item.
Stockpiled Material Data
Matl Code Material Code. Agency-defined ID for the material.
Stockpiled Desc Stockpiled Description. Description of the material (or item) being stockpiled.
Status Status of a stockpiled material. Either Open, Active, or Closed. SiteManager assigns new materials the Open status; materials included in an estimate, the Active status; when a balance is closed out, the Closed status. May modify Open and Active materials unless an estimate is pending. May delete only Open materials.
Invoice Date Date of the invoice.
Invoice Number Identifies the invoice received with the material. Required.
Quantity Number of units received. When modified, cannot be less than installed quantity to date. Required.
Units Description of the unit of measurement for the line item.
Unit Price Unit price of the line item, as indicated on the proposal or contract.
Conv Factor Conversion Factor. Derived from the contract line item information. Number of units of the material used in one unit of the line item. May modify the default value. When set to zero, SiteManager does not calculate line item adjustments during the estimate process.
Conv Unit Price Conversion Unit Price. Unit price of the material multiplied by the conversion factor. System-calculated.
Invoice Amount Material quantity multiplied by the unit price. System-calculated.
4 Managing Stockpile Records
Field Name Description
Initial Invoice Payment
Initial payment to be applied to the invoice upon generation of the first estimate for the stockpiled material. Cannot be more than the invoice amount. Usage: Pay up to 85% of bid amount for the item. Usage: Customized label. Used to read ‘Initial Invoice Payment.’
Matl Sn Material Sequence Number. Notes the number of materials stockpiled for a single item. System-generated.
Replenish Sn Replenish Sequence Number. Notes the number of times a stockpile was replenished. System-generated.
Remaining Quantity Quantity of the material that remains. Difference between quantity and installed quantity to date. System-calculated. May be zero if the Project is closed or the Contract is ended.
Installed Qty To Date
Installed Quantity to Date. Quantity of the material installed to date. Calculated by the estimate generation process. System-calculated.
Paid To Date Amount paid for the stockpiled material to date. Calculated by the estimate generation process. System-calculated.
Table 1. Stockpiled Materials Window - Fields
Determining the Quantity and Initial Invoice Payment
SiteManager calculates payments for stockpiled materials based on the
quantity of material used per contract item. SiteManager does not
automatically apply portions of the invoiced material quantity and
payment amount to different contract items. You decide how to allocate
the invoiced amounts for a stockpiled material.
Before determining the quantity and invoice payment amount, address the
following:
▪ Which items include the invoiced material?
▪ Which contracts include these items?
▪ How much of the total invoiced material to allocate to each
item?
▪ If an initial payment amount is due, which contracts or
contract items pay this amount?
From these numbers, calculate the values to enter in the Stockpiled
Materials window’s Quantity field and Invoice Payment field.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 5
Creating Stockpile Records
To create a stockpile record, use the Stockpiled Materials window.
Tip! To more easily identify the stockpile, include the item number and
item description in the Stockpiled Desc field.
Exercise 1
In this exercise, learn to create a stockpile record.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: NA
1. Start and log on to SiteManager as user regxx01.
2. On the Main Panel panel, double-click the Contract
Administration icon.
3. On the Contract Administration panel, double-click the
Contract Records icon.
4. On the Contract Records panel, double-click the
Stockpiled Materials icon. SiteManager displays the
Stockpiled Materials window.
Now, let’s choose keys.
5. On the Services menu, select the Choose Keys choice.
SiteManager displays the Stockpiled Material Select
window.
6. In the Contract ID area, double-click D263073.
7. In the Contract Projects area, double-click 904131.
SiteManager displays the Contract Items area.
8. To sort the column and perform a quick find, click the Item
Code column heading.
9. In the Find field, type 568.5. SiteManager selects the first
row that contains ‘568.5.’
6 Managing Stockpile Records
10. In the Item Code column, double-click 568.51 for category
number 0001. SiteManager displays the Stockpiled
Materials window.
Now, let’s record information about this stockpile.
11. In the Stockpiled Desc field, type 568.51 STEEL BRIDGE
RAILING.
Tip! Including both the item code and description makes the
stockpile record for the item easier to locate in SiteManager.
12. In the Invoice Date field, type yesterday’s date.
13. In the Invoice Number field, type 6106-1.
14. In the Quantity field, type 10.00.
15. In the Units dropdown list, select the LF choice.
16. In the Unit Price field, type 130.00.
17. In the Conv Factor field, type 1.0.
18. In the Invoice Payment field, type 1300.00.
19. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
You’ve created a stockpile record.
KNOWN ISSUE
IF YOU CLICK THE SAVE
BUTTON A SECOND TIME, YOU MAY INCORRECTLY
RECEIVE AN ERROR
MESSAGE STATING THAT
THE STOCKPILE AMOUNT
EXCEEDS THE 85%
THRESHOLD.
USAGE
ATTACH ALL REQUIRED
DOCUMENTATION TO
STOCKPILES. SEE
EXAMPLE.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 7
Replenishing Stockpiles
To add to an existing stockpile, or replenish it, use the Stockpiled
Materials window. Open the existing stockpile record, then, from the
Services menu, select the Replenish Stockpile choice.
Important! Doing so only blanks out the Quantity field, so be sure to
modify the other fields appropriately, particularly the Invoice Payment
field, which is the value that is paid on the next estimate.
Figure 2. Stockpiled Materials Window (after clicking Replenish Stockpile)
8 Managing Stockpile Records
Exercise 2
In this exercise, learn to replenish a stockpile.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073 904131 (project); 568.51 (item code)
1. On the toolbar, click the Open button. SiteManager displays
the Stockpiled Material Select window.
2. In the Stockpiled Materials area, in the Material
Description column, double-click Steel Bridge Railing for
invoice number 6106-1. SiteManager displays the
Stockpiled Materials window.
Now, let’s replenish the stockpile.
3. On the Services menu, select the Replenish Material
choice.
4. In the Stockpiled Desc field, prior to the existing
description, type 568.51.
5. In the Invoice Date field, type today’s date.
6. In the Invoice Number field, type 6106-2.
7. In the Quantity field, type 1.
8. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
9. Verify that the value in the Invoice Payment field matches
the value in the Invoice Amount field.
You’ve replenished a stockpile.
NOTE
TAKE NOTE OF CLOSED
STATUS, QUANTITY, AND
REPLENISH SN.
NOTE
TAKE NOTE OF
REMAINING QUANTITY, AND REPLENISH SN.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 9
Closing Out Stockpile Balances
To remove the remaining quantity and close an existing stockpile, use the
Stockpiled Materials window.
During the estimate process, SiteManager automatically closes out the
stockpile balance when the remaining quantity is zero.
Note: On the next estimate, SiteManager will deduct an amount equal to
the remaining quantity multiplied by the unit price of the material that
remained in the stockpile prior to closing it.
Exercise 3
In this exercise, learn to manually close out a stockpile balance.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073 904131 (project); 568.51 (item code)
1. On the toolbar, click the Open button. SiteManager displays
the Stockpiled Material Select window.
2. In the Stockpiled Materials area, in the Material
Description column, double-click 568.51 Steel Bridge
Railing for invoice number 6106-1. SiteManager displays
the Stockpiled Materials window.
3. On the Services menu, select the Close Out Balance
choice. SiteManager changes the window to inquiry-only
access, changes the status to Closed, and zeroes out the
Remaining Quantity field.
4. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
You’ve manually closed out a stockpile balance.
QRG
ITEM UNDERRUNS
10 Managing Stockpile Records
Summary
To open the Stockpiled Materials window:
1. On the Main Panel panel, double-click the Contract
Records icon.
2. On the Contract Records panel, double-click the
Stockpiled Materials icon.
To create a stockpile record:
1. On the Stockpile Materials window, on the toolbar, click the
New button.
2. On the Services menu, select the Choose Keys choice.
3. Select the appropriate contract, project and line item
number.
4. In the Stockpiled Desc field, type the desired text.
5. In the Invoice Date field, type the desired date.
6. In the Invoice Number field, type the desired number.
7. In the Quantity field, type the desired value.
8. In the Units dropdown list, select the desired choice.
9. In the Unit Price field, type the desired value.
10. In the Conv Factor field, type the desired value.
11. In the Invoice Payment field, type the desired value.
12. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 11
To replenish a stockpile:
1. On the Stockpiled Materials window, open the desired
stockpile.
2. On the Services menu, select the Replenish Material
choice.
3. In the Invoice Date field, type the desired date.
4. In the Invoice Number field, type the desired number.
5. In the Quantity field, type the desired value.
6. In the Unit Price field, type the desired value.
7. In the Invoice Payment field, type the desired value.
8. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
To close out a stockpile balance:
1. On the Stockpiled Materials window, open the desired
stockpile.
2. On the Services menu, select the Close Out Balance
choice.
3. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
12 Managing Stockpile Records
Review Exercise
In this exercise, create a stockpile record for TYPE A SIGN POSTS.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073 904131 (project); 645.81 (item code)
Create a new stockpile record for item code 645.81 for category
number 0001. The stockpile description is 645.81 TYPE A SIGN
POST. Invoice date is today’s date. Invoice number is 6783-9. The
quantity is 2 EACH at a unit price $157.00. Conversion factor is 1.
1. How do you close out a stockpile? ____________________
2. Exit SiteManager.
ANSWERS
1. SERVICES MENU
CLOSE OUT BALANCE.
KNOWN ISSUE
IF YOU CLICK THE SAVE
BUTTON A SECOND TIME, YOU MAY INCORRECTLY
RECEIVE AN ERROR
MESSAGE STATING THAT
THE STOCKPILE AMOUNT
EXCEEDS THE 85%
THRESHOLD.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 1
Creating and Modifying Change Orders
In this chapter, you will receive instruction about the following:
▪ Understanding the Life Cycle of Change Orders 2
▪ Defining Change Orders 3
▪ Modifying Existing Contract Items 8
▪ Calculating Change Orders 13
▪ Viewing Item Summaries 14
▪ Modifying Existing Change Orders 16
▪ Adding New Contract Items 16
▪ Modifying Contract Language 22
▪ Understanding Change Order Explanations 22
▪ Applying Standard Explanations 23
▪ Adding Non-Standard Explanations 25
▪ Adjusting the Contract Completion Date 27
▪ Selecting Approvers for Approval Groups 31
▪ Changing Selected Approvers for Pending Change Orders 35
▪ Overriding Approval Rules 36
▪ Reviewing and Approving Change Orders 40
▪ Tracking 43
▪ Summary 45
▪ Review Exercise 51
2 Creating and Modifying Change Orders
Understanding the Life Cycle of Change Orders
To make legal changes to a contract, with the ability to approve, deny and
track changes, use a change order.
Processing Change Orders
SiteManager processes a change order based on the following conditions:
▪ Type of contract
▪ Pre-defined approval levels and associated rules
▪ Functions associated with the change order
▪ Status of the change order
▪ Results of edits and verifications applied to the change order
▪ Disputes and reference documents
▪ Approval group recommendations
Understanding the Workflow
The life cycle of a change order in SiteManager contains the following
major steps:
1. Creating a new change order.
2. If necessary, modifying the change order.
3. Approving the change order.
4. If necessary, tracking the change order.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 3
Defining Change Orders
To create a new change order and record descriptive information for a
change order, use the Header window. Change order authors have specific
authority to create new change orders. With this authority, define the
functions for the change order.
Important! You must associate a change order with a contract.
Figure 1. Header Window
Field Name Description
Key Information
Contract ID Agency-defined contract ID code.
CO Number Sequential number assigned to all change orders for the contract.
Tentative Verbal Approval Dates
Federal Date on which a federal agency gives its tentative verbal approval of the change order. Optional.
Local Date on which a local agency gives its tentative verbal approval of the change order. Optional.
Author Information
CO Created By User name of the change order author. Auto-populated the first time the author saves the new change order.
On Date the change order was created. Auto-populated the first time the author saves the new change order.
Change Order Information
Status Stage in the life of the change order. Draft, Pending, Approved, or Denied.
Approval Level Level to which a change order must be approved.
Description Short description of the change order. Required.
4 Creating and Modifying Change Orders
Field Name Description
Reason Code Agency-defined reasons for change orders. Used for management reporting.
CO Type Change Order Type. Define the purpose of the change order.
Override Approval Rules
Indicates that the established approval rules do not apply to the change order. When selected, user may specify a sequence of approval groups which will only apply to the current change order. Usage: Override a change order only when it is a net zero dollar change order that does not include a field change payment item. Send to the Comptroller level. SiteManager notifies the REGCO person with a system-generated message.
Emergency Work Indicates that the change order is for emergency work. To expedite the review/approval process, select this check box to notify approvers on the Change Order Approval window.
Functions
Overrun/Underrun Indicates a quantity associated with at least one item has been modified as a result of this change order.
Force Account Usage: Do not use this function.
Extra Work Indicates that extra work or at least one new item has been included on this change order.
Zero Dollar Indicates that the change order includes text change only, no change to dollar amount or bid quantity—does not affect the dollar amount of the contract. Use of this function prohibits use of other functions on the same change order.
Time Adjustment Indicates that at least one of the timeframes associated with the contract has been modified as a result of this change order.
Final Quantity Usage: Do not use this function.
Dollar Amount Information
Bid Contract Amt Bid Contract Amount. Original bid amount of the contract.
Current Contract Amt
Current Contract Amount. Original bid amount of the contract plus approved change orders.
CO Amt Change Order Amount. Amount of the change order derived from all contract items modified by the change order.
Reference To
Dispute Displays disputes associated with the change order.
Force Account Usage: Do not use this function.
Table 1. Header Window - Fields
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 5
Understanding Change Order Statuses
SiteManager displays the current status of the change order in the CO
Status field.
Change order status types include the following:
▪ Draft - Status during creation, maintenance and review.
Warning! Change orders in Draft status can be revised.
Do not delete a change order if it is to be used within
the project at any time.
▪ Pending - Status during approval process. In this status,
cannot modify change order. If an approver recommends
the change order be denied, the author may change the
status to Draft to edit the change order or to Denied if it
will never be approved.
▪ Denied - Status of disapproved change orders never to be
revised. To preserve as permanent project documentation,
change from Pending to Denied status, which prevents
further modifications by displaying the change order as
inquiry-only.
▪ Approved - Status automatically applied when the last
approver completes the approval process. When the final
approval level approves a change order, nobody can modify
the change order. If necessary, make adjustments with a
new change order.
Note: If a Change Order gets Denied / Rejected BELOW the
Comptroller it can be changed back to Draft Status and
corrected.
NOTE
COMPARE TO
ESTIMATE STATUSES
OF ‘PENDING’ AND ‘IN
APPROVAL’.
USAGE
IF COMPTROLLER
REJECTS, CONTACT
DIRECTOR OF
CONSTRUCTION FOR
STATUS CHANGE
6 Creating and Modifying Change Orders
Exercise 1
In this exercise, learn to associate a new change order with a
contract.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073
Start and log on to SiteManager as regxx01.
1. On the Main Panel panel, double-click the Change Orders
icon. SiteManager displays the Change Orders panel.
2. Double-click the Change Order Maintenance icon.
SiteManager displays the Change Order Maintenance panel.
3. Double-click the Header icon. SiteManager displays the
Header window in new mode.
Now, let’s choose the contract.
4. On the Services menu, select the Choose Keys choice.
SiteManager displays the Select Contract and Change Order
window.
5. In the Contract ID area, double-click D263073. SiteManager
displays the Header window in update mode for the next
change order on the selected contract.
You’ve associated a new change order with a contract.
NOTE
ADD ATTACHMENTS TO
CHANGE ORDERS ON
THE HEADER WINDOW.
During this
Chapter have
each student
select their own
Change Order
number
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 7
Understanding Change Order Functions
To define a change order, select from the available functions. Except for
zero dollar change orders, you may specify more than one function to
make up a change order.
Note: Before you can successfully save a change order, SiteManager
displays messages to inform you if you have not entered information for
the selected function(s).
With SiteManager, you can manage the following functions of change
orders:
▪ Overrun/Underrun - Use to adjust quantities for existing
items. Use when you exceed or do not need the contract
item quantities to complete the contract or work item.
▪ Extra Work - Use to add new work items to the contract to
complete the contract.
▪ Time Adjustment - Use to revise a contract completion
date.
▪ Zero Dollar - Use for text-only contract adjustments (for
example, changing the location of a project).
▪ Force Account - Usage: Do not use this function.
Depending on the function of the change order, SiteManager requires
certain fields. If you attempt to save without completing all required fields
for a function, SiteManager displays messages to prompt you to complete
required fields.
Navigating to Other Change Order Windows
From the Header window’s Tabs, you may be able to navigate to the
following windows:
▪ Change Order Items
▪ Change Order Time Adjustments
▪ Explanations
From the Header window’s Service’s function you can Navigate to.
▪ Calculate Change Order
▪ Forward To
▪ Change Order Tracking
QRG
HOW TO ADD A .01
ITEM TO A DWR FOR
WORK ITEMS THAT
MUST BE ADDED PRIOR
TO APPROVAL.
USAGE
WHILE NYSDOT USES
FORCE ACCOUNT AND
FINAL QUANTITY CO
TYPES, DO NOT USE
FORCE ACCOUNT OR
FINAL QUANTITY
FUNCTIONS.
8 Creating and Modifying Change Orders
Modifying Existing Contract Items
To modify quantities of existing contract items when the change order has
an Overrun/Underrun function, use the Change Order Items window. On
the Change Order Item panel, enter the quantity for this change order.
Figure 2. Change Order Items Window - Change Order Item Panel
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 9
Field Name Description
Key Information
Cont ID Contract ID. Agency-defined contract ID code. Required.
CO Nbr Change Order Number. Sequential number assigned to all change orders for the contract.
Project Nbr Project Number. Identifies the project to which the item is associated.
Line Item Nbr Contract Line Item Number. Unique identifier for each item on the project.
Item Code Agency-defined code to identify a particular item. Searchable.
Unit Unit of measure for the item.
Unit Price Unit price of the item identified on the invoice.
Item and Supplemental Descriptions
Description of the item.
Change Order Item Description
Additional change order description for items not sufficiently described. Optional.
Quantities and Amounts
Contract Bid: Quantity
Quantity of the line item, as indicated on the proposal or contract.
Contract Bid: Amount
Contract bid quantity multiplied by unit price.
Approved Change Order: Quantity
Net change to the item quantity from all approved change orders.
Approved Change Order: Amount
Approved change order quantity multiplied by unit price.
Current Contract: Quantity
Bid contract plus approved quantities.
Current Contract: Amount
Current contract quantity multiplied by unit price.
Pending Change Order: Quantity
Net change to the item quantity from all unapproved change orders.
Pending Change Order: Amount
Pending change order quantity multiplied by unit price.
This Change Order: Quantity
Positive or negative line item quantity added or changed on this change order. Required.
This Change Order: Amount
This change order quantity multiplied by unit price.
Force Account Item
Usage: Do not use this function.
Table 2. Change Order Items Window - Change Order Item Panel - Fields
10 Creating and Modifying Change Orders
Increasing the Quantity of Existing Contract Items
To increase the quantity of an existing contract item, use the
Overrun/Underrun function.
Exercise 2
In this exercise, learn to create a change order to increase a quantity
of an existing contract item.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073
1. In the Description field, type FCP #1.
2. In the Reason Code dropdown list, select the Design Issue
choice.
3. In the CO Type dropdown list, select the Field Change
Payment choice.
4. In the Functions area, select the Overrun/Underrun check
box.
5. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
Now, let’s select the existing contract item.
6. Select Items Tab. SiteManager displays the CO Items
window.
7. On the Services menu, select the Select Item choice.
SiteManager displays the Select Contract Items window.
8. To sort the column and activate the Quick Find feature,
click the Item Code column heading.
9. In the Find field, type 568.
10. In the Item Code column, double-click 568.70 for category
number 0001. SiteManager displays the information about
that item on the Change Order Item panel.
NOTE
THE CO ITEMS CHOICE
OPENS THE CHANGE
ORDER ITEMS
WINDOW, WHERE YOU
CAN SELECT EXISTING
CONTRACT ITEMS TO
MODIFY ON THE
CHANGE ORDER OR
SELECT NEW ITEMS TO
ADD TO THE
CONTRACT VIA
CHANGE ORDER.
NOTE
THE NEW CO ITEM
CHOICE OPENS THE
SELECT CONTRACT
ITEMS WINDOW, WHERE ALL ITEMS
ALREADY ON THE
CONTRACT ARE
LISTED.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 11
Now, let’s enter the change order item description and item
quantity.
11. On the Item Code field, right-click. SiteManager displays a
pop-up window from which you can copy the item code.
12. Select the text and copy.
13. In the Change Order Item Description field, click and
paste.
14. On the Item and Supplemental Descriptions field, right-
click. SiteManager displays a pop-up window from which
you can copy the item description.
15. Select the text and copy.
16. In the Change Order Item Description field, after the item
code, click and paste. SiteManager displays the inserted text
as ‘568.70 TRANSITION BRIDGE RAILING.’
17. In the This Change Order field, type 73.88.
18. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
19. What is the amount of this change order? ___________
You’ve created a change order to increase a quantity of an existing
contract item on the contract.
Funding the Increased Quantity of Existing Contract Items
To fund the increased quantity of existing contract items, use the Field
Change Order (FCO) item.
Figure 3. Change Order Items Window - Change Order Item Panel
ANSWERS
19. $7535.76
TIP!
TO COPY, USE CTRL+C.
TO PASTE, USE CTRL+V.
USAGE
DO NOT PERFORM AN
UNFILTERED SEARCH
FOR AN ITEM. INSTEAD, TYPE A
PORTION OF THE ITEM
CODE AND PERFORM A
FILTER SEARCH.
12 Creating and Modifying Change Orders
Exercise 3
In this exercise, learn to fund the increased quantity using the Field
Change Order (FCO) item.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073; 001 (change order)
1. On the toolbar, click the New button.
2. Select Items Tab. SiteManager displays the CO Items
window.
3. To sort the column and activate the Quick Find feature,
click the Item Code column heading.
4. In the Find field, type 697.
5. In the Item Code column, double-click 697.03 for category
number 0001. SiteManager displays the information about
that item in the Change Order Item panel.
Now, let’s enter the change order item description and item quantity.
6. On the Item Code field, right-click. SiteManager displays a
pop-up window from which you can copy the item code.
7. Select the text and copy.
8. In the Change Order Item Description field, click and
paste.
9. In the Change Order Item Description field, after the item
code, type Fund 568.70. SiteManager displays the inserted
text as ‘697.03 Fund 568.70.’
10. In the This Change Order field, type -7535.76.
11. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
12. To close the Change Order Items window, click Header
Tab. SiteManager displays the Header window.
You’ve deducted an amount from the funding item to compensate
for the increased quantity.
TIP
TO COPY, USE CTRL+C.
TO PASTE, USE CTRL+V.
NOTE
FOR THE FCO, TYPE THE
DESCRIPTION SINCE IT
NEEDS TO RELATE TO
THE ITEM IT IS FUNDING.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 13
Calculating Change Orders
After adding new items or modifying the item quantities on a change
order, on the Header window, calculate the change order amount.
Important! To update the change order amount and display the approval
level on the Header window, be sure to calculate every time you use the
overrun/underrun or extra work function.
Exercise 4
In this exercise, learn to calculate the change order.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073; 001 (change order)
1. On the Services menu, select the Calculate Change Order
choice.
2. What is the change order amount? ______________
3. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
You’ve calculated the change order.
NOTE
BEFORE CALCULATING, THE RESULT IS ALWAYS
ZERO.
ANSWERS
2. $0.00
14 Creating and Modifying Change Orders
Viewing Item Summaries
To view the details of current and historic items, use the Item Summary
window.
Note: Refer to this window at any time in the change order process to
view an item on a change order in any status.
Figure 4. Item Summary Window
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 15
Field Description
Key Information
Contract ID Agency-defined contract ID code.
Prj Nbr Project Number. Identifies the project to which the item is associated. May be multiple projects per contract.
Line Itm Nbr Contract Line Item Number. Unique identifier for each item on the project.
Item Information
Item Code Agency-defined code to identify a particular item.
Unit Unit of measure for the item.
Unit Price Unit price of the item identified.
Item Description Description of the item from the item master list.
Supp Desc1 Supplemental Description 1.
Supp Desc2 Supplemental Description 2.
Quantities and Amounts
Contract Bid: Quantity
Quantity of the line item, as indicated on the proposal or contract.
Contract Bid: Amount
Contract bid quantity multiplied by unit price.
Approved Change Order: Quantity
Net change to the item quantity from all approved change orders.
Approved Change Order: Amount
Approved change order quantity multiplied by unit price.
Current Contract: Quantity
Bid contract plus approved quantities.
Current Contract: Amount
Current contract quantity multiplied by unit price.
Pending Change Order: Quantity
Net change to the item quantity from all unapproved change orders.
Pending Change Order: Amount
Pending change order quantity multiplied by unit price.
% Change To Date
Percent Change To Date. Percentage change in the item’s bid quantity based on the approved change orders to date.
Change Orders Associated with the Selected Change Order Item
CO Nbr Sequential number assigned to all change orders for the contract.
Quantity Line item quantity on this change order.
Unit Price Unit price of the item identified.
Amount Change order quantity multiplied by unit price.
Status Status of the change order.
Table 3. Item Summary Window - Fields
16 Creating and Modifying Change Orders
Exercise 5
In this exercise, learn to view the item summary of the item with
the increased quantity.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073; 001 (change order)
1. On the toolbar, click the SiteManager Panel button.
SiteManager displays the SiteManager Panel window.
2. On the Change Order Maintenance panel, double-click the
Item Summary icon. SiteManager displays the Change Order
Items Select window.
3. In the Change Order Items area, in the Item Code column,
double-click 568.70 for category number 0001. SiteManager
displays the Item Summary window.
4. What is the status of the change order? __________
5. What is the quantity added to this item? __________
6. Why hasn’t the current contract quantity of this item been
increased? _____________
7. To close the Item Summary window, click the Close button.
SiteManager displays the Header window.
You’ve viewed the summary of item.
Modifying Existing Change Orders
Maintain the current descriptive information about an existing change
order as the status of the change order progresses from Draft through
Pending to Approved or Denied, use the Header window. Use other
change order windows to modify items, time frames, and explanations.
Adding New Contract Items
To add new items to an active contract when the change order has an Extra
Work function, use the Change Order Items window. When you add a new
item to a contract, on the New Contract Item panel, enter the line item
number, unit price, quantity of the item, and description.
ANSWERS
4. DRAFT
5. 73.88
6. CO HAS NOT BEEN
APPROVED. STILL IN
DRAFT STATUS.
KNOWN ISSUE
SORT AND FIND DOES
NOT WORK CORRECTLY.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 17
Tip! Make the number in the Proposal Line Nbr field match the number in
the Line Item Nbr field.
Important! Until the change order is approved, the new item will not be
available for use on a DWR.
Figure 5. Change Order Items Window - New Contract Item Panel
18 Creating and Modifying Change Orders
Field Name Description
Key Information
Contract ID Agency-defined contract ID code. Required.
Change Order Nbr Change Order Number. Sequential number assigned to all change orders for the contract.
New Contract Item Information
Project Nbr Project Number. Identifies the project to which the item is associated. May be multiple projects per contract.
Category Nbr Category Number. Items assigned to groups, during pre-construction, within categories for various reasons, such as funding.
Line Item Nbr Contract Line Item Number. Unique identifier for each item on the project.
Item Code Agency-defined code to identify a particular item.
Units Type Unit of measure for this item.
Spec Year Specification Year.
Description Description of the item.
Major Item Indicates the line item is a major item. If not selected, the item is a minor item.
Specialty Indicates whether the line item is a specialty item. Inquiry-only if any of the following apply:
▪ Has an associated change order ▪ Has an associated dispute ▪ Has an associated plan discrepancy (through
change order) ▪ Has associated stockpiled materials ▪ Contract has an associated estimate
Status Type Indicates current status of an item. ▪ Pending - Default when adding an item. ▪ Active - On active contracts all of the contract’s
items are Active status. Cannot delete. ▪ Final - When a Final Item Quantity Change Order
is approved, the status of all of the change order’s items is changed to Final status.
▪ Audited - When approving or accepting an item through an audit, indicate with Audited status.
▪ Complete - When a contract’s status is changed to complete, the status of all of the contract’s items is changed to Complete status.
Unit Price Unit price of the item identified on the invoice.
Proposal Line Nbr Proposal Line Number. Identifies the item on the proposal.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 19
Field Name Description
Related Item Allows grouping of line items (for example, all traffic control items or all items for a structure) for reporting and funding purposes. Inquiry-only if any of the following apply:
▪ Has an associated change order ▪ Has an associated dispute ▪ Has an associated plan discrepancy (through
change order) ▪ Has associated stockpiled materials ▪ Contract has an associated estimate
Critical Indicates an item is considered critical. Used for tracking the progress of contracts with the “Critical Items Installed” progress schedule type. Non-critical items such as landscaping are not included in progress tracking.
Pay Plan Qty Pay Plan Quantity. Indicates if the line item is paid to plan quantity; no overruns are allowed. Inquiry-only if any of the following apply:
▪ Has an associated change order ▪ Has an associated dispute ▪ Has an associated plan discrepancy (through
change order) ▪ Has associated stockpiled materials ▪ Contract has an associated estimate
Suppl Desc Req’d Supplemental Description Required. Indicates that a supplemental description is required.
Material Discrepancy Adj
Material Discrepancy Adjustment. Indicates item used in material discrepancy adjustment calculations.
Supplemental Descriptions
Two-line description supplemental to the item's description.
Table 4. Change Order Items Window - New Contract Item Panel - Fields
20 Creating and Modifying Change Orders
Exercise 6
In this exercise, learn to add a new contract item to a new change
order.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073; Next Available CO Number
1. On the toolbar, click the New button. SiteManager displays the
Change Order Header Tab.
Now, let’s define the function.
2. In the Functions area, select the Extra Work check box.
3. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
Now, let’s select the new contract item and define it for use on the
contract.
4. Select Items Tab. SiteManager displays the CO Items window.
5. In the Project Nbr dropdown list, select 904131.
6. In the Category Nbr dropdown list, select 0001.
Now, let’s insert the next line item number (sequence number).
7. In the Line Item Nbr field, type Pick next available Line
Item Nbr.
Now, let’s record the item code and unit price.
8. In the Item Code field, type 645.76.
9. Using the right mouse button, click on the Item Code field.
10. On the object menu, select the Filter Search choice.
SiteManager displays the Search Window.
11. To sort the rows, click the Item Code column heading.
12. In the Item Code column, scroll to and double-click 645.76.
SiteManager displays the item code in the Change Order Items
window’s New Contract Item panel.
13. In the Unit Price field, type 377.68.
USAGE
CLICK THE NEW
CONTRACT ITEM TAB
TO DISPLAY THE NEW
CONTRACT ITEM
PANEL, WHERE YOU
CAN ADD NEW ITEMS
TO THE CONTRACT
FROM NYSDOT’S
ENTIRE ITEM MASTER
LIST.
USAGE
IN THE ITEM CODE
FIELD, DO NOT
SEARCH; MAY TAKE A
LONG TIME. IF
NECESSARY, TYPE THE
FIRST FIVE NUMBERS, THEN USE FILTER
SEARCH TO REDUCE
LIST.
TIP
TO LOCATE THE LAST
LINE ITEM NUMBER, USE THE ITEMS
WINDOW SORTED BY
LINE.
Have Student
select next
Line Item
Number
available.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 21
Now, let’s make the proposal line item number match the line item
number (sequence number).
14. In the Proposal Line Nbr field, replace the existing text with
0340.
Now, let’s enter the change order item description and item
quantity.
15. Click the Change Order Item tab.
16. On the Item Code field, right-click. SiteManager displays a
pop-up window from which you can copy the item code.
17. Select the text and copy.
18. In the Change Order Item Description field, click and paste.
19. On the Item and Supplemental Descriptions field, right-
click. SiteManager displays a pop-up window from which you
can copy the item description.
20. Select the text and copy.
21. In the Change Order Item Description field, after the item code,
click and paste. SiteManager displays the inserted text as
‘645.76 Illuminated Sign Panels’.
22. In the Change Order Item Description field, after the item code and before
the item and supplemental description, type A-. SiteManager displays the
inserted text as
‘645.76 A- Illuminated Sign Panels’.
23. In the This Change Order: Quantity field, type 4.56.
24. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
25. To close the Change Order Items window, click the Header
Tab. SiteManager displays the Header window.
Now, let’s calculate the change order.
26. On the Services menu, select the Calculate Change Order
choice.
27. What is the change order amount? ______________
28. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
ANSWERS
29. $1722.22
TIP
TO COPY, USE CTRL+C.
TO PASTE, USE CTRL+V.
DEMO
AT THIS POINT, YOU
WOULD ADD CHANGE
ORDER EXPLANATIONS.
EXPLANATIONS TAB
EXERCISE APPEARS
LATER IN THE CHAPTER.
USAGE
ALWAYS INSERT BEFORE
THE DESCRIPTION, EITHER ‘A-’ FOR AN AGREED
PRICE OR ‘FAW-’ FOR
FORCE ACCOUNT WORK
TO DENOTE HOW THE
ITEM IS INTRODUCED.
22 Creating and Modifying Change Orders
29. To close the Header window, on the toolbar, click the Close
button. SiteManager displays the Change Order Maintenance
panel.
You’ve added new contract item to the change order.
Modifying Contract Language
To change contract language only without affecting the dollar amount of a
contract, select the Zero Dollar function. Zero dollar change orders make
no change to dollar amount or bid quantity.
Note: Use of this function prohibits use of other functions on the same
change order.
Usage: The PM and ASSTPM groups have the authority to create zero
dollar change orders.
Understanding Change Order Explanations
To document the reasons for contract changes, use the Change Order
Explanation window.
Explanations can be standard or non-standard. Standard explanations
consist of boilerplate text that you cannot change. Non-standard
explanations consist of freeform text that you can use to explain situations
that the standard explanations do not cover.
Types Description
General Change Order Explanations Apply to the change order as a whole.
Explanations Applied to Specific Items
Apply to a specific item.
Explanations Applied to All Line Items
Apply to all items on a change order.
Table 5. Change Order Explanations - Types
USAGE
ZERO DOLLAR: - FIELD CHANGE
SHEETS - REVISE PROJECT
LIMITS - ADD WARRANTY ITEM - NO DOLLAR VALUE
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 23
Applying Standard Explanations
To apply a boilerplate reason for a contract change, select a standard
explanation from a list of choices.
Figure 6. Change Order Explanations Window - General Change Order Explanations
Field Name Description
Key Information
Contract ID Agency-defined contract ID code. Required.
Change Order Nbr Change Order Number. Sequential number assigned to all change orders for the contract.
Status Status of the change order.
Explanation Information
Explanation Type (no label)
Dropdown list of change order explanations applied to the change order as whole or at the item level.
Seq. Nbr. Sequence Number. Auto-assigned to the change order explanations.
Std CO Expl ID Standard Change Order Explanation ID. Agency-defined.
Type Type of explanation selected from a standard set of defined types.
Date Applied Date the explanation was applied to the change order.
Pick Std Exp. ID or Enter Text Below
Search for standard explanations or enter non-standard explanations in the text field.
Table 6. Change Order Explanations Window - General Change Order Explanations - Fields
24 Creating and Modifying Change Orders
Exercise 7
In this exercise, learn to apply a standard general explanation to a
change order.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073; CO from Exercise 6
1. On the Change Order Maintenance panel, double-click the
Change Order icon, then click Explanations Tab.
Now, let’s select a standard explanation.
2. On the toolbar, click the New button. SiteManager adds a row
to the upper pane with the explanation’s sequence number and
displays the Pick Std Exp. ID or Enter Text Below field in
the lower pane.
3. In the Pick Std Exp. ID field, right-click and select the Search
choice. SiteManager displays the Search Window window.
4. In the Explanation ID column, double-click the NotInEE
choice. SiteManager displays the boilerplate text in the lower
field.
5. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
You’ve added a standard general explanation to a change order.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 25
Adding Non-Standard Explanations
To apply a customized or freeform reason for a contract change, type a
non-standard explanation.
Figure 7. Change Order Explanations Window - Explanations Applied to Specific Items
Field Name Description
Change Order Line Items Information
Project Unique project ID.
Line Item Contract Line Item Number. Unique identifier for each contract line item on the project.
Additional Description
Change order item description, which is the item code and item description.
Table 7. Change Order Explanations Window - Explanations Applied to Specific Items - Additional Fields
26 Creating and Modifying Change Orders
Exercise 8
In this exercise, learn to add a non-standard explanation to a
specific item.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073; CO from Exercise 6
1. On the explanation type dropdown list, select the Explanations
Applied to Specific Items choice. SiteManager displays the
Change Order Line Items pane.
2. On the toolbar, click the New button. SiteManager displays the
field to enter text and a new row in the lower left pane.
3. In the Additional Description column, double-click the
descriptions that begin with 645.76. SiteManager displays a
check mark to the left of the rows.
4. In the Enter Text Below field, type The above item
quantities were added to the contract under the direction of
Region One Design Engineer. Crosswalks, handicap access
ramps, and the appropriate pedestrian crossing signs were
installed along Route 86 in the village of Wilmington at the
locations shown on the attached sheets. The additional
work required subcontractor/contractor remobilization.
Quantities reported are from actual field measurements of
work performed and documented on the attached cost
analysis for each item.
5. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
6. To close the Change Order Explanations window, on the
toolbar, click the Close button. SiteManager displays the
Change Order Maintenance panel.
You’ve added a non-standard explanation to a specific item.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 27
Adjusting the Contract Completion Date
To enter one or more time adjustments when the change order has a Time
Adjustments function, use the Time Adjustments window. Record at least
one adjustment on the Time Adjustments window.
Important! Enter only one adjustment to the contract completion date per
change order.
Figure 8. Change Order Time Adjustments Window
USAGE
YOU MUST ATTACH
CONTRACTOR’S
REQUEST FOR TIME
EXTENSION (TE) TO
HEADER.
28 Creating and Modifying Change Orders
Field Name Description
Key Information
Contract ID Agency-defined contract ID code.
Change Order Nbr Sequential number assigned to all change orders for the contract.
List of Contract Adjustments
Adjusted Contract or Milestone
List of contract adjustments associated with this change order.
Adjustment Days Number of days the contract is to be adjusted. Required for all Available Days and Calendar Days charge type contract adjustments.
Adjustment Date New completion date of the contract (if approved).
Explanation First line of the description entered in the lower pane.
Selected Contract Adjustment Information
For Milestone Indicates that the time adjustment is for a milestone.
or Contract Completion
Indicates that the time adjustment is for the contract’s completion.
Time Adjustment Days
Number of days the contract completion date will be extended.
Adjusted Completion Date
New completion date of the contract (if approved).
Explanation Description of the reasons for the time adjustment. Optional.
Table 8. Change Order Time Adjustments Window - Fields
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 29
Exercise 9
In this exercise, learn to modify a time adjustment.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073; Next Available CO
1. On the Change Order Maintenance panel, double-click the
Change Orders icon. SiteManager displays the Header
window.
2. On the toolbar, click the New button.
3. In the Description field, type Time Extension – Added work.
4. In the Reason Code dropdown list, select the TE – Added
Work choice.
5. In the CO Type dropdown list, select the Time Extension.
6. In the Functions area, select the Time Adjustment check box.
7. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
Now, let’s view the attachment.
8. On the toolbar, click the Attachments button and add
attachment called “CONR 250” from:
P:\Office of Operations\ Construction\ SiteManager\ Training\
Attachments.
9. In the Attachments window, in the Description column,
double-click CONR 250.
10. View and close the attachment.
11. To close the Attachments window, on the toolbar, click the
Attachments button again.
Now, let’s add a new adjusted contract completion date.
12. Select the Time Adjustments Tab. SiteManager displays the
Change Order Time Adjustments window.
NOTE
ADD ATTACHMENTS TO
CHANGE ORDERS ON
THE HEADER WINDOW.
NOTE
THE CO ITEMS CHOICE
OPENS THE CHANGE
ORDER ITEMS
WINDOW, WHERE YOU
CAN SELECT EXISTING
CONTRACT ITEMS TO
MODIFY ON THE
CHANGE ORDER OR
SELECT NEW ITEMS TO
ADD TO THE
CONTRACT VIA
CHANGE ORDER.
30 Creating and Modifying Change Orders
13. Verify that the “or Contract Completion” button has been
selected by default.
14. In the Adjusted Completion Days field, type 60 days from
today’s date.
15. In the Explanation field, type Utility conflict – extended
work time frame.
16. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
17. To close the Change Order Time Adjustments window, select
the Header Tab
Now, let’s calculate the change order.
18. On the Services menu, select the Calculate Change Order
choice. SiteManager displays the approval level for the change
order in the Approval Level field.
19. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
You’ve defined a change order to adjust the completion date of the
contract.
NOTE
FOR SM 3.15A
ENTER COMPLETION
DATE AND SM AUTO-CALCULATES NUMBER
OF TIME ADJUSTMENT
DAYS.
FOR SM 3.17A
SM AUTO-CALCULATES THE
COMPLETION DATE
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 31
Selecting Approvers for Approval Groups
To submit for hierarchical approval, change to Pending status and select
approval groups and users.
Figure 9. Change Order # < > Approval Window
Field Description
Groups for Approval
Groups for Approval
List of user groups authorized to provide recommendations to approve or deny change orders.
Available Approvers
User ID Unique identifier of the available approver.
User Name Name of the available approver.
Selected Approvers
User ID Unique identifier of the selected approver.
User Name Name of the selected approver.
Buttons
Add -> Click to move selected user(s) from the Available Users pane to the Selected Approvers pane.
Add All ->> Click to move all users from the Available Users pane to the Selected Approvers pane.
<- Remove Click to move selected user(s) from the Selected Approvers pane to the Available Users pane.
<<- Rem All Remove All. Click to move all users from the Selected Approvers pane to the Available Users pane.
OK Click to confirm choices.
Cancel Click to close window without making choices.
Table 9. Change Order # < > Approval Window - Fields
32 Creating and Modifying Change Orders
Exercise 10
In this exercise, learn to select approvers for approval groups.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073; CO from Exercise 6
1. On the toolbar, click the Open button. SiteManager displays
the Select Contract and Change Order window.
2. In the Change Order area, in the CO Nbr column, double-
click CO from Exercise 6. SiteManager displays the Header
window.
3. In the Status dropdown list, select the Pending choice.
4. On the toolbar, click the Save button. SiteManager displays a
message confirming the change.
5. In the message, click the Yes button. SiteManager displays the
Change Order # Approval window.
Now, let’s select an approver for the Contractor group. Remember,
this is only necessary in training.
6. In the Groups for Approval area, select the Contractor
choice.
7. In the available approvers pane, select contr.
8. Click the Add button. SiteManager moves the user to the
selected approvers pane.
Now, let’s select an approver for the Project Manager group.
9. In the Groups for Approval area, select the Project Manager
choice.
10. In the available approvers pane, select regxx01.
11. Click the Add button. SiteManager moves the user to the
selected approvers pane.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 33
Now, let’s select an approver for the Regional Construction Change
Order group.
12. In the Groups for Approval area, select the Regional
Construction Change Order choice.
13. In the available approvers pane, select a name from list.
14. Click the Add button. SiteManager moves the user to the
selected approvers pane.
Now, let’s select an approver for the Construction Area Supervisor
group.
15. In the Groups for Approval area, select the Construction
Area Supervisor choice.
16. In the available approvers pane, select name from list.
17. Click the Add button. SiteManager moves the user to the
selected approvers pane.
Now, let’s select an approver for the Regional Construction
Engineer group.
18. In the Groups for Approval area, select the Regional
Construction Engineer choice.
19. In the available approvers pane, select name from list.
20. Click the Add button. SiteManager moves the user to the
selected approvers pane.
Now, let’s select an approver for the Main Office Construction
Change Orders group.
21. In the Groups for Approval area, select the MO
Construction Change Orders choice.
22. In the available approvers pane, select name from list.
23. Click the Add button. SiteManager moves the user to the
selected approvers pane.
34 Creating and Modifying Change Orders
Now, let’s select an approver for the Main Office Construction
Director group.
24. In the Groups for Approval area, select the MO
Construction Director choice.
25. In the available approvers pane, select name from list.
26. Click the Add button. SiteManager moves the user to the
selected approvers pane.
Now, let’s select an approver for the Main Office Accounting
Funding group.
27. In the Groups for Approval area, select the MO Accounting
Funding choice.
28. In the available approvers pane, select name from list.
29. Click the Add button. SiteManager moves the user to the
selected approvers pane.
Now, let’s select an approver for the Main Office Accounting
Funding Supervisor group.
30. In the Groups for Approval area, select the MO Accounting
Fund Supervisor choice.
31. In the available approvers pane, select name from list.
32. Click the Add button. SiteManager moves the user to the
selected approvers pane.
Now, let’s select an approver for the Comptroller Funding group.
33. In the Groups for Approval area, select the Comptroller
Funding choice.
34. In the available approvers pane, select name from list.
35. Click the Add button. SiteManager moves the user to the
selected approvers pane.
36. Click the OK button. SiteManager displays a message to
inform you that the mail has been sent.
37. In the message, click the OK button. SiteManager displays the
Header window in inquiry-only mode with a Pending status.
You’ve selected approvers for all approval groups.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 35
Changing Selected Approvers for Pending Change Orders
Scenario: Suppose a person has been selected to review/approve a
change order, but that person is unavailable for a substantial period of time
(that is, on vacation or out sick). The PM or Assistant PM may select
somebody else in the approval group if available to approve the change
order; that person will now be the new approver for that approval level
(role).
To modify a change order approver during the approval cycle:
1. While on the Header window for a change order in Pending
status, from the Services menu, select the Forward to
choice. SiteManager displays the Change Order < >
Approval window with the approvers selected by the change
order creator.
2. In the Groups for Approval area, select the approval group
with the approver you desire to change.
3. Click the Remove button. SiteManager moves the name of
the original approver to the available approvers pane.
4. In the selected approvers pane, select the name of the new
approver.
5. Click the Add button. SiteManager moves the name of the
new approver to the selected approvers pane.
6. Click the OK button. SiteManager closes the Change Order
< > Approval window and displays the Header window.
7. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
36 Creating and Modifying Change Orders
Overriding Approval Rules
Usage: Only the Project Manager group may override approval rules.
To bypass normal hierarchical approval levels depending on types and
functions of change orders, choose to override approval rules. The Project
Manager group may override up to the Comptroller Funding group or
down from the Comptroller Funding group to the Regional Construction
Engineer group.
Exercise 11
In this exercise, learn to override approval groups.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073; CO from Exercise 6
1. On the toolbar, click the Open button. SiteManager displays
the Select Contract and Change Order window.
2. In the Change Order area, in the CO Nbr column, double-
click CO from Exercise 6. SiteManager displays the Header
window.
3. Now on Header Tab in the “Status Field” change back to
“Draft” and save.
4. Click Overrun/Underrun Function and Save.
Now, let’s select the existing contract item to be modified.
5. Select the Items Tab choice. SiteManager displays the CO
Items window.
6. Select the Services then Select Item. SiteManager displays the
Select Contract Items window.
7. To sort the column and activate the Quick Find feature, click
the Item Code column heading.
8. In the Find field, type 203.
9. In the Item Code column, double-click 203.03 for category
number 0001. SiteManager displays the information about that
item on the Change Order Items window’s Change Order
Item panel.
USAGE
YOU MUST OVERRIDE
A NET ZERO DOLLAR
CHANGE ORDER IF IT
DOES NOT USE THE
FCP ITEM. THIS
CHANGE ORDER MUST
GO TO COMPTROLLER
FUNDING GROUP FOR
APPROVAL.
OVERRIDE WILL
AUTOMATICALLY
NOTIFY THE REGIONAL
CONSTRUCTION
CHANGE ORDER
GROUP.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 37
10. In the This Change Order field, type -10.00.
11. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
Now, let’s select the existing contract item to be increased.
12. On the toolbar, click the New button.
13. On the Services menu, select Item choice. SiteManager
displays the Select Contract Items window.
14. To sort the column and activate the Quick Find feature, click
the Item Code column heading.
15. In the Find field, type 637.
16. In the Item Code column, scroll to and double-click 637.36 for
category number 0001. SiteManager displays the information
about that item on the Change Order Item panel.
17. In the This Change Order field, type 257.00.
18. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
19. Select Item 645.76.
20. On Toolbar click Delete button. Answer Yes and Save.
21. On the toolbar, click the Close button. SiteManager displays
the Header window.
Now, let’s calculate the change order.
22. On the Services menu, select the Calculate Change Order
choice. SiteManager displays the approval level for the change
order in the Approval Level field.
Note: Since the calculated change order amount is zero, the
system uses the approval level of Regional Construction
Engineer. In this situation, the FCP item was not used to fund
the overrun, which requires the Comptroller Funding group
approval.
Now, let’s change the approval groups.
23. Select the Override Approval Rules check box.
24. In the Status dropdown list, select the Pending choice.
25. On the toolbar, click the Save button. SiteManager displays a
message prompting the user to confirm the change in status.
38 Creating and Modifying Change Orders
26. In the message, click the Yes button. SiteManager displays the
Change Order # Approval window.
Now, let’s select an approver for the Contractor group. Remember,
this is only necessary in training.
27. Click the New button.
28. In the Groups for Approval dropdown list, select the Project
Manager choice.
29. In the User ID dropdown list, select regxx01.
Now, let’s select an approver for the Regional Construction Change Order
approval group.
30. Click the New button.
31. In the Groups for Approval dropdown list, select the
Regional Construction Change Order choice.
32. In the User ID dropdown list, select name from list.
Now, let’s select an approver for the Construction Area Supervisor approval group.
33. Click the New button.
34. In the Groups for Approval dropdown list, select the
Construction Area Supervisor choice.
35. In the User ID dropdown list, select name from list.
Now, let’s select an approver for the Regional Construction Engineer approval group.
36. Click the New button.
37. In the Groups for Approval dropdown list, select the
Regional Construction Engineer choice.
38. In the User ID dropdown list, select name from list.
Now, let’s select an approver for the MO Construction Change Orders approval group.
39. Click the New button.
40. In the Groups for Approval dropdown list, select the MO
Construction Change Orders choice.
41. In the User ID dropdown list, select name from list.
Now, let’s select an approver for the Construction Director approval group.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 39
42. Click the New button.
43. In the Groups for Approval dropdown list, select the MO
Construction Director choice.
44. In the User ID dropdown list, select name from list.
Now, let’s select an approver for the Accounting Funding approval group.
45. Click the New button.
46. In the Groups for Approval dropdown list, select the MO
Accounting Funding choice.
47. In the User ID dropdown list, select name from list.
Now, let’s select an approver for the Accounting Fund Supervisor approval group.
48. Click the New button.
49. In the Groups for Approval dropdown list, select the MO
Accounting Fund Supervisor choice.
50. In the User ID dropdown list, select name from list.
Now, let’s select an approver for the Comptroller Funding approval group.
51. Click the New button.
52. In the Groups for Approval dropdown list, select the
Comptroller Funding choice.
53. In the User ID dropdown list, select name from list.
Now, let’s notify the first approver.
54. Click the OK button. SiteManager displays a message to
inform you that the mail has been sent.
55. In the message, click the OK button. SiteManager displays the
Header window in inquiry-only mode with a Pending status
and an approval level of OVERRIDE.
56. On the toolbar, click the Close button. SiteManager displays
the Change Order Maintenance panel.
You’ve changed the approval level with the override function from
RCE to Comptroller.
40 Creating and Modifying Change Orders
Reviewing and Approving Change Orders
To recommend a change order be approved or denied, use the Change
Order Approval window.
Figure 10. Change Order Approval Window
Field Description
Key Information
Contract ID Agency-defined contract ID code.
CO Number Change Order Number. Sequential number assigned to all change orders for the contract.
Approver Information
Approver ID User ID of the approver.
Approval Date Date of the recommendation. Defaults to today’s date. May change to a date in the past.
Name Name of the approver.
Emergency Work Indicator
Emergency Indicates that the change order is for emergency work.
Recommendation Area
Approved Indicates the change order content is accepted to the approval group.
Denied Indicates the change order must be corrected or will never be accepted.
Table 10. Change Order Approval Window - Fields
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 41
Understanding Change Order Recommendations
Important! Do not confuse recommendations with statuses.
Change order recommendation types include the following:
▪ Rejected - During the approval process, recommend a
change order be denied if it must be corrected or it will
never be accepted. SiteManager status stays as Pending.
If the majority of the change order content is acceptable,
the author may change it to Draft status and make the
necessary changes. If the author realizes the change order
will never be accepted, the author may change it to Denied
status.
▪ Approved - During the approval process, recommend a
change order be approved if the content is acceptable.
SiteManager makes the change order available to the next
approver in the hierarchy. If all approvers recommend the
change order be approved, SiteManager changes the change
order to Approved status.
Exercise 12
In this exercise, learn to review and approve a change order for the
Project Manager approval group.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073; CO from Exercise 6
1. On the Change Order Maintenance panel, double-click the
Change Order Review / Approve icon. SiteManager displays
the Change Order Review / Approval window.
2. In the Contract ID area, double-click D263073.
3. In the Change Order area, double-click CO from Exercise 6.
SiteManager displays the Change Order Approval window.
42 Creating and Modifying Change Orders
Now, let’s review the change order and associated function before
approving.
4. On the Open menu, select the CO from Exercise 6 choice.
SiteManager displays the Header window for that change
order.
5. Select Explanations Tab review Explanations. When finished
click Header Tab
6. Select Items Tab review Item Quantities. When finished click
Header Tab.
7. To close the Header window, on the toolbar, click the Close
button. SiteManager displays the Change Order Approval
window.
Now, let’s approve the change order.
8. On the toolbar, click the Remarks button. SiteManager
displays the Remarks window.
9. In the Remarks (General Remarks) field, type
EIC/PM – Agree with Quantities.
10. To close the Remarks window, on the toolbar, click the
Remarks button.
11. In the Recommendation area, select the Approved button.
12. On the toolbar, click the Save button. SiteManager displays a
message to confirm recommendation.
13. In the message, click the Yes button. SiteManager displays a
message to inform you that the mail has been sent.
14. In the message, click the OK button.
15. To close the Change Order Approval window, on the toolbar,
click the Close button.
You’ve approved a change order for the Project Manager approval
group.
USAGE
IMPORTANT! TYPE TITLE OF POSITION
BEFORE REMARKS.
USAGE
IF PROVIDED, VIEW
ATTACHMENT.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 43
Tracking
To view the status of a change order at any time during the approval cycle,
use the Tracking window.
View the following inquiry-only information:
▪ Date approver received request for recommendation.
▪ Approver’s name.
▪ Action requested.
▪ Date the approver made a recommendation.
▪ Recommendation (approved/denied).
▪ Remarks the approver made.
Figure 11. Tracking Window - CO Tracking List Panel
USAGE
IF OSC DENIES, MUST
KEEP CHANGE ORDER IN
SYSTEM AND CREATE A
NEW CHANGE ORDER.
QRG
CHANGE ORDERS
44 Creating and Modifying Change Orders
Field Description
Key Information
Contract ID Agency-defined contract ID code. Required.
Change Order Nbr Change Order Number. Sequential number assigned to all change orders for the contract.
Status Information
Sent Date Date the user was sent the document for approval.
Name Name of the approver.
Action Action taken by the approver.
Date Date of the approval of the change order
Recommendation Recommendation of the approver.
Remarks Remarks from the approver.
Table 11. Tracking Window - CO Tracking List Panel - Fields
Exercise 13
In this exercise, learn to track a change order.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073; CO from Exercise 6
1. On the Change Order Maintenance panel, double-click the
Tracking icon. SiteManager displays the Tracking window.
2. Click the CO Tracking List tab. SiteManager displays the CO
Tracking List panel.
3. Who is the next approver? _________________
4. To close the Tracking window, on the toolbar, click the Close
button.
You’ve tracked a change order.
ANSWERS
3. THE REGIONAL CO
PERSON YOU SELECTED
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 45
Summary
To display the Change Order Header window:
1. On the Main Panel panel, double-click the Change Orders
icon.
2. On the Change Orders panel, double-click the Change Order
Maintenance icon.
3. On the Change Order Maintenance panel, double-click the
Header icon.
To associate a change order with a contract:
1. While on the Header window in new mode, on the Services
menu, select the Choose Keys choice.
2. In the Contract ID area, double-click the desired contract.
To create a change order:
1. While on the Header window, with an associated contract, in
the Description field, type the desired description.
2. In the Reason Code dropdown list, select the desired choice.
3. In the CO Type dropdown list, select the desired choice.
4. In the Functions area, select desired check boxes.
5. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
To modify existing contract items:
1. On a change order with the Overruns/Underruns function
selected, on the Header window’s Services menu, select the
CO Items choice.
2. On the CO Items window, on the Services menu, select the
New CO Item choice.
3. On the Select Contract Items window, double-click the desired
item.
4. On the Change Order Item panel, in the Change Order Item
Description field, type the desired text.
5. In the This Change Order field, type the desired quantity.
46 Creating and Modifying Change Orders
6. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
To view the Item Summary window:
1. On the Change Order Maintenance panel, double-click the
Item Summary icon.
2. In the Change Order Items Select window, in the Change
Order Items area, in the Item Nbr column, double-click the
desired item.
To display the Change Order Items window:
1. While on the Header window, on the Services menu, select the
CO Items choice.
To add a new item to a contract:
1. On the Change Order Items window, click the New Contract
Item tab.
2. In the Project Nbr dropdown list, select the desired choice.
3. In the Category Nbr dropdown list, select the desired choice.
4. In the Line Item Nbr field, type the desired number.
5. In the Item Code field, type the desired number.
6. In the Unit Price field, type the desired price.
7. In the Proposal Line Nbr field, type the number entered in the
Line Item Number field.
8. Click the Change Order Item tab.
9. In the Change Order Item Description field, type the desired
text.
10. In the This Change Order: Quantity field, type the desired
quantity.
11. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
To calculate a change order:
1. While on the Header window, on the Services menu, select the
Calculate Change Order choice.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 47
To modify the completion date:
1. While on a change order with a Time Adjustments function, on
the Services menu, select the CO Time Adjustments choice.
2. On the Change Order Time Adjustments window, verify that
the or Contract Completion button has been selected by
default.
3. In the Adjusted Completion Date field, type the desired date.
4. In the Explanation field, type the desired text.
5. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
To display the Change Order Explanations window:
1. On the Change Order Maintenance panel, double-click the
Change Order Explanations icon. SiteManager displays the
Change Order Explanations window.
To select a standard explanation:
1. While on the Change Order Explanations window, on the
toolbar, click the New button.
2. In the Pick Std Exp. ID field, right-click and select the Search
choice.
3. In the Search Window window, in the Explanation ID
column, double-click the desired choice.
4. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
To enter a non-standard explanation:
1. While on the Change Order Explanations window, on the
explanation type dropdown list, select the desired choice.
2. In the Enter Text Below field, type the desired text.
3. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
To select approvers for approval groups:
1. On the Header window, in the Status dropdown list, select the
Pending choice.
2. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
3. In the message, click the Yes button.
48 Creating and Modifying Change Orders
4. In the Change Order #< >Approval window, in the Groups
for Approval area, select the first choice.
5. In the available approvers pane, select the desired approver.
6. Click the Add button.
7. Repeat Steps 4-6 for all groups.
8. Click the OK button.
9. In the message, click the OK button.
To override approval level.
1. On the Header window, select the Override Approval Rules
check box.
2. In the Status dropdown list, select the Pending choice.
3. On the toolbar, click the Save button. SiteManager displays a
message prompting the user to confirm the change in status.
4. In the message, click the Yes button. SiteManager displays the
Change Order < > Approval window.
5. Click the New button.
6. In the Groups for Approval dropdown list, select the desired
choice.
7. In the User ID dropdown list, select the desired choice.
8. Repeat Steps 5-7 as necessary.
9. Click the OK button. SiteManager displays a message to
inform you that the mail has been sent.
10. In the message, click the OK button. SiteManager displays the
Header window in inquiry-only mode with a Pending status
and an approval level of OVERRIDE.
To modify a change order approver during the approval cycle:
1. While on the Header window for a change order in Pending
status, from the Services menu, select the Forward to choice.
SiteManager displays the Change Order < > Approval
window with the approvers selected by the change order
creator.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 49
2. In the Groups for Approval area, select the approval group
with the approver you desire to change.
3. Click the Remove button. SiteManager moves the name of the
original approver to the available approvers pane.
4. In the selected approvers pane, select the name of the new
approver.
5. Click the Add button. SiteManager moves the name of the new
approver to the selected approvers pane.
6. Click the OK button. SiteManager closes the Change Order < >
Approval window and displays the Header window.
7. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
To review and approve a change order for one approval level:
1. On the Change Order Maintenance panel, double-click the
Change Order Review / Approve icon.
2. On the Change Order Review / Approval window, double-click
the desired contract.
3. Double-click the desired change order.
4. On the Change Order Approval window, on the Services
menu, select the Change Order choice.
5. On the Header window, on the Services menu, select the
desired choice.
6. Close any unneeded windows.
7. On the Change Order Approval window, in the
Recommendation area, select the Approved button.
8. On the toolbar, click the Remarks button.
9. In the Remarks (General Remarks) field, type the desired
text.
10. Close the Remarks window.
11. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
12. In the message, click the Yes button.
13. In the message, click the OK button.
50 Creating and Modifying Change Orders
To track a change order:
1. On the Change Order Maintenance panel, double-click the
Tracking icon.
2. On the Tracking window, click the CO Tracking List tab.
SiteManager displays the CO Tracking List panel.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 51
Review Exercise
In this exercise, create a change order to add a new item to the
contract.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073; Next Available Change Order
1. Create a new change order for contract D263073 to add a new
item.
2. Add item code 520.6090002, SAWCUTTING CURB, with a
quantity of 14.32 at a unit price of $130.98. Project number
904131; category 0001. Line item number get next line
number.
3. Add explanations for a specific line item.
Hint! Must click New.
4. Calculate.
5. Exit SiteManager.
USAGE
IMPORTANT FOR
ENTERING ITEM CODE
CORRECTLY.
SYSTEM REQUIRES
EIGHT CHARACTERS
(INCLUDING SPACES) AFTER THE DECIMAL.
ITEM CODES USE THE
FOLLOWING FORMAT: AAA.BBBBBBCC.
AAA = PRIMARY SPEC #
BBBBBB = SECONDARY SPEC #
CC = REG/MO ORIGINATED
SPECIAL SPEC #
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 1
Adding and Maintaining Contract Funding Sources
In this chapter, you will receive instruction about the following:
▪ Understanding Funding 2
▪ Understanding Categories 3
▪ Defining New Categories 3
▪ Viewing Contract Funding Sources 8
▪ Summary 11
2 Adding and Maintaining Contract Funding Sources
Understanding Funding
To specify funding for the entire contract, including a contract’s projects,
categories, and line items, use the Contract Funding window. Funding can
be simple or complex. You can fund the whole contract with one funding
source, or you can select a separate funding source for each project, or
category, or line item.
Every selected funding source requires a source participation percent and a
priority order. The system uses these to determine how to apply funding.
▪ If you fund any part of an active contract with multiple
sources, the combined funding must equal 100%.
▪ If you assign more than one priority level, the combined
funding for each priority level must equal 100%.
▪ If you assign a cap amount to a funding source, when the
highest priority funding source reaches its cap amount, the
funding source with the next highest priority continues the
funding. If the lowest priority level fund has a cap amount,
SiteManager ignores the cap amount until you add an even
lower level fund.
To link funding sources to items, use categories. When you add an item to
a contract, associate the item to a funding source by selecting a category.
Usage: The MO Account Funding group maintains and finalizes funding
sources.
Usage: Fiscal shares are SiteManager’s categories.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 3
Understanding Categories
To group items funded from the same source, use categories. Each
category on a project can have a different funding source.
Note: You cannot delete a category with associated items.
Defining New Categories
To define a new category for a funding source, use the Categories
window. Use the Categories window to modify and delete existing
categories.
Usage: To add a new funding source that does not fit into existing
categories, PM group initiates a new category.
Figure 1. Categories Window
4 Adding and Maintaining Contract Funding Sources
Field Name Description
Key Information
Contract ID Agency-defined code for the contract.
PCN Project Control Number. Agency-defined. Protected.
Category Information
Category Number Grouping of items assigned during pre-construction. Unique within a project. Protected. Erroneously created categories must be deleted.
Description Description (of the category).
Work Class Type Category Work Class Type. Classification of work for a category within a project.
Selected Category Detail Information
Catg Nbr Category Number. Grouping of items assigned during pre-construction. Unique within a project. Protected. Erroneously created categories must be deleted. Usage: Provided by the Zonal Administrator.
Federal Aid # Federal, State, or Province Project Number (for the category). If not entered, defaults to the Fed St/Pr Prj Nbr for the project. Usage: Label customized from Fed St/Pr Prj Nbr.
Desc Description (of the category). Usage: Default description provided by the Zonal Administrator. Final description recorded by the Project Manager.
Length Length of road represented by the category. If more than one category contains work for the same portion of road, the length is split between them.
Width Width of road represented by this category. If more than one Category contains work for the same portion of road, the width is split between them.
Catg Wk Cls Type Category Work Class Type. Classification of work for a category within a project.
Bridge ID Identifies a bridge or other structure. Agency-defined. Use only if the category represents structure work.
Engr Pct Engineering Percentage. Engineering construction percentage that represents the cost of managing a category. Percentage of the total category item amounts used to compute the total category estimated cost: [total category item amount x (100 + engineering percentage)].
Brdg Type Bridge Type (represented by this category). Protected if the Bridge ID field is empty.
Fed Wrk Catg Type
Federal Work Category Type. Identifies the type of work for the category.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 5
Field Name Description
Bridge Span Nbr Bridge Span Number. Number of spans within the bridge structure. Protected if the Bridge ID field is empty.
Rd Sect Nbr Road Section Number. Where the category work is done.
Fed Wrk Cls Type Federal Work Class Type. Class of construction used for the category.
Brdg Lth Bridge Length. Length of the structure represented by this category. Protected if the Bridge ID field is empty.
Hwy Nbr Highway Number. Where the primary category work occurs.
Suppl Wrk Cls Type
Supplementary Work Class Type. Federal supplementary work class for a category.
Brdg Wth Bridge Width. Width of the structure represented by this category. Protected if the Bridge ID field is empty.
Hwy Type Highway Type. Where the primary category work is done. Agency-defined.
Beg Sta Nbr Beginning Station Number. Precisely defines the station number where the category work begins.
Beg Termini Beginning Termini. Precisely defines the termini where the category work begins.
Unit Nbr Unit Number (under which the category is grouped for reporting purposes). Usage: Provided by the Regional Change Order person and recorded by the Project Manager.
End Sta Nbr Ending Station Number. Precisely defines the station number where the category work ends.
End Termini Ending Termini. Precisely defines the termini where the Category work ends.
Desc Description (of the unit number under which the category is grouped). Usage: Provided and recorded by the Project Manager.
Table 1. Categories Window – Fields
6 Adding and Maintaining Contract Funding Sources
Exercise 1
In this exercise, learn to define a category.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073
Usage: Contact your Zonal Administrator to create a row for a
new category.
Usage: Contact your Regional Change Order person for the
new unit number (last three digits of the PIN). Regional
Change Order person will get the new unit number from
Planning (PPM).
1. Start and log on to SiteManager as user regxx01.
2. On the Main Panel panel, double-click the Contract
Administration icon. SiteManager displays the Contract
Administration panel.
3. Double-click the Contract Records icon. SiteManager
displays the Contract Records panel.
4. Double-click the Categories icon. SiteManager displays the
Select Contract Project window.
5. In the Contract ID area, in the Contract ID column, double-
click D263073.
6. In the PIN column, double-click 904131. SiteManager displays
the Categories window.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 7
Now, let’s modify the new category record.
7. Click on category 2 in the upper pane, in the Description
column, select TBD.
8. In the lower pane, in the Desc field (for the category number),
select the current entry and type NASSAU COUNTY – Exits
40 to 43.
9. In the Unit Nbr field, type 301.
10. In the Desc field (for the unit number), type
PREVENTATIVE MAINT.
11. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
12. To close the Categories window, click the Close button.
13. On the toolbar, click the Exit SiteManager button.
Usage: Contact the Regional Change Order person to get
information about a new funding source.
You’ve defined a new category.
USAGE
THE PM RECEIVES THE
UNIT NUMBER FROM THE
RCO.
USAGE
‘TBD’ APPEARS IN THE
DESCRIPTION FIELD OF
THE NEW ROW OF THE
CATEGORY THE ZONAL
ADMINISTRATOR CREATED.
8 Adding and Maintaining Contract Funding Sources
Viewing Contract Funding Sources
To View a contract funding source and associate it to a category, use the
Contract Funding window.
Figure 2. Contract Funding Window
Field Name Description
Key Information
Contract ID Agency-defined code for the contract.
List of Funding Sources
Contract ID Agency-defined code for the contract.
Project Number Agency-defined code for the project.
Category Number Grouping of items based on funding.
Funding Source Code
Identifies a particular source of funding. Required. Read-only after save.
Funding Source Description
Description of the funding source.
Priority Order Indicates order funds are appropriated to the contract.
Source Participation Percent
Percentage of the total amount in the project/category provided by the funding source. Required. Valid percentage is between 1 and 100.
Selected Funding Source Detail
Project Number Agency-defined code for the project.
Funding Source Code
Identifies a particular source of funding. Required. Read-only after save. Usage: Recorded by the Main Office Accounting.
Funding Source Description
Description of the funding source.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 9
Field Name Description
Category Number Grouping of items based on funding. Usage: Selected by the Regional Change Order person.
Account Code Not Used
Product Code Not Used
Source Participation Percent
Percentage of the total amount in the project/category provided by the funding source. Required. Valid percentage is between 1 and 100. Usage: Recorded by the Main Office Accounting..
Priority Order Indicates order funds are appropriated to the contract. Usage: Recorded by the Main Office Accounting..
Local Agreement Nbr
Local Agreement Number. Identifies an agreement between a local authority and the agency. Agreement defines the funding provided by the local authority with regard to a particular job.
Combine Not Used
Send to OSC Indicates that funding record is ready to send to OSC via the financial interface. Usage: Custom generic field.
Change Order # Indicates change order number created for the funding amount change (could include a new funding record, if it is for a new category and funding record). Usage: Custom generic field.
Funding CO Amt Usage: Works with ‘Send to OSC’ and ‘CO Number’ fields to indicate amount of the funding change (for a change order change which can be defined as a new funding record due to a new item on the contract or one that has increase or decreased funding). Once the change order has been approved, SiteManager adjusts the current cap amount by the funding CO amount. Usage: Renamed field from ‘Fed/State Project Nbr’.
Subledger Code provided to OSC when there's a Local Share or a Utility that's paying for a share. Usage: Customized label.
Related Item Not Used
State Funding Code
Agency-defined. Required by financial system.
Proposal Line Nbr Not Used
Original Cap Amt Original Cap Amount. Original funding limit.
Prev Estimates Amt Used
Previous Estimates Amount Used. Auto-calculated.
Current Cap Amt Current Cap Amount. Current funding limit.
Current Estimate Amt Used
Current Estimate Amount Used. Amount used in current estimate. Auto-calculated.
Table 2. Contract Funding Window – Fields
10 Adding and Maintaining Contract Funding Sources
Understanding Funding Sources
Remember the following key points about funding:
▪ You must fully fund all active contracts.
▪ If you fund any part of the contract with multiple sources,
the combined funding must equal 100%.
▪ If you assign more than one priority level, the combined
funding for each priority level must equal 100%.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 11
Summary
To access the Contract Records panel:
1. On the Main Panel panel, double-click the Contract
Administration icon.
2. On the Contract Administration panel, double-click the
Contract Records icon.
To access the Categories window:
1. On the Contract Records panel, double-click the Categories
icon.
2. In the Select Contract Project window’s Contract ID area,
double-click the desired contract.
3. In the Project Number column, double-click the desired
project.
To define a new category (performed by the Project Manager after
the Zonal Administrator creates a record):
1. In the Desc field (for the category number), type the desired
text.
2. In the Unit Nbr field, type the desired value.
3. In the Desc field (for the unit number), type the desired text.
4. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
To access the Contract Funding window:
1. On the Contract Records panel, double-click the Contract
Funding icon.
2. In the Contract List window, double-click the desired contract
to view the Funding.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 1
Creating Dispute and Claim Records
In this chapter, you will receive instruction about the following:
▪ Understanding Disputes and Claims 2
▪ Creating Dispute and Claim Records 2
▪ Finalizing Dispute and Claim Records 12
▪ Summary 13
▪ Review Exercise 15
2 Creating Dispute and Claim Records
Understanding Disputes and Claims
To track disputes and claims associated with a contract, link to related
records, and notify recipients.
Creating Dispute and Claim Records
To add, modify, and delete dispute and claim records, use the
Disputes/Claims window.
Recording Basic Description Information
The Disputes/Claims window’s Description panel displays the basic
dispute or claim description data.
Figure 1. Disputes/Claims Window - Description Panel
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 3
Field Description
Key Information
Contract ID ID for the contract. Agency-defined.
Dispute / Claim Information
Dispute ID ID for the dispute or claim. System-generated.
Type Ind Type Indicator. Identifies whether this is a dispute or a claim. Required.
Status Status of the dispute or claim (for example, Open, Resolved, Denied). Required.
Subcontr ID Subcontractor ID. ID for the subcontractor associated with the dispute or claim. Agency-defined.
Category Type Category of the dispute or claim. Agency-defined. Required.
Estimate Nbr Estimate Number. Assigned to the estimate during the estimate generation process. Searchable. System-generated.
Requested Days Number of days requested by the contractor in the dispute or claim. Required if Requested Amt not provided.
Requested Amt Requested Amount. Dollar amount requested by the contractor in the dispute or claim. Required if Requested Days not provided.
Settled Days Days settled for the dispute or claim.
Settled Amt Settled Amount. Amount settled for the dispute or claim.
Received Date Date the dispute or claim was received by the department. Required.
Logged Date Date the dispute or claim was entered into SiteManager. System-generated.
Diary Start Date Start date of a range of diaries that document the dispute or claim. Cannot be later than the current date.
Diary End Date End date of a range of diaries that document the dispute or claim. Must be later than or the same as the date in the Diary Start Date field.
Contractor Accepted Date
Date the contractor accepted the resolution. Cannot be after the current date or the same as the date in the Dept Resolved Date field.
Dept Resolved Date Date the dispute or claim was resolved or overridden by the department. Cannot be after the current date.
FHWA Concurrence Date
Date the FHWA concurred with the resolution. Cannot be later than the current date.
Release/Payment Date
Date the payment was released for the dispute or claim. Cannot be later than the current date.
Resolution Reason Type
Identifies how the dispute or claim was resolved.
Remarks Remarks about the dispute or claim.
4 Creating Dispute and Claim Records
Field Description
Line Item Information
Project Number ID for the project related to the dispute or claim. Agency-defined.
Line Item Line item number of an item associated with the dispute or claim. Searchable. An item can be in multiple disputes.
Item Code Agency-defined code for the item associated with the dispute or claim.
Short Description Short description of the Item associated with the dispute or claim.
Seq Nbr Sequence Number. Identifies the project and line item associated with the dispute or claim. System-generated.
Supplemental Description 1
Description supplemental to the item's description.
Supplemental Description 2
Description supplemental to the item's description.
Table 1. Disputes / Claims Window - Description Panel - Fields
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 5
Exercise 1
In this exercise, learn to create a dispute record and enter the basic
information about the dispute.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073
1. Start and log on to SiteManager as regxx01.
2. On the Main Panel panel, double-click the Contract
Administration icon.
3. On the Contract Administration panel, double-click the
Contract Records icon.
4. On the Contract Records panel, double-click the
Dispute/Claims icon. SiteManager displays the Disputes /
Claims window.
5. On the Services menu, select the Choose Keys choice.
SiteManager displays the Select Contract window.
6. In the Contract ID area, double-click D263073.
Now, let’s record the dispute.
7. In the Type Ind dropdown list, select the Dispute choice.
8. In the Status dropdown list, select Received.
9. In the Subcontr ID dropdown list, select the STRAIGHT
LINE INDUSTRIES INC choice.
10. In the Category Type dropdown list, select the Scope of
Work choice.
11. In the Requested Days field, type 14.
12. In the Received Date field, pick a date from last month.
13. In the Diary Start Date field, type several days after date
above.
14. In the Diary End Date field, type today’s date.
6 Creating Dispute and Claim Records
15. In Remarks field, type date of initial Date received, EIC:
Written notification received from Economy Paving on
behalf of Straight Line claiming contract plans had not
clearly delineated work boundaries and cost him two
weeks.
Now, let’s record the associated line item.
16. Click in the lower pane.
17. On the toolbar, click the New button. SiteManager inserts a
new row.
18. In the Project Number dropdown list, select 904131.
19. In the Line Item field, type 0216.
20. On your keyboard, press the Tab key. SiteManager displays
the item code, short description, sequence number, and
supplemental descriptions.
21. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
22. What is the dispute ID? ___________
You’ve created a dispute record and entered basic information.
ANSWERS
22. 2
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 7
Adding Related Records
The Disputes/Claims window’s Related Records panel displays a list of
SiteManager records related to the selected dispute or claim. The list
includes all SiteManager windows that include references to a dispute.
Once a window includes a reference to a dispute, from the
Disputes/Claims window, navigate directly to the corresponding
SiteManager window.
Note: Related records may include correspondence logs, change orders,
line items, and estimates. On the related window, create a link to a dispute
record. For example, if a dispute relates to a correspondence log, on the
Correspondence Log window, link the dispute ID.
Figure 2. Disputes / Claims Window - Related Records Panel
Field Description
Contract ID ID for the contract. Agency-defined.
Dispute ID ID for the dispute or claim. System-generated.
Entered Date Date the record related to the dispute or claim was entered.
Related Records
Records related to the dispute or claim.
Key Sequence number that identifies the record associated with the dispute or claim. System-generated.
Table 2. Disputes / Claims Window - Related Records Panel - Fields
8 Creating Dispute and Claim Records
Exercise 2
In this exercise, learn to add a record related to the dispute.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073; 2 (dispute ID)
1. On the toolbar, click the SiteManager Panel button.
SiteManager displays the Contract Records panel.
2. On the Contract Records panel, double-click the
Correspondence Log icon. SiteManager displays the
Correspondence Log window.
3. On the toolbar, click the Open button. SiteManager displays
the Select Correspondence window.
4. In the Correspondence Log area, in the Major Topics
column, double-click Delay Guide Rail Dispute.
5. In the Dispute field, right-click and select the Search
choice. SiteManager displays the Search Window.
6. In the Dispute ID column, double-click 2. SiteManager
displays the dispute ID.
7. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
8. To close the Correspondence Log window, on the toolbar,
click the Close button. SiteManager displays the Disputes /
Claims window.
Now, let’s see the reference to the related record and open it from
the Disputes / Claims window.
9. Click the Related Records tab. SiteManager displays the
Related Records panel.
10. On the Services menu, select the View Correspondence
Log choice. The Correspondence Log window opens.
11. To close the Correspondence Log window, on the toolbar,
click the Close button.
You’ve viewed a record related to the dispute.
NOTE
WHEN YOU MAKE
CHANGES TO ONE
WINDOW THAT AFFECTS
THE DATA IN ANOTHER
OPEN WINDOW, YOU MAY
NEED TO USE FILE
REFRESH TO SEE THE
LATEST DATA IN THE
OTHER OPEN WINDOW.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 9
Recording Recipient Information
The Disputes/Claims window’s Recipients panel displays information
about the person assigned to respond to a dispute or claim.
Usage: SiteManager notifies each recipient of the pending assignment via
the State DOT email system.
Figure 3. Disputes / Claims Window - Recipients Panel
10 Creating Dispute and Claim Records
Field Description
Key Information
Contract ID ID for the contract. Agency-defined.
Dispute ID ID for the dispute or claim. System-generated.
List of Recipients
Recipient User ID of a person assigned to receive dispute or claim documents. Searchable. Required.
Due Date Date the dispute or claim document is due to be received by the recipient. Cannot be before the current date. Required.
Doc Sent Date Date the dispute or claim document was sent to the recipient. Cannot be later than the current date.
Doc Received Date
Date the recipient received the dispute or claim document. Should be later than or the same as the date in the Doc Sent Date field. Cannot be later than the current date.
Recipient Response Date
Date the recipient responded to the dispute or claim document. Should be later than or the same as the date in the Doc Sent Date field. Cannot be later than the current date.
Selected Recipient Information
Recipient User ID of a person assigned to receive dispute or claim documents. Searchable. Required.
Due Date Date the dispute or claim document is due to be received by the recipient. Cannot be before the current date. Required.
Doc Sent Date Date the dispute or claim document was sent to the recipient. Cannot be later than the current date.
Doc Received Date
Date the recipient received the dispute or claim document. Should be greater than or equal to the Doc Sent Date. Cannot be later than the current date.
Recipient Response Date
Date the recipient responded to the dispute or claim document. Should be later than or the same as the date in the Doc Sent Date field. Cannot be later than the current date.
Remarks Remarks received from the recipient of dispute or claim documents.
Table 3. Disputes / Claims Window - Recipients Panel - Fields
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 11
Exercise 3
In this exercise, learn to assign a person to respond to the dispute.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073; 2 (dispute ID)
1. On the Disputes / Claims window, click the Recipients tab.
SiteManager displays the Recipients panel.
2. In the Recipient field, right-click and select Search.
SiteManager displays the Search Window.
3. To sort the column, click the User ID column heading.
4. In the User ID column, double-click wzambito.
5. In the Due Date field, type tomorrow’s date.
6. In the Remarks field, type Received date, EIC: Written
dispute received from contractor.
7. On the toolbar, click the Save button. SiteManager displays
a message to inform you that mail has been sent.
8. In the message, click the OK button.
You’ve assigned a person to respond to the dispute record.
12 Creating Dispute and Claim Records
Finalizing Dispute and Claim Records
To finalize a dispute or claim record, change the status to Resolved or
Denied, record appropriate remarks, and select the appropriate resolution
reason type.
Exercise 4
In this exercise, learn to finalize a record related to the dispute.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073; 1 (dispute ID)
1. On the toolbar, click the Open button. SiteManager displays
the Select Contract Dispute window.
2. In the Dispute ID column, double-click 1. SiteManager
displays the Disputes / Claims window.
3. In the Status dropdown list, select the Denied choice.
4. In the Resolution Reason Type dropdown list, select
Resolved in the Region choice.
Now, let’s add a remark.
5. In the Remarks field, type todays date, EIC: Received
letter from Straightline accepting dispute denial.
6. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
You’ve finalized a record related to the dispute.
USAGE
INSERT LATEST REMARK
AT THE TOP OF FIELD.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 13
Summary
To open the Disputes / Claims window:
1. Start and log on to SiteManager.
2. On the Main Panel panel, double-click the Contract
Administration icon.
3. On the Contract Administration panel, double-click the
Contract Records icon.
4. On the Contract Records panel, double-click the
Dispute/Claims icon.
To open an existing dispute record:
1. On the Disputes / Claims window, on the toolbar, click the
Open button. SiteManager displays the Select Contract
Dispute window.
2. In the Contract ID area, double-click the desired contract.
3. In the Dispute Nbr area, in the Dispute ID column, double-
click the desired dispute number.
To record basic description information on a dispute record:
1. On the Disputes / Claims window, click the Description
tab.
2. In the Status dropdown list, select the desired status.
3. In the Settled Days field, type the desired days.
4. In the Dept Resolved Date field, type the desired date.
5. In the Resolution Reason Type field, select the desired
choice.
6. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
To track related records with a dispute record:
1. On the related record’s window, record the dispute ID from
the Disputes / Claims window.
2. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
14 Creating Dispute and Claim Records
To record recipient information on a dispute record:
1. On the Disputes / Claims window, click the Recipients tab.
2. In the Recipients field, right-click and select Search.
3. In the User ID column, double-click the desired choice.
4. In the Due Date field, type the desired date.
5. On the toolbar, click the Save button.
6. In the message, click the OK button.
To view a related record from the Disputes / Claims window:
1. On the Disputes / Claims window, click the Related
Records tab.
2. Select the desired related record.
3. On the Services menu, select the desired choice.
Project SiteManager® Construction Training Guide for NYSDOT 15
Review Exercise
In this exercise, mark an existing dispute record as denied.
User ID: regxx01 Password: pass1234 Connection: Server
Group Name: Project Manager (PM)
Keys: D263073; 3 (dispute ID)
1. Create a dispute record for contract D263073 about a letter
received today from Straightline claiming contract plans
did not establish work boundaries and cost them three
(3) days.
2. The dispute regards the scope of work for project number
904131, line item number 0216, item code 619.100101
3. Recipient John Izzo was notified today that the dispute
must be finalized by tomorrow.
4. Save.
5. Exit SiteManager.
Trainer remember to go in as RCA and reset the User Id’s used to PASSWORD
After Training is complete remember to open the Switcher App and change back to Production
(Prod)
NOTE
REQUESTED DAYS IS
NOT A REQUIRED FIELD
IF REQUESTED AMT
FIELD IS POPULATED.